JP2017086207A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To create new entertainment properties in a game machine having an AT game state.SOLUTION: A number of times to be managed is managed in an AT game state and, when the number of times to be managed reaches specific value, the AT game state is over. The number of times to be managed is updated in the way that a difference from a specific value decreases one by one every time a unit game is executed in the AT game state. Apart from this, the number of times to be managed is updated in the way that a difference from the specific value decreases when a specific condition is satisfied in the AT game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 73

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on the surface, a game medal, a coin, etc. (“medal etc.”) are inserted, and a start lever is operated by a player, and a plurality of reels are detected. A start switch that requests the start of rotation of the reel and a stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels is detected by the player, and a signal that requests the stop of rotation of the corresponding reel is output. A stop switch provided for each of the reels, a stepping motor for transmitting each driving force to each reel, and the operation of the stepping motor based on signals output from the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit that controls and rotates and stops each reel, and confirms that the start lever has been operated. And a so-called pachislot that stops the reel rotation based on the lottery result ("internal winning combination") and the timing at which the stop button is detected. Known gaming machines are known.

  As such a conventional gaming machine, there is an assist time (AT) for notifying a stop operation for winning a winning combination (small role) related to the payout of medals, and a role (replay) that triggers the re-game operation. It is known to have an ART state in which the winning probability of) is high. For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, an ART state and a special ART state having a higher replay win probability than the ART state are provided. In the ART state, one set (100 games) is played. On the condition that a replay such as a special replay is won in the special ART state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to add the number of ART sets. When the lottery is won, the number of ART sets is added.

JP 2013-248441 A

  The present inventor can create new entertainment characteristics by devising the game performed in the AT gaming state in the process of earnestly examining the gaming machine having the AT gaming state as described above. It came to the idea that it might be.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object thereof is to create new entertainment characteristics in gaming machines having an AT gaming state.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

(1) Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and reel display window 4) capable of performing symbol change display and stop display;
Start command means (for example, start lever 23 and start switch 79) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, an internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, the main CPU 93 executing the processing of FIG. 40),
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, variation control means (for example, processing in step S196 in FIG. 43 and step S465 in FIG. 49) that performs symbol variation display on the symbol display means. A main CPU 93) that executes the process of
Stop command means (for example, stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R and a stop switch) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
When a predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a predetermined stop operation, it corresponds to the predetermined internal winning combination In a display mode, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 93 that executes the process of FIG. 45 and the process of step S465 of FIG. 49) that stops and displays the symbols that have been subjected to the variable display by the fluctuation control means;
A notifying means for notifying stop operation information necessary for performing the predetermined stop operation (for example, a sub CPU 102 that executes a push-order navigation effect in ART);
AT operation means (for example, the sub CPU 102 that executes the process of step S964 in FIG. 67) that activates the AT gaming state that is notified by the notification means when a predetermined condition is established;
The number of times of management (for example, the value of the ART game number counter), which is the number of unit games managed in the AT gaming state, is an initial value (for example, 50) when the AT gaming state is activated by the AT operating means. An AT ending means (for example, the sub CPU 102 that executes the processing of step S885 in FIG. 63 and step S1996 in FIG. 79) for ending the AT gaming state when a specific value (for example, 0) is reached.
Each time a unit game is executed in the AT gaming state, the management target number counting means for updating the management target number so that the difference between the management target number and the specific value is decreased by one (for example, 63, the sub CPU 102 that executes the process of step S883 of FIG.
When a specific condition is satisfied in the AT gaming state, the management target is set such that a difference between the management target count and the specific value is reduced separately from the management target count update by the management target count counting means. Management target number special update means for updating the number of times (for example, step S1925 in FIG. 75 and sub CPU 102 that executes the processes in steps S1994 and S1995 in FIG. 79);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the invention of (1), the number of times of management is managed in the AT gaming state, and the AT gaming state ends when the number of times of management reaches a specific value. The number of times to be managed is updated so that the difference from the specific value is reduced by one each time the unit game is executed once in the AT gaming state. Separately from this, the number of management targets is updated so that the difference from the specific value becomes small when a specific condition is satisfied in the AT gaming state.

  Thus, according to the invention of (1), each time a unit game is executed once in the AT gaming state, the difference between the number of times of management and the specific value decreases by one, but the specific condition is satisfied. In this case, the difference is further reduced. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied, the timing at which the number of management targets reaches a specific value is advanced by an amount corresponding to the decrease. In other words, when a specific condition is satisfied, the number of unit games that can be executed in the AT gaming state (the number of AT games) decreases. As a result, it is possible to create a situation that makes the player feel uneasy about the specific condition being satisfied, and to create a tension of the player. As a result, the player can play the game while having a thrilling experience.

(2) The gaming machine of (1),
The stop control means includes
When a specific internal winning combination (for example, any one of the winning numbers “16” to “21” in FIG. 16) is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the stop command signal is specified by the stop instruction means. When output at the timing, the symbols constituting the specific symbol combination (for example, “anomalous special role”) are stopped and displayed on the symbol display means, while the stop command signal is received from the stop command means. If it is output at a timing other than the timing, the symbols other than the symbols constituting the specific symbol combination are stopped and displayed on the symbol display means,
The management object number special update means is:
When the specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the AT gaming state, when the stop command signal is output from the stop instruction means at a timing other than the specific timing (for example, In the case where the “unusual special role” is missed, the number of times of management so that the difference between the number of times of management and the specific value is reduced separately from the update of the number of times of management by the number of times of management target count (For example, the sub CPU 102 that executes the processes of steps S1994 and S1995 in FIG. 79),
It is characterized by that.

  According to the invention of (2), when a specific internal winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, when a stop operation is performed at a specific timing, symbols constituting a specific symbol combination are displayed in a stopped state. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed at a timing other than the specific timing, symbols other than the symbols constituting the specific symbol combination are stopped and displayed. That is, when the stop operation is not performed at a specific timing, the specific symbol combination is not stopped and displayed (the specific symbol combination is missed). When a specific internal winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the AT gaming state, when the stop operation is not performed at a specific timing, the difference between the number of management targets and the specific value becomes small. That is, when a specific symbol combination is missed, the number of AT games decreases.

  Thus, according to the invention of (2), the result of the stop operation by the player is reflected in the number of unit games that can be executed in the AT game state, and the number of AT games decreases depending on the result of the stop operation. there is a possibility. Therefore, it is possible for the player to start the stop operation with a sense of tension, and to have the game played while having a more thrilling experience. In addition, it becomes possible to intervene the pressing technique in the number of unit games that can be executed in the AT gaming state, and the player can enjoy the pressing operation in the AT gaming state.

(3) The gaming machine of (1),
The management object number special update means is:
When the specific condition is satisfied after the predetermined management target number of times special update condition is satisfied in the AT gaming state, the management target number is updated so that a difference between the management target number and the specific value is reduced. On the other hand, if the specific condition is not satisfied, the management target number is updated so that the difference between the management target number and the specific value is increased (for example, in steps S2925 and S2927 in FIG. 81). Sub CPU 102 that executes the process and the process of step S1994, step S1995 of FIG. 79, and step S2968 of FIG.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the invention of (3), when the specific condition is satisfied after the predetermined management target number of times special update condition is satisfied in the AT gaming state, the difference between the management target number of times and the specific value is reduced. When the specific condition is not satisfied, the difference between the number of times of management and the specific value increases. That is, after a predetermined management target number of times special update condition is satisfied, if a specific condition is satisfied, the number of AT games decreases. On the other hand, if a specific condition is not satisfied, the number of AT games increases. To do.

  As described above, when the predetermined management target number special update condition is satisfied, the number of AT games may decrease or increase depending on whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. And the change in the number of games in the process of digesting the AT gaming state can be varied. In addition, the player's feelings of anxiety about the establishment of a specific condition and the player's expectation for the absence of a specific condition can be mixed, and this conflicting player's feelings can be balanced. By creating well, it is possible to provide an interesting AT gaming state in which the player is not bored.

(4) Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and reel display window 4) capable of performing symbol change display and stop display;
Start command means (for example, start lever 23 and start switch 79) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, an internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, the main CPU 93 executing the processing of FIG. 40),
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, variation control means (for example, processing in step S196 in FIG. 43 and step S465 in FIG. 49) that performs symbol variation display on the symbol display means. A main CPU 93) that executes the process of
Stop command means (for example, stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R and a stop switch) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
When a predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a predetermined stop operation, it corresponds to the predetermined internal winning combination In a display mode, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 93 that executes the process of FIG. 45 and the process of step S465 of FIG. 49) that stops and displays the symbols that have been subjected to the variable display by the fluctuation control means;
A notifying means for notifying stop operation information necessary for performing the predetermined stop operation (for example, a sub CPU 102 that executes a push-order navigation effect in ART);
AT operation means (for example, the sub CPU 102 that executes the process of step S964 in FIG. 67) that activates the AT gaming state that is notified by the notification means when a predetermined condition is established;
A managed variable (for example, the value of the ART game number counter) managed in the AT gaming state is set to a specific value (for example, 50) from an initial value (for example, 50) when the AT gaming state is activated by the AT operating means. , 0), the AT end means for ending the AT gaming state (for example, the sub CPU 102 that executes the processing of step S885 in FIG. 63 and step S1996 in FIG. 79),
When the first specific condition is satisfied in the AT gaming state, a first managed variable updating unit (for example, for updating the managed variable so that a difference between the managed variable and the specific value is reduced) 63. The sub CPU 102 that executes the process of step S883 in FIG.
When the second specific condition is satisfied in the AT gaming state, the difference between the managed variable and the specific value is reduced separately from the update of the managed variable by the first managed variable updating means. A second managed object variable updating means for updating the managed object variable (for example, step S1925 in FIG. 75 and sub CPU 102 that executes the processes in steps S1994 and S1995 in FIG. 79);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the invention of (4), the managed variable is managed in the AT gaming state, and the AT gaming state ends when the managed variable reaches a specific value. The managed variable is updated so that the difference from the specific value becomes small when the first specific condition is satisfied in the AT gaming state. Separately from this, the managed variable is updated so that the difference from the specific value becomes small when the second specific condition is satisfied in the AT gaming state.

  Thus, according to the invention of (4), not only when the first specific condition is satisfied in the AT gaming state but also when the second specific condition is satisfied, the managed variable and the specific value are The difference of becomes smaller. For this reason, when the second specific condition is satisfied, the managed variable approaches a specific value (that is, approaches the end of the AT gaming state) as much as the difference becomes smaller accordingly. As a result, it is possible to create a situation that makes the player feel anxious about the second specific condition being satisfied, and to create a tension of the player. As a result, the player can play the game while having a thrilling experience.

  According to the present invention, new entertainment can be created in a gaming machine having an AT gaming state.

It is a figure which shows the function flow of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition transition of the game state (main) which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition transition of the game state (sub) which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the functional flow of special ART which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the external structure of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the inside of the cabinet in the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the back surface side of the front door in the pachi-slot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the main control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | positioning table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (B) is a figure which shows the symbol code table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for normal game states which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (B) is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for MB which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination determination table for a small combination and replay which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination determination table for a small combination and replay which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination determination table for MB which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the pushing order and winning combination in the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the pushing order and winning combination in the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a figure which shows the number selection table for spinning cylinder stops which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (B) is a figure which shows the reel stop initial setting table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the drawing priority order table selection table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the drawing priority order table selection table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the drawing priority order table selection table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the drawing priority order table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal winning combination storage area which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol code storage area which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display combination storage area which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a figure which shows the operation | movement stop button storage area which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (B) is a figure which shows the pressing order storage area | region which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (B) is a figure which shows the carryover combination storage area which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the drawing priority order data storage area which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the probability change promotion lottery table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the probability change promotion lottery table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. (A)-(f) is a figure which shows the probability change promotion lottery table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the generation | occurrence | production navigation determination table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of power-on performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the medal reception and start check process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the internal lottery process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the lock production | presentation determination process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop initial setting process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the reel rotation start process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing priority order table selection process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows RT control processing performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus completion | finish check process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus operation | movement check process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the sub control process performed at the time of power activation in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the lamp | ramp control task performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the sound control task performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the mother task performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main task performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main board | substrate communication task performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the animation task performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production content determination process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start command reception performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the normal time process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the precursor effect process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ART preparatory process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process in ART performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special ART precursory process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process in special ART performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the lock production | presentation determination command reception performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the display command reception performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process in MB performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process in the specialization zone of an addition performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the penalty process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the reel stop command reception performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the penalty sound setting process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the reduction of the number of ART games. It is a flowchart which shows the special ART precursory process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ART game number reduction effect execution process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the reduction game number determination table for ART game number reduction effects. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the display command reception performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the display command reception performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ART game number reduction process at the time of MB prize performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the reduction game number determination table for MB prize winning times. It is a flowchart which shows the ART game number reduction effect execution process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the display command reception performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the display command reception performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an ART transfer route. (A) is a figure which shows the ART aspect in case an ART winning probability is relatively low. (B) is a diagram showing an ART mode when the ART winning probability is medium. (C) is a figure which shows the ART aspect in case an ART winning probability is relatively high. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the start command reception performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ART system selection process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ART transfer route 2 selection process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ART transfer route 3 selection process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ART mode 8 selection process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ART transfer route 5 selection process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ART mode 9 selection process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the normal time process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ART lottery process from the precursor performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ART lottery process from the challenge in MB performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the precursor effect process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ART completion | finish sheet number counter setting process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process in ART performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the lock production | presentation determination command reception performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st final addition game number determination process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd final addition game number determination process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the display command reception performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the cherry stock counter addition process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability mode process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ART lottery process from winning a prize performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ART completion | finish check process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the ART continuous lottery process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process in MB performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the warning effect which passes when shifting to ART. It is a flowchart which shows the main control process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the wait process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the medal reception and start check process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the medal insertion check process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production content determination process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production content determination process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the game start command reception performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of demo transfer command reception performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the normal time process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the gasset precursor effect data set process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows this indication effect data set process performed in the sub control circuit of the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the number effect game determination table.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

[Functional flow of pachislot]
First, a functional flow of a gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as a pachislot) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a functional flow of a pachislot according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  In the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to the medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as game media.

  When a player inserts a medal and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along a winning determination line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which medals are paid out, replays, etc. are given to the player, and those other than so-called “losing”. Yes.

  Subsequently, after a plurality of reels (left reel, middle reel, and right reel) have been rotated, when the player presses the stop button, the reel stop control means has the internal winning combination and the stop button Control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed based on the pressed timing.

  Here, in the pachislot, basically, the control of stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols”, and the maximum number is determined as four symbols.

  The reel stop control means displays the symbol combination as much as possible along the winning determination line using the specified time when an internal winning combination permitting display of the symbol combination related to winning is determined. Stop the reel rotation so that On the other hand, for the combination of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination, the reel rotation is stopped so that the combination is not displayed along the winning determination line using the specified time.

  Thus, when the rotation of the plurality of reels is all stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the winning determination line is related to winning. When it is determined that the prize is related to a prize, a bonus such as a medal payout is given to the player. A series of flows as described above is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot.

  In this specification, the reel stop operation (stop button operation) that is performed first when all the reels (left reel, middle reel, and right reel) are rotating is referred to as a first stop operation. The stop operation performed after the first stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

  Also, in the pachislot, in the above-described series of flows, various effects can be achieved by using video display performed by a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof. Done.

  When the player operates the start lever, an effect random number value (hereinafter referred to as effect random number value) is extracted separately from the random value used for determining the internal winning combination. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines, by lottery, what is to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination.

  When the content of the production is determined, the production execution means is linked to each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reel is started, when the rotation of each reel is stopped, or when the presence / absence of a prize is determined. To proceed with the production. In this way, in the pachislot, the player is given the opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination. As a result, the player's interest is improved.

[Game state (main)]
The gaming state (main) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a transition transition of the game state (main) according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment, a gaming state (main) and a gaming state (sub) are provided. The gaming state (main) is a gaming state controlled by the main control circuit. The gaming state (sub) is a gaming state controlled by the sub control circuit. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a gaming state (main) among these gaming states.

  In the pachi-slot according to the present embodiment, three types of gaming states, that is, an RT0 gaming state, an RT1 gaming state, and an RT2 gaming state are provided as the gaming state (main). In the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, and the RT2 gaming state, replay (middle lip 1, lower lip 1-2, CU lip 1-3, CD lip 1-4, upper lip 1-12, 7 control) The probabilities of determining Lips 1-18, Raising Lips 1-9, Chance Lips 1-15, and BAR Control Lips 1-7 are different from each other. In this specification, “replay” may be referred to as “lip”.

  The probability that the replay is determined as an internal winning combination is higher in the RT2 gaming state than in the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state (see FIG. 16A).

  The RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, and the RT2 gaming state are provided with a normal state, between MB flags, and an MB gaming state, respectively.

  In the normal state, when an MB (any of MB1 to MB3, see FIG. 19) is determined as an internal winning combination (when an internal winning combination is made), the process moves between MB flags. The MB is a so-called carryover combination (see FIG. 31B). When the MB is won internally, the combination of symbols corresponding to the MB (see FIG. 14) is stopped and displayed along the winning determination line (MB Until the prize is won), the state where the MB is won internally is carried over. Between the MB flags, the state where the MB is won internally is carried over. When an MB wins between MB flags, the state shifts to the MB gaming state. When the unit game is played a predetermined number of times in the MB game state, the normal state is restored.

  When the gaming state (main) is the RT0 gaming state or the RT2 gaming state, if a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the left spilled eyes 1 to 6 (see FIG. 14) is stopped and displayed along the winning determination line (When any of the left spills 1 to 6 wins), the gaming state (main) shifts from the RT0 gaming state or the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. The winning of left spilled eyes 1-6 will be described later.

  When the gaming state (main) is the RT1 gaming state, if a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the raising replies 1 to 9 (see FIG. 14) is stopped and displayed along the winning determination line (raising lip 1 to When any of 9 wins, the gaming state (main) shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. The winnings of the raising lips 1 to 9 will be described later.

  When the gaming state (main) is the RT1 gaming state or the RT2 gaming state, when a combination of symbols corresponding to any of CU Lips 1 to 3 (see FIG. 14) is stopped and displayed along the winning determination line ( When any of CU Lips 1 to 3 wins, the gaming state (main) shifts from the RT1 gaming state or the RT2 gaming state to the RT0 gaming state. The winning of CU Lips 1 to 3 will be described later.

[Game state (sub)]
The gaming state (sub) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a transition transition of the gaming state (sub) according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the pachi-slot according to the present embodiment, a normal gaming state and an ART are provided as the gaming state (sub). ART is an AT gaming state and is an RT2 gaming state.

  The AT gaming state is a state in which the push order for stopping the internal winning combination (stop button stop order) is notified. In the AT gaming state, when a predetermined push order (an internal winning combination where a winning is achieved by pressing the stop button in an appropriate order, see FIG. 20 and FIG. 21) is won internally When the pressing order to be notified is notified, the player can win the pressing order by operating the stop button according to the notified pressing order.

  As described above, the RT2 game state is a game state controlled by the main control circuit, but information indicating the game state (main) is transmitted from the main control circuit to the sub control circuit, It is also managed by the control circuit.

  As shown in FIG. 3, there are roughly two routes in which the gaming state (sub) shifts from the normal gaming state to the ART. The first route is a route that shifts from the normal gaming state to ART via the precursor effect, and the second route is a route that shifts from the normal gaming state to ART via the MB medium challenge effect. The first route will be described later with reference to FIGS. The second route will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 68.

  In both the first route and the second route, a transition from the normal gaming state to ART is made on condition that the ART lottery is won. Specifically, when an ART lottery is won in the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to ART preparation at a predetermined timing. When any of the raising lips 1 to 9 is internally won during ART preparation, the push order for winning the internally won raising lip is notified on condition that the gaming state (main) is the RT1 gaming state. (See FIG. 62). The raising lips 1 to 9 are the above-described pushing order, and the player can win any of the raising lips 1 to 9 by operating the stop button according to the notified pushing order. As described above, when the gaming state (main) is the RT1 gaming state and any of the raising lips 1 to 9 wins, the gaming state (main) shifts from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. As a result, the gaming state (sub) shifts to the AT gaming state and the RT2 gaming state (ART).

  In ART, when the MB wins internally, a special ART is activated. The special ART is a state for increasing (adding) the number of ART games, and the player plays a game while expecting the special ART to operate during the ART (MB wins internally). .

  In the present embodiment, when the MB is internally won in ART, the special ART is not activated immediately, but a special ART precursor effect is executed for a predetermined period (see FIGS. 63 and 64). The special ART precursor effect is an effect suggesting that the special ART is activated.

  Here, when the MB is internally won in ART, chance replay may be internally won (MB and chance replay are duplicated simultaneously) (internal winning number 52 in FIG. 16 (a), and , See the small role / replay data pointer 13 in FIG. 17). In this case, the chance replay wins by notifying the pressing order. In other words, if the chance replay wins, there is a possibility that the MB is winning internally, that is, a special ART may be activated. Therefore, the player who has visually recognized that the combination of symbols corresponding to the chance replay (see FIG. 14) has been stopped and displayed along the winning determination line is expected to expect the special ART to operate. Can do.

  On the other hand, there is a case where the chance replay is won internally but the MB is not internally won (see the internal winning number 13 in FIG. 16A and the small role / replay data pointer 13 in FIG. 17). Also in this case, the chance replay wins (see FIG. 20), but the special ART does not operate because the MB is not internally won. That is, just because the chance replay wins does not mean that the MB is winning internally (special ART is activated).

  Then, not only when the MB and the chance replay are won in duplicate, but also when only the chance replay is an internal win among the MB and the chance replay, the special ART precursor effect is executed. When the MB and the chance replay are overlapped, the special ART is activated after the special ART precursor effect, and the special ART precursor effect performed in this case is a so-called present precursor effect. On the other hand, when only the chance replay of the MB and the chance replay wins internally, the special ART does not operate, and the special ART precursor effect performed in this case is a so-called gasse precursor effect.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first specific combination (middle bell), the second specific combination (horn cherry), and the third specific combination (in the ART and not between the MB flags) in the non-carrying state during ART. Left special combination) (see the internal winning numbers 22-45 in FIG. 16A and the small role / replay data pointers 22-45 in FIGS. 17 and 18). The relationship between and the winning combination is as follows.

  In other words, the first specific combination (middle bell) can win by performing the first specific stop operation. The first specific stop operation is a stop operation in the order of “middle” → “left” → “right” or “middle” → “right” → “left” when the winning number is 22 to 29, When the winning number is 30 to 37, the stop operation is in the order of “Right” → “Left” → “Middle”. When the winning number is 38 to 45, “Right” → “Middle” → “Left” ”In the order of“ ”(see FIG. 20).

  The third specific combination (left special combination) can win a prize by performing the second specific stop operation. The second specific stop operation is a stop operation in the order of “left” → “middle” → “right” or “left” → “right” → “middle” (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, in the carryover state during ART (a state between the ART and the MB flag), the first specific combination (middle bell), the second specific combination (horn cherry), and the third specific combination (left special combination) Is internal winning (see the internal winning numbers 22 to 45 in FIG. 16A and the small combination / replay data pointers 22 to 45 in FIG. 17), the relationship between the pressing order of the stop button and the winning combination is as follows: become that way.

  In other words, the first specific combination (middle bell) can win by performing the first specific stop operation. The first specific stop operation is a stop operation in the order of “middle” → “left” → “right” or “middle” → “right” → “left” when the winning number is 22 to 29, When the winning number is 30 to 37, the stop operation is in the order of “Right” → “Left” → “Middle”. When the winning number is 38 to 45, “Right” → “Middle” → “Left” Is a stop operation in the order of "" (see FIG. 21). The relationship between the pushing order and the winning combination is the same as in the non-carry-over state during ART (between non-MB flags).

  By performing the second specific stop operation, the second specific combination (horn cherry) can win. The second specific stop operation is a stop operation in the order of “left” → “middle” → “right” or “left” → “right” → “middle” (see FIG. 21). The relationship between the pushing order and the winning combination is different from that in the non-carry-over state during ART (between non-MB flags).

  As described above, the second specific stop operation is performed in the non-carry-on state during ART (between non-MB flags) and the carry-over state during ART (between MB flags) (that is, depending on whether or not the MB is internally winning). The winning combination is different when the left reel is operated as the first stop operation. And if it is an experienced player who is familiar with the gaming machine, there is a possibility that this player knows this, and such a player can perform the second specific stop operation (the stop for the left reel as the first stop operation). Is the MB won by confirming which of the 2nd specified combination (horn cherry) and the 3rd specified combination (left special combination) wins? It is possible to easily infer whether or not (that is, whether or not a special ART is activated). In this case, when only the chance replay of the MB and the chance replay wins internally, the significance that the special ART precursor effect (that is, the gaze effect) is executed is lost.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, the first specific combination (middle bell), the second specific combination (horn cherry), and the third specific combination (left special combination) are included in the period during which the special ART precursor effect is executed. When the player wins, the pressing order related to the first specific stop operation is notified (see step S901 in FIG. 64). As described above, when the first specific stop operation is performed, whether the carryover state during ART (between non-MB flags) or the carryover state during ART (between MB flags) (that is, MB) Regardless of whether or not is winning internally), the first specific combination (middle bell) wins. Therefore, through the notification, the player is prompted to perform the first specific stop operation (blocking the second specific stop operation), and even a skilled player who is familiar with the gaming machine, It is possible to create a situation where it is difficult to infer whether the MB is winning internally (that is, whether the special ART is activated).

[Special ART]
Next, the special ART will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the special ART according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the special ART and does not show the flow of the game.

  The special ART is a state that operates when the MB wins internally, and is a carry-over state during ART (a state between the ART and the MB flag). As described above, the reel stop control is changed in the carry-over state during ART (a state between ART and the MB flag) as compared with the non-carry-through state during ART (a state between ART and the MB flag). Has been.

  That is, in the special ART, when the first specific combination (middle bell), the second specific combination (horn cherry), and the third specific combination (left special combination) are internally won (internal winning number 22 in FIG. 16A). To 45 and the small pointer / replay data pointers 22 to 45 in FIGS. 17 and 18), the first specific stop (middle bell) is won by the first specific stop operation, and the second specific By performing the stop operation, the second specific combination (horn cherry) can win (see FIG. 21). The winning combination when the second specific stop operation is performed is changed from the third specific combination (left special combination) to the second specific combination as compared with the non-carry-on state during ART (state that is ART and not between MB flags). (Corner cherry) has been changed.

  As described above, the first specific stop operation is “middle” → “left” → “right” or “middle” → “right” → “left” when the winning number is 22 to 29. When the winning number is 30 to 37, the stop operation is “right” → “left” → “middle”, and when the winning number is 38 to 45, “right” → “ This is a stop operation in the order of “middle” → “left” (see FIG. 21). The second specific stop operation is a stop operation in the order of “left” → “middle” → “right” or “left” → “right” → “middle” (see FIG. 21).

  Here, in the special ART (between MB flags), when the first specific combination (middle bell), the second specific combination (horn cherry), and the third specific combination (left special combination) are won internally, the first specific stop The pressing order related to the operation or the pressing order related to the second specific stop operation is notified (see step S928 in FIG. 65). When the push order related to the second specific stop operation is notified, the player performs a stop operation on the left reel as the first stop operation according to the push order, thereby winning the second specific combination (horn cherry). be able to.

  Whether or not to notify the pressing order related to the second specific stop operation (the pressing order for winning the second specific combination (horn cherry)) is determined based on the occurrence navigation determination table (see FIG. 36). As shown in FIG. 36, in the occurrence navigation determination table, a probability variation level and a winning combination are defined in association with each winning number.

  In FIG. 36, the push order bell is a combination corresponding to the first specific combination (middle level bell), and is awarded when the first specific stop operation is performed. The strong cherry and the weak cherry are roles corresponding to the second specific combination (horn cherry), and are awarded when the second specific stop operation is performed. That is, FIG. 36 shows that when the winning combination specified in association with the winning number and the probability variation level is a strong cherry or a weak cherry (horn cherry), the push order related to the second specific stop operation is notified. Show.

  As shown in FIG. 36, four levels (modes) of probability variation level 1, probability variation level 2, probability variation level 3, and probability variation level 4 are provided as probability variation levels. In the occurrence navigation determination table, as a whole, the higher the probability variation level, the higher the probability that the push order for pushing the second specific combination (horn cherry) (the push order related to the second specific stop operation) will be notified. The relationship between the probability variation level and the winning combination is defined so as to increase. For example, when any of the winning numbers 42 to 45 is determined as the internal winning combination, if the probability variation level 1 or the probability variation level 2, the push order (first identification) for winning the first specific combination (middle bell) If the probability variation level 3 or the probability variation level 4 is notified, the push order for pushing the second specific combination (corner cherry) (the push order related to the second specific stop operation) is notified. Is done.

  The probability variation level is reported based on the probability variation promotion lottery table (see FIG. 33 to FIG. 35) in order of pushing the second specific combination (corner cherry) to win (the push sequence related to the second specific stop operation). Transition (promotion) from a low probability level to a high probability level. This will be described later.

  When an MB is won in a special ART (between MB flags), an extra special zone (MB gaming state) is activated. In the added special zone (MB gaming state), the number of ART games is added (added) based on the number of times the second specific combination (horn cherry) has won in the special ART (between MB flags).

  As shown in FIG. 3, as the additional specialization zone (MB gaming state), a first additional specialization zone (MB gaming state) and a second additional specialization zone (MB gaming state) are provided. The number of ART games is more easily added in the first specialization zone (MB gaming state) than in the second specialization zone (MB gaming state). The added special zone (MB gaming state) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, in the special ART (between MB flags), the first specific combination (middle bell), the second specific combination (horn cherry), and the third specific combination (left special combination) are internally won. When the pressing order related to the second specific stop operation (the pressing order for winning the second specific combination (corner cherry)) is notified, the second specific combination is performed by performing the second specific stop operation according to the notification. (Chorn Cherry) wins. Thereby, the number of ART games is added in the specialization zone (MB gaming state). On the other hand, when the first specific combination (middle bell) wins, more medals are paid out than when the second specific combination (horn cherry) wins (see FIG. 15).

  In such a situation, the second specific stop (corner cherry) is won by performing the second specific stop operation according to the notification, and the first specific stop is not performed according to the notification, instead of enjoying the benefit of adding the number of ART games. There is a possibility that a player who wins the first specific combination (middle bell) by operating and wins many medals may appear. Such a stop operation is not recommended by gaming machine manufacturers, and as a gaming machine manufacturer, it is desirable to avoid a situation in which the ball payout rate increases due to such a stopping operation. By the way.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, when the push order related to the second specific stop operation (the push order for winning the second specific combination (horn cherry)) is notified, the first specific stop operation is performed instead of the first specific stop operation. When the specific stop operation is performed, a penalty is given to the player (see FIG. 70). In addition, since a penalty sound (warning sound) is generated when a stop operation different from the notified content is performed (see FIG. 72), the player is prompted to perform the stop operation according to the notification. it can. Thus, by not following the notification, it is possible to prevent the player from acquiring many medals and capturing the gaming machine.

[Pachislot structure]
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine 1 according to one embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Appearance structure>
FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing an external structure of a pachislot according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The exterior body 2 of the pachi-slot 1 includes a cabinet 2a that houses a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be opened and closed.
Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a. The handle 7 is a recess that is put on when carrying the pachi-slot 1.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

  An upper panel unit 10 and a liquid crystal display device 11 are provided above the center of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 forms the upper part of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 has a light source, and performs an effect by light emitted from the light source. The liquid crystal display device 11 is arranged on the lower side of the upper panel unit 10 and executes an effect by displaying an image.

  A pedestal 12 is formed in the center of the front door 2b. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with a symbol display area 4 and various devices to be operated by the player.

  The symbol display area 4 is arranged on the front side superimposed on the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front, and is provided corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration capable of transmitting through the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

  When the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 stop rotating, the reel display window 4 has an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage within the frame among a plurality of types of symbols of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. One symbol (three in total) is displayed in each area. In the present embodiment, a pseudo line (middle stage-middle stage-middle stage) formed by combining middle areas facing the reels 3L, 3C, 3R of the reel display window 4 and a lower stage area facing the reel 3L. And a pseudo line (lower stage-upper stage-lower stage) that is a combination of an upper area facing the reel 3C and a lower area facing the reel 3R (a prize winning line) Judgment line).

  The reel display window 4 is formed by a frame member 13 provided on the pedestal portion 12. The frame member 13 has a reel display window 4, an information display window 14, and a stop button attachment portion 15.

  The information display window 14 is provided continuously below the reel display window 4 and opens upward. That is, the reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 are formed as one continuous opening. The information display window 14 and the reel display window 4 are covered with a transparent window cover 16.

  The window cover 16 is disposed on the inner surface side of the frame member 13 and cannot be removed from the front side of the front door 2b. In addition, the frame member 13 includes a sheet placement portion 17 that faces the opening of the information display window 14 with the window cover 16 interposed therebetween. And between the sheet | seat mounting part 17 and the window cover 16, the sheet | seat member (information sheet) in which the information regarding a game was described is arrange | positioned. Therefore, the information sheet is covered with the window cover 16 having a smooth surface without unevenness or gaps.

  The window cover 16 that constitutes the information sheet attachment portion cannot be removed from the front side of the front door 2b, and has a smooth surface with no irregularities or gaps. Can prevent fraudulent access to the inside. The exchange of information sheets will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided below the information display window 14 and is formed on a plane facing the front. The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided with a through hole through which the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R pass. Stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are associated with each of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and are provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are referred to as a left stop button 19L, a middle stop button 19C, and a right stop button 19R, respectively.

  The stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R show examples of various devices that are targets of operations by the player. In addition, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a medal slot 21, a BET button 22, and a start lever 23 as various devices to be operated by the player.

  The medal slot 21 is provided to accept a medal dropped from the outside by the player. The predetermined number of medals accepted by the medal slot 21 (three in the non-MB gaming state and one in the MB gaming state) will be thrown into one game, exceeding the prescribed number. The minutes can be deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (so-called credit function).

  The BET button 22 is provided in order to insert a number of medals necessary for performing one game from medals deposited inside the pachislot 1. By operating the BET button 22, the above-described winning determination line is validated. Specifically, when three medals are inserted in the non-MB gaming state, the above-described winning determination line (middle stage-middle stage-middle stage) is validated. Further, when one medal is inserted in the MB gaming state, the above-described winning determination line (lower stage-upper stage-lower stage) is validated. The activated winning determination line is referred to as an effective line. The start lever 23 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R).

  Further, a 7-segment display 24 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 when viewed from the front. The 7-segment display 24 digitally displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as payout number) and the number of medals deposited in the pachislot (hereinafter referred to as credit number). .

  Side panel units 26 </ b> L and 26 </ b> R are provided on both sides of the pedestal portion 12. Each of the side panel units 26L and 26R has a light source, and performs an effect by light emitted from the light source. A settlement button 27 is provided below the side panel unit 26L. The checkout button 27 is provided to pull out the medals deposited inside the pachislot 1 to the outside.

  A lower panel unit 31 is provided below the pedestal 12. The waist panel unit 31 includes a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn and a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

  Below the waist panel unit 31, a medal payout port 32, speaker holes 33L and 33R, and a medal tray unit 34 are provided. The medal payout port 32 guides medals discharged by driving a hopper device 51 described later to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal payout opening 32 are stored in the medal tray unit 34. The speaker holes 33L and 33R are provided for outputting sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the performance.

<Internal structure>
6 and 7 are perspective views showing the internal structure of a pachislot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. Moreover, FIG. 8 is explanatory drawing which shows the inside of the cabinet in the pachislot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 9 is an explanatory view showing the back side of the front door in the pachi-slot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 provided on the back side of the front door 2b is closed with respect to the front door 2b. FIG. 7 shows a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b.

  The cabinet 2a includes a top plate 20a, a bottom plate 20b, left and right side plates 20c and 20d, and a back plate 20e (see FIG. 8). A cabinet-side speaker 42 is disposed on the upper side inside the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side speaker 42 is attached to the back plate 20e of the cabinet 2a via attachment brackets 43L and 43R. The cabinet side speaker 42 is, for example, a speaker for outputting sound effects.

  A cabinet-side relay board 44 is disposed on the left side of the cabinet-side speaker 42 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The cabinet side relay board 44 is attached to the left side plate 20c of the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, attached to the middle door 41 (see FIGS. 6 and 7), a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch (not shown), and a medal payout. The wiring connecting the count switch (not shown) is relayed.

  An amplifier board 45 that controls the output of sound from the cabinet-side speaker 42 is disposed in the center of the cabinet 2a. The amplifier board 45 is attached to a mounting shelf 46 fixed to the left and right side plates 20c, 20d.

  Further, an external concentrated terminal plate 47 is disposed on the right side of the amplifier board 45 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The external concentrated terminal plate 47 is attached to the right side plate 20d of the cabinet 2a. The external concentration terminal board 47 is provided for outputting signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

  A sub power supply device 48 is disposed on the left side of the amplifier board 45 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The sub power supply 48 is attached to the left side plate 20c of the cabinet 2a. The sub power supply device 48 supplies power with an AC voltage of 100 V to the power supply device 53 described later. Further, the power of the AC voltage 100V is converted into the power of the DC voltage and supplied to the amplifier board 45.

  A medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device) 51, a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are disposed on the lower side of the cabinet 2a.

  The hopper device 51 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 20b in the cabinet 2a. This hopper device 51 can accommodate a large amount of medals, and has a structure capable of discharging them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds 50, for example, or when the settlement button is pressed and the medals are settled. The medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout port 32 (see FIG. 5).

  The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is disposed on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is engaged with the bottom plate 20b of the cabinet 2a, and is configured to be detachable from the bottom plate 20b.

  The power supply device 53 includes a power switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (see FIG. 10). The power supply device 53 is disposed on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 20c. The power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V supplied from the sub power supply device 48 into the power of the DC voltage necessary for each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

  As shown in FIGS. 6, 7 and 9, the middle door 41 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the front door 2b, and is configured such that the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 7) can be opened and closed from the back side. Door stoppers 41a, 41b, and 41c are provided on the upper and lower portions of the middle door 41. The door stoppers 41a, 41b and 41c fix (prohibit) the opening operation of the middle door 41 in a state where the reel display window 4 is closed from the back side. That is, in order to open the middle door 41, it is necessary to rotate the door stoppers 41a, 41b, and 41c to release the middle door 41 from being fixed.

  A main control board case 55 that houses a main control board 71 (see FIG. 10) and three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are attached to the middle door 41. Stepping motors are connected to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R through gears having a predetermined reduction ratio.

  As shown in FIG. 7, when the middle door 41 is opened, the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placing portion 17 are exposed. As described above, between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17, an information sheet on which information related to the game is described is arranged. This information sheet is inserted into a gap formed between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17 in a state where the middle door 41 is opened and the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placement portion 17 are exposed. The When exchanging information sheets, the information sheet is exchanged after the middle door 41 is opened.

The main control board case 55 is provided with a setting key type switch 56. The setting key type switch 56 is used when changing the setting of the pachislot 1 or confirming the setting of the pachislot 1.
In the present embodiment, a main control board unit is configured by the main control board case 55 and the main control board 71 accommodated in the main control board case 55.

  The main control board 71 accommodated in the main control board case 55 constitutes a main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 11) described later. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislot 1 such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. A specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described later.

  A sub control board case 57 that houses the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 10) is disposed above the middle door 41. The sub control board 72 accommodated in the sub control board case 57 constitutes the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 12). The sub-control circuit 101 is a circuit that controls execution of effects by displaying images. A specific configuration of the sub control circuit 101 will be described later.

  A center speaker 58 is disposed above the sub control board case 57. A fan 59 is disposed on the left side of the center speaker 58 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. That is, the fan 59 is disposed at the upper part on the back side of the front door 2b. The fan 59 blows air downward to cool the interior of the pachislot machine 1.

  A sub relay board 61 is disposed on the right side of the sub control board case 57 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. The sub relay board 61 relays the wiring connecting the sub control board 72 and the main control board 71. Further, it is a board that relays the wiring that connects the sub-control board 72 and the board disposed around the sub-control board 72. In addition, as a board | substrate arrange | positioned around the sub control board | substrate 72, LED board 62A, 62B mentioned later is mentioned.

  The LED boards 62A and 62B are disposed above the sub control board case 57 when viewed from the back side of the front door 2b. These LED boards 62A and 62B cause an LED (Light Emitting Diode) 85 (see FIG. 10), which shows a specific example of the light source, to emit light according to the effects executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 12). Display the blinking pattern. Note that the pachislo 1 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of LED substrates in addition to the LED substrates 62A and 62B.

  Below the sub-relay board 61, a 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 is disposed. The 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 stores the opening / closing history of the middle door 41. When the middle door 41 is opened, a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 11 is output to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 101).

  Below the middle door 41, a board speaker 64 and lower speakers 65L and 65R are arranged. The board speaker 64 faces the waist panel unit 31 (see FIG. 5), and the lower speakers 65L and 65R face the speaker holes 33L and 33R (see FIG. 5), respectively.

  A selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 are disposed above the lower speaker 65L. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the medal material and shape are appropriate, and guides an appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 to the hopper device 51. A medal sensor (not shown) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

  The door open / close monitoring switch 67 is arranged on the left side of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. The door open / close monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachi-slot 1.

  Further, a door relay terminal plate 68 is disposed in a region below the reel display window 4 and opened and closed by the middle door 41 (see FIG. 7). The door relay terminal board 68 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 10) in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 10), a selector 66, and a game operation display board 81. It is a board | substrate which relays wiring with (refer FIG. 10). Examples of the various buttons and switches include a BET button 22, a settlement button 27, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, a start switch 79, and the like, which will be described later.

[Control system for pachislot machines]
Next, a control system provided in the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a control system of a pachislot according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The pachi-slot 1 has a main control board 71 disposed on the middle door 41 and a sub-control board 72 disposed on the front door 2b.
The main control board 71 includes a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key switch 56, an external concentration terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, and a power supply board 53b of the power supply 53. It is connected. The setting key switch 56, the external concentration terminal board 47, the hopper device 51, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 75 are connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet-side relay board 44. Since the external concentration terminal board 47 and the hopper device 51 have been described above, description thereof will be omitted.

  The reel relay terminal plate 74 is disposed inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to stepping motors (not shown) of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays signals output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motors.

  The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 penetrates a later-described switch through hole of the medal auxiliary storage 52. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals.

  A power switch 53 a is connected to the power supply board 53 b of the power supply device 53. The power switch 53a is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachislot machine 1.

  The main control board 71 has a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, a settlement switch 78, a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, and a door relay terminal board 68. The sub relay board 61 is connected. Since the selector 66, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, and the sub relay board 61 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The BET switch 77 detects that the BET button 22 has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button 27 has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 detects that the start lever 23 has been operated by the player (start operation).

  The stop switch substrate 80 is a substrate constituting a circuit for stopping the rotating reel and a circuit for displaying the stopable reel by an LED or the like. The stop switch substrate 80 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that each stop button 19L, 19C, 19R has been pressed by the player (stop operation).

  The game operation display board 81 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 24 when accepting insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable and when replaying. It is a substrate for making it. A 7-segment display 24 and an LED 82 are connected to the game operation display board 81. The LED 82 lights, for example, a mark for displaying the start of a game or a mark for performing a re-game.

  The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub relay board 61. A sound I / O board 84, LED boards 62A and 62B, and a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 are connected to the sub control board 72 through a sub relay board 61. Since these LED boards 62A and 62B and the 24h door opening / closing monitoring unit 63 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The sound I / O board 84 outputs sound to a center speaker 58, a board speaker 64, lower speakers 65L and 65R, and a speaker (not shown) provided on the front door 2b.

The sub-control board 72 is connected to a ROM cartridge board 86 and a liquid crystal relay board 87. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 and the liquid crystal relay substrate 87 are housed in the sub control board case 57 together with the sub control board 72.
The ROM cartridge substrate 86 is a substrate for managing production images (video), sound, LED substrates 62A and 62B, other LED substrates (not shown), and communication data. The liquid crystal relay substrate 87 is a substrate that relays wiring that connects the sub-control board 72 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 constituted by the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a pachislot main control circuit according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The main control circuit 91 includes a microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 71 as a main component. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95.

  The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  The main CPU 93 is connected to a clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The main CPU 93 counts the number of times pulses are output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R after detecting the reel index. Thereby, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated).
The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is provided at a predetermined position of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, for example, with a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Detection is performed by a reel position detection unit (not shown) including a detection piece interposed therebetween.

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when a reel index is detected by a reel position detector (not shown).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to four symbols. Therefore, when the left stop button 19L is pressed, the symbols of the left reel 3L in the middle of the reel display window 4 and the symbols within the range up to the four symbols ahead are displayed in the middle of the reel display window 4. It becomes a symbol that can be stopped.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the sub control circuit 101 constituted by the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 12 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a sub-control circuit for a pachislot according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The sub control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91 and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

  The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

  A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91 and an effect registration task for extracting and registering effect contents (effect data) by extracting effect random numbers. Is included. Further, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 9) based on the determined contents of the effect, a lamp control task for controlling light output by a light source such as the LED 85, and the speakers 58, 64, 65L. , 65R, etc., and a voice control task for controlling the sound output from the speaker.

  The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to creation of video. Also included are a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to the light on / off pattern, and the like.

  The sub-RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

  The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create a video according to the animation data designated by the content of the presentation, and display the created video on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  Further, the sub CPU 102 causes a sound such as BGM to be output from a speaker such as speakers 58, 64, 65L, and 65R in accordance with the sound data specified by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the turning on and off of the light source such as the LED 85 in accordance with the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

[Various data tables on the main side]
Various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Pattern arrangement table>
FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table according to an embodiment of the present invention. The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 13A represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between 21 symbol positions “0” to “20” and symbols corresponding to these symbol positions. Symbol positions “0” to “20” indicate the positions of symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “20” can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter. The types of symbols are “Red 7”, “Green 7”, “BAR”, “Cherry”, “Watermelon 1”, “Watermelon 2”, “Watermelon 3”, “Bell”, “Replay”, and “ "Blank" is included.

  In the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 13A, the symbol position “0” indicates the symbol positioned in the middle of the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R (the symbol passing through the middle of the display window) when the reel index is detected. And a correspondence relationship in which symbol positions “0” to “20” are assigned to each of the 21 symbols in the order of movement in the reel rotation direction. In this way, by specifying the middle stage of the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R as a reference, the type of symbol positioned in the middle stage of the display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R is specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Can do.

  Each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by the symbol code table shown in FIG. 13B, and is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) data.

  FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a symbol code table according to an embodiment of the present invention. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 13B represents codes for specifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. The symbols used in the pachi-slot 1 according to the present embodiment are “Red 7”, “Green 7”, “BAR”, “Cherry”, “Watermelon 1”, “Watermelon 2”, “Watermelon 3”, “ There are 10 types of "bell", "replay", and "blank".

  In the symbol code table, “00000001” is assigned as data to the “red 7” symbol (symbol code 1). “00000010” is assigned as data to the “blue 7” symbol (symbol code 2). “00000011” is assigned as data to the “yellow 7” symbol (symbol code 3). “00000100” is assigned as data to the “watermelon” symbol (symbol code 4). For the “bell” symbol (symbol code 5), “00000101” is assigned as data. “00000110” is assigned as data to the “replay” symbol (symbol code 6).

<Design combination table>
14 and 15 are diagrams showing a symbol combination table according to an embodiment of the present invention. In the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, a winning combination operation flag and a payout number are associated with a symbol combination.

  In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, the symbol combinations arranged along the validated winning determination line are the targets for determination for winning or operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols arranged along the validated winning determination line matches a predetermined combination of symbols.

  This predetermined symbol combination is a symbol combination defined in the symbol combination table. When the combination of symbols arranged along the validated winning determination line matches a predetermined symbol combination, medals are paid out, re-game is performed, or the game state is shifted.

  The symbol combination is a combination of the middle symbol of the left reel 3L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 3C, and the middle symbol of the right reel 3R in the non-MB gaming state, and the left reel in the MB gaming state. A combination of a lower symbol of 3L, an upper symbol of middle reel 3C, and a lower symbol of right reel 3R. As described above, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination in the symbol combination table matches the symbol combination arranged along the winning determination line. As a combination (display combination) for which a winning determination is made, there are a replay combination, a small combination, a bonus combination, a left spilled eye, and the like.

  The replay role is a re-game act that allows a game with the same number of medals inserted to play a game without inserting new medals, and the number of payouts at the time of winning is 0. The replay roles are middle lip 1, lower lip 1-2, CU lip 1-3, CD lip 1-4, upper lip 1-12, BAR control lip 1-7, chance lip 1-15, up lip 1-9 And 7 control lips 1-18.

  The small combination is a combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out at the time of winning a prize. Small role is middle bell 1, upper bell 1-2, CD bell 1-4, CD watermelon 1-3, upper watermelon 1-2, middle cherry 1-22, left special role 1-8, watermelon spilling role 1 4, irregular special roles 1-7, corner cherries 1-8, and MB control roles 1-18 are included.

  The bonus combination is a bonus operating combination, and the number of payouts at the time of winning is 0. The bonus combination includes MB1 to MB3.

  The winning action flag is data assigned in correspondence with a combination of unique symbols to indicate a display combination, and includes 1 byte (8 bits) data and a storage area type. The storage area type is data for distinguishing 1-byte data. One-byte data includes data related to a combination of a plurality of symbols. Each symbol combination (display combination) is distinguished by the storage area type and 1-byte data.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, since there are more than 8 kinds of combinations of symbols, only 1 byte (8 bits) of data constituting the winning action flag indicates all symbols. The combination cannot be identified or identified. For this reason, in this embodiment, 1-byte data is distinguished using storage area types 1 to 20. By doing this, even if the value of 1-byte data is the same, by specifying any one of the storage area types 1 to 20, a combination of more than 8 types of symbols can be combined. Can be treated as

  For 1-byte data, for the assigned storage area type, the bit corresponding to each display combination is set to “1”, and the remaining bits are set to “0”.

  For example, by setting the storage area type value to “1” and the 1-byte data value to “00000001”, the display combination “left spill 1” can be specified. By setting “17” and setting the value of 1-byte data to “00100000”, the display combination “Kaku Cherry 1” can be designated.

  The number of payouts is data indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the player corresponding to each combination of symbols. When the combination of symbols arranged along the winning determination line matches the “combination of symbols” in the symbol combination table, the number of medals ejected by the driving of the hopper device 51 and the number of credits are counted based on the corresponding payout number. The credit counter is added. Note that the payout number is set in association with the input number (three or one).

<Internal lottery table>
As the internal lottery table, a normal gaming state internal lottery table and an MB internal lottery table are provided. FIG. 16A is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a normal gaming state according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 16B is a diagram showing an MB internal lottery table according to an embodiment of the present invention. The normal gaming state internal lottery table is an internal lottery table referred to in the non-MB gaming state, and the MB internal lottery table is an internal lottery table referred to in the MB gaming state.

  In the internal lottery table for the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 16A, the lottery value for each gaming state (RT0 gaming state, RT1 gaming state, and RT2 gaming state) with respect to the winning number (internal winning number), and , Data pointers (small role / replay data pointer and bonus data pointer) are associated with each other. In the MB internal lottery table shown in FIG. 16B, a lottery value is associated with only one winning number regardless of the gaming state (the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, and the RT2 gaming state). At the same time, data pointers (small role / replay data pointer and bonus data pointer) are associated with the corresponding number.

  In the present embodiment, random numbers for lottery extracted from a predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” are sequentially subtracted by lottery values corresponding to each winning number, and so-called “digit” is generated. An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not.

  Digit is performed when the numerical value to be subtracted is smaller, in other words, when the result of subtraction is negative. For example, when the random number value extracted in the RT0 gaming state is “35000”, the lottery value “33154” corresponding to the winning number “1” is first subtracted from “35000”. The subtraction result is “35000−33154 = 1844”, which is positive. Next, the lottery value “3218” corresponding to the winning number “2” is subtracted from the value “1846” after the subtraction. The subtraction result is “1846-3218 = −1372”, which is negative. Therefore, the winning number “2” is determined as the internal winning combination.

  According to such an internal lottery method, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data (that is, the data pointer) to which it is assigned will be determined. When the number of times of the determination process for determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative exceeds the number of winning numbers, the result of the internal lottery process is “lost”. Further, the winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (65536)”.

  In the present embodiment, since various lottery methods performed using lottery values are the same as the internal lottery method, description of other lotteries is omitted.

  The data pointer is data acquired as a result of lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and is data for designating an internal winning combination defined by an internal winning combination determination table described later. That is, the data pointer is data used to determine the storage area type and 1-byte data in the internal winning combination determination tables shown in FIGS. For the data pointer, a small role / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each winning number.

<Internal winning combination determination table>
As the internal winning combination determination table, a small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determining table and a bonus internal winning combination determining table (MB internal winning combination determining table) are provided. 17 and 18 are diagrams showing an internal winning combination determination table for a small combination / replay according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an MB internal winning combination determination table according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  In the small combination / replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, an internal winning combination (small combination) that allows display of a combination of symbols related to the payout of medals to the small combination / replay data pointer. ), And an internal winning combination (replay combination) that allows display of a combination of symbols related to the replay operation. The contents of the internal winning combination are determined according to the small combination / replay data pointers “0” to “52”. In the MB internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 19, the bonus data pointer is associated with an internal winning combination (bonus combination) that allows display of a combination of symbols related to the operation of the bonus. The content of the internal winning combination is determined according to the bonus data pointer “0” or “1”.

  Each of the small character / replay data pointers “0” to “52” corresponds to 20 pieces of 1-byte data. Each of the bonus data pointers “0” and “1” corresponds to two 1-byte data. Thereby, an internal winning combination is defined for each data pointer. For example, if the data pointer for the small role / replay is “22”, “left spilled eyes 1 to 6”, “middle bell 1”, “left special roles 1 and 2”, and “horn cherry 1 to 8” It will be the internal winning in duplicate.

  Here, on the premise of the above description, the relationship between the pressing order and the winning combination will be described. 20 and 21 are diagrams showing the relationship between the pressing order and the winning combination in the pachi-slot according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 20 shows the relationship between the pushing order between the non-MB flags and the winning combination, and FIG. 21 shows the relationship between the pushing order between the MB flags and the winning combination.

  In FIGS. 20 and 21, for each winning number “1” to “47”, a winning combination is shown according to the order of the stop operation (pushing order).

  For example, when the winning number is “22” (hereinafter the same applies to “23” to “45”), referring to FIG. 16, the small role / replay data pointer is “22”, and the bonus data pointer is Is “0”. When the data pointer for the small role / replay is “22”, referring to FIG. 17, the internal winning combination includes “left spilled eyes 1 to 6”, “middle bell 1”, “left special combination 1 and 2”, and , “Square Cherry 1-8”. When the bonus data pointer is “0”, referring to FIG. 19, the internal winning combination is “lost”.

  Between the non-MB flags, as shown in FIG. 20, when the stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation, the “left special combination 1 and 2” can win. When a stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C as the first stop operation, “middle bell 1” can win. When a stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R as the first stop operation, “corner cherries 1 to 8” can win.

  On the other hand, between the MB flags, as shown in FIG. 21, when a stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation, “horn cherry 1 to 8” can win. When a stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C as the first stop operation, “middle bell 1” can win. When a stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R as the first stop operation, “corner cherries 1 to 8” can win. In this manner, the winning combination when the stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation is changed from “left special combination 1, 2” to “corner cherry” between the MB flags as compared with the non-MB flag. 1-8 ". As described with reference to FIG. 4, when the corner cherries 1 to 8 are won in the special ART (between MB flags), the number of ART games is added (added) in the additional specialization zone (MB gaming state).

  As shown in FIG. 20, when a stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation between non-MB flags, if the stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing, “left special combination 1, 2 ”Is not won, and“ left spilled eyes 1 to 6 ”are awarded (ie,“ left special roles 1 and 2 ”are missed).

  In this embodiment, when the pressing order is not notified, the normal pressing (stop operation in the order of “left” → “middle” → “right”) is normally performed (see FIG. 72). Therefore, when the winning number 22 is determined as the internal winning combination in the RT0 gaming state or the RT2 gaming state in which the pressing order is not notified, if it is between the non-MB flags, “left special combination 1 or 2” or “left spilling point” 1-6 "wins. If the “left special combination 1 or 2” is missed, the “left spilled eyes 1 to 6” win, and the RT0 gaming state or the RT2 gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state (see FIG. 2). Even if “left spilled eyes 1 to 6” win in the RT1 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state is maintained.

  On the other hand, between MB flags, the winning combination in the case of forward pressing (stop operation in order of “left” → “middle” → “right”) is changed from “left special combination 1, 2” to “corner cherry 1”. Therefore, even if the winning number 22 is determined as the internal winning combination and forward pressing is performed, the “left special combination 1 and 2” and the “left spilled eyes 1 to 6” are not won.

  When the winning number is “5” (hereinafter, the same applies to “6” to “8”), with reference to FIG. 16, the small role / replay data pointer is “5”. When the data pointer for the small role / replay is “5”, referring to FIG. 17, the internal winning combination is “middle lip 1”, “lower lip 1 or 2”, “CU lip 1-3”, “CD lip”. 1-4 "," upper lip 1-12 ", and" raising lip 1-9 ".

  As shown in FIG. 20, when a stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation, “middle stage lip 1” can be won. When the stop operation is performed in the order of “middle” → “left” → “right”, “raising lips 1 to 9” can be won. When the stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R as the first stop operation, or when the stop operation is performed in the order of “middle” → “right” → “left”, “CU Lips 1 to 3” are awarded. Can do.

  In the RT1 gaming state, when “Rip 1 to 9” wins, the RT1 gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 2). When ART is started or when the state is returned to ART, the push order of “middle” → “left” → “right” (push order for winning “raising lips 1 to 9”) is notified. By following the notification, the player can win “Raise Lips 1-9”.

  Further, when “CU Lips 1 to 3” wins in the RT1 gaming state or the RT2 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state or the RT2 gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state (see FIG. 2). If a forward push is performed, “middle lip 1” wins, and the gaming state is maintained.

  When the winning number is “9” (hereinafter, the same applies to “10” and “11”), referring to FIG. 16, the small character / replay data pointer is “9”. When the small combination / replay data pointer is “9”, referring to FIG. 17, the internal winning combination is “middle lip 1”, “lower lip 1, 2”, “CU lip 1-3”, “CD lip”. 1 to 4 ”,“ upper lip 1 to 12 ”,“ BAR control lip 1 to 7 ”, and“ chance lip 1 ”.

  As shown in FIG. 20, when the stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L or the right reel 3R as the first stop operation, or the stop operation is performed in the order of “middle” → “right” → “left”. In this case, “CU Lips 1 to 3” can win. When the stop operation is performed in the order of “middle” → “left” → “right”, “middle lip 1” can win.

  When “CU Lips 1-3” wins in the RT2 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state (see FIG. 2). When “intermediate lip 1” wins in the RT2 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state is maintained. In ART, in order to maintain the RT2 gaming state, the push order of “middle” → “left” → “right” (push order for winning “middle lip 1”) is notified, but when ART ends Since the notification is not performed, “CU Lips 1 to 3” wins, and the RT2 gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state.

  In addition, after the end of ART, the initial state at the time of shipment, or when the setting is changed, the user temporarily stays in the RT0 gaming state. Therefore, basically, the user stays in the RT1 gaming state.

  If the winning number is “1”, referring to FIG. 16, the small role / replay data pointer is “1”. When the data pointer for the small role / replay is “1”, referring to FIG. 17, the internal winning combination is “middle lip 1”, “lower lip 1 or 2”, “CU lip 1 to 3”, and “ CD Lip 1-4 ". As shown in FIG. 20, when the forward push is performed, “middle lip 1” can be won. When an irregular push (stop operation in an order different from the forward push) is performed, “CU Lips 1 to 3” can win. When “CU Lips 1 to 3” wins in the RT0 gaming state, the RT0 gaming state is maintained.

  When the winning number is “16” (hereinafter, the same applies to “17” to “21”), with reference to FIG. 16, the small role / replay data pointer is “16”. When the small combination / replay data pointer is “16”, referring to FIG. 17, the internal winning combinations are “left special combination 1 to 8” and “anomalous special combination 1, 2, 5”.

  As shown in FIG. 21, when the stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L or the middle reel 3C as the first stop operation between the MB flags, the “left special combination 1 to 8” can win. When a stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R as the first stop operation, "Extraordinary special combination 1, 2, 5" or "MB1" can be won. That is, when a stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R as the first stop operation, if the stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing, “anomalous special combination 1, 2, 5” wins. If the stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing, “unusual special roles 1, 2, 5” are not won, and “MB1” is won (that is, “irregular special roles 1, 2, 5” is missed) ). Here, when the winning number is “16”, the bonus data pointer is “0”. However, since the state where the MB is won internally is carried over between the MB flags, winning of MB1 is permitted. .

  More specifically, the symbol combination corresponding to the irregular special combination 1 is “Bell”-“Bell”-“BAR”, and the symbol combination corresponding to the irregular special combination 2 is “Bell”-“ Bell ”-“ Watermelon 1 ”(see FIG. 15), but referring to the symbol arrangement in FIG. 13A, both“ BAR ”and“ Watermelon 1 ”in the right reel 3R have 4 symbols (the number of sliding pieces). There is a location that does not exist within the range of (maximum value). Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation, both “BAR” and “Watermelon 1” may not be pulled in the right reel 3R. On the other hand, the combination of symbols corresponding to MB1 is “bell”-“bell”-“replay” (see FIG. 14), and “replay” in the right reel 3R is 4 symbols (the maximum number of sliding symbols). Value) (see FIG. 13A), it is always drawn regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Therefore, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when neither “BAR” nor “Watermelon 1” is pulled in the right reel 3R, the irregular special role 1 and the irregular special role 2 are missed. MB1 (bonus combination) having the next highest priority after winning combination 1 and irregular special combination 2 (small combination) will win. Similarly, the irregular special combination 5 may be missed due to the relationship with the symbol arrangement (see FIG. 13A), and in this case, MB1 wins.

  As described with reference to FIG. 4, when an MB is won in a special ART (between MB flags), the special ART (between MB flags) is terminated, and an additional special zone (MB gaming state) is activated.

  The relationship between the pressing order and the winning combination has been described above with reference to FIGS. Hereinafter, the description returns to the data table stored in the main ROM 94.

<Cylinder stop number selection table>
FIG. 22A is a diagram showing a rotating cylinder stop number selection table according to an embodiment of the present invention. The rotation stop number selection table associates the winning number with the rotation stop number. The spinning stop number is defined for each non-MB flag (the normal gaming state in FIG. 22A) and between the MB flags. When the winning number is determined, the rotating cylinder stop number selection table is referred to, and the rotating cylinder stop number corresponding to the determined winning number is selected.

<Reel stop initial setting table>
FIG. 22B shows a reel stop initial setting table according to one embodiment of the present invention. In the reel stop initial setting table shown in FIG. 22B, the drawing priority table selection table number or the drawing priority table number and the stop table selection data group are associated with the spinning stop number. . These various data indicate various table numbers to be selected in the reel stop control according to the progress of the unit game.

  The pull-in priority table selection table number is a number for selecting a pull-in priority table number in a pull-in priority table selection table shown in FIGS. The “pull priority table number” is a number for selecting pull priority data in a pull priority table shown in FIG.

  Details of the “stop table selection data group” are omitted, but are numbers for selecting a stop table or the like that stores symbol position data and sliding piece number determination data in association with each other when the stop operation is performed. is there. The “stop table selection data group” is used to determine “slip piece number determination data”, that is, to determine the positions at which the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped according to the progress of the unit game. Contains data. The symbol position data when the stop operation is performed is information indicating the symbol position (stop start position) of the symbol displayed in the middle stage of the reel display window 4 when the stop operation is performed. The sliding piece number determination data is information for determining the number of sliding pieces.

  In the reel stop initial setting table, the retracting priority order table selection table number is associated with the rotation stop number corresponding to the data pointer for which stop control is performed depending on the stop operation order, and the stop operation order is Regardless of the rotation stop number corresponding to the data pointer that does not change the stop control, the pull-in priority table number is associated.

<Pull-in priority table selection table>
23 to 25 are diagrams showing a pull-in priority table selection table according to an embodiment of the present invention. In the pull-in priority table selection table shown in FIGS. 23 to 25, a pull-in priority table number for the order of stop operations is associated with each pull-in priority table selection table number.

  For example, the pull-in priority table selection table number “00” corresponds to the pull-in priority table number “00” as the pull-in priority table number during the first stop operation when the first stop operation is “left”. It is attached. Further, as the pull-in priority table number for the second stop operation, the pull-in priority table number “00” is associated when the first stop operation is “left” and the second stop operation is “medium”. ing. Also, as the pull-in priority table number at the time of the third stop operation, the pull-in priority is given when the first stop operation is “left”, the second stop operation is “middle”, and the third stop operation is “right”. The rank table number “00” is associated.

<Pull-in priority table>
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a pull-in priority table according to an embodiment of the present invention. The pull-in priority table shown in FIG. 26 indicates which symbol is drawn preferentially when there are a plurality of symbols that can be displayed within the pull-in range (corresponding to the combination determined as an internal winning combination). ing. In FIG. 26, the winning operation flag data is omitted for the sake of simplicity.

  In the draw-in priority table, draw-in priority data indicating the draw-in priority of the symbol combination related to the winning action flag (display combination) is represented. The “pull-in priority data” is information provided for the main CPU 93 to identify the pull-in priority.

  Here, “retraction” refers to the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R so as to display the symbols constituting the combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols along the winning determination line. To stop.

  For example, in the drawing priority order table number “00”, if it is determined that the winning operation flag “middle lip 1” and the winning operation flag “upper bell 1” are likely to win, “upper bell 1 “Middle stage lip 1” has a higher priority than “Middle stage lip 1”, and the rotation stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed so that “middle stage lip 1” is preferentially drawn.

[Various storage areas on the main side]
Next, various storage areas stored in the main RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an internal winning combination storing area according to an embodiment of the present invention. The internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 27 is composed of 20 storage areas of internal winning combination storing areas 1-20. The size of each of the internal winning combination storage areas 1 to 20 is 1 byte. Therefore, the overall size of the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 20 is 20 bytes. In the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 20, data determined based on the internal winning combination data (storage area type) defined by the internal winning combination determining tables shown in FIGS.

<Design code storage area>
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a symbol code storage area according to an embodiment of the present invention. The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 28 is configured by 20 storage areas of symbol code storage areas 1 to 20. The size of each of the symbol code storage areas 1 to 20 is 1 byte. Therefore, the overall size of the symbol code storage areas 1 to 20 is 20 bytes. In the symbol code storage area, data indicating a winning combination in a rotating reel is stored. For example, when all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating, all winning combinations can be won, and therefore “1” is stored in all the corresponding bits in the symbol code storage area. Thereafter, when the left reel 3L is stopped (the reels 3C and 3R are rotated), the bit corresponding to the winning combination that cannot be won with the stop of the left reel 3L is updated to “0”.

<Display combination storage area>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a display combination storing area according to an embodiment of the present invention. The display combination storage area shown in FIG. 29 includes 20 storage areas of display combination storage areas 1 to 20. The size of each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 20 is 1 byte. Therefore, the total size of the display combination storage areas 1 to 20 is 20 bytes. The display combination storage areas 1 to 20 store data determined based on the display combination data (storage area type) defined by the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 14 and 15.

<Operation stop button storage area>
FIG. 30A is a diagram showing an operation stop button storage area according to an embodiment of the present invention. The operation stop button storage area shown in FIG. 30A is 1 byte in size. Bits 4 to 6 are storage areas indicating stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R that can detect a stop operation by the player, that is, effective stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R.

  Bits 0 to 2 are storage areas indicating the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R in which the stop operation corresponding to the valid stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R is detected immediately before. In this embodiment, bit 3 and bit 7 are unused and “0” is stored.

  Bit 0 corresponds to the left stop button 19L. When the left stop button 19L is operated by the player, “1” is stored in bit 0. Bit 1 corresponds to the middle stop button 19C. When the middle stop button 19C is operated by the player, "1" is stored in bit 1. Bit 2 corresponds to the right stop button 19R. When the right stop button 19R is operated by the player, “1” is stored in bit 2.

  Bit 4 corresponds to the left stop button 19L. When the left stop button 19L is valid, “1” is stored in bit 4. Bit 5 corresponds to the middle stop button 19C. When the middle stop button 19C is valid, “1” is stored in bit 5. Bit 6 corresponds to the right stop button 19R. When the right stop button 19R is valid, "1" is stored in bit 6. In this embodiment, that the stop button is valid means that a stop operation can be detected. The stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R corresponding to the reels rotating at a constant speed and capable of detecting the stop operation are referred to as effective stop buttons.

<Pressing order storage area>
FIG. 30B is a diagram showing a pressing order storage area according to an embodiment of the present invention. The pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 30B is an area for storing information indicating the pressing order of the three stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R. This push-down order storage area has a size of 1 byte, bits 0 to 5 are used, bits 6 and 7 are unused, and “0” is stored.

  Bit 0 corresponds to the pressing order “left → middle → right”, and “1” is stored (turned on) in bit 0 when the pressing order is “left → middle → right”. Similarly, when the pressing order is “left → right → middle”, “1” is stored (turned on) in bit 1, and when the pressing order is “middle → left → right”, “1” is stored in bit 2. Is stored (ON), “1” is stored in bit 3 if “middle → right → left”, and “1” is stored in bit 4 if “right → left → middle”. In the case of “right → middle → left”, “1” is stored (turned on) in bit 5.

<Game state flag storage area>
FIG. 31 (a) is a diagram showing a game state flag storage area according to one embodiment of the present invention. In the gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 31 (a), a flag for indicating whether the gaming state is an RT0 gaming state, an RT1 gaming state, or an RT2 gaming state, and the gaming state is an MB gaming state. Is stored, and has a size of 1 byte.

  When the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, bit 0 is set to “1” (ON), and when the gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, bit 1 is set to “1” (ON). Is in the RT2 gaming state, bit 2 is set to “1” (ON). When the gaming state is the MB gaming state, bit 3 is set to “1” (ON). In this embodiment, bits 4 to 7 are unused.

<Carry-over portion storage area>
FIG. 31B is a diagram showing the carryover combination storage area according to the embodiment of the present invention. In the carryover combination storage area, data representing a carryover combination is stored. The size of the storage area of the carryover combination storage area is 1 byte. Bits 0 to 2 of the carryover combination storage area correspond to MB, and “1” is stored in bits 0 to 2 of the carryover combination storage area when the internal winning combination MB is determined as a result of the internal lottery process. .

  By storing “1” in the carryover combination storage area, it is possible to determine that the MB is won. The state where “1” is stored in the carryover combination storage area is held until the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is displayed on the winning determination line. That is, when MB is won, “1” is stored in bits 0 to 2 of the carryover combination storage area in at least one unit game until the combination of symbols of the bonus is displayed on the winning determination line as a display combination. The maintained state is maintained. Maintaining a state in which “1” is stored in these bits from the unit game won to MB to the unit game won is called “carryover”. The MB stored in the carryover combination storage area is called “carryover combination”.

<Retrieve priority data storage area>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a pull-in priority data storage area according to an embodiment of the present invention. The pull-in priority data storage area shown in FIG. 32 includes a left reel pull-in priority data storage area, a middle reel pull-in priority data storage area, and a right reel pull-in priority data storage area.

  Each drawing priority data storage area stores drawing priority data for each of the symbol position data of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R corresponding to the drawing priority data storage area. In the drawing priority order data, when a symbol located in one symbol position data is displayed at the position of the center line, a combination of symbols relating to any display combination or a part thereof is displayed along the winning determination line. It is data indicating that.

[Sub-side data tables]
Next, various data tables stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Probability promotion lottery table>
33 to 35 are diagrams showing a probability variation promotion lottery table according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  As described with reference to FIG. 4, in this embodiment, when a corner cherry is won in a special ART (between MB flags), the number of ART games is added (added) in an additional special zone (MB gaming state). The corner cherry is a push order (a winning combination is achieved when the stop button is pressed in an appropriate order). In special ART (between MB flags), the occurrence navigation is determined when the corner cherry wins internally. Based on the table (see FIG. 36), it is determined whether or not to notify the pressing order for winning the corner cherry.

  The probability determined to notify the pushing order for winning the corner cherry depends on the probability variation level, and the probability variation levels are probability variation level 1, probability variation level 2, probability variation level 3, and probability variation level 4. Four levels are provided. And the higher the probability variation level, the higher the probability that the push order for winning the corner cherry will be notified.

  When the winning numbers 2, 50, 51, 49, or 9 to 11 are determined as the internal winning combination, the probability variation level is determined from the level with a low probability that the push order for winning the corner cherry is announced. There is a possibility of transition (promotion) to a higher probability level. At that time, the probability variation promotion lottery table is referred to.

  In the probability variation promotion lottery table, for each of the winning numbers 2, 50, 51, 49, and 9 to 11, the probability variation level of the transfer destination and the lottery value are defined in association with each other.

  If the current probability variation level is probability variation level 1, the probability variation promotion lottery table in FIG. 33 is referred to. More specifically, when the current probability variation level is probability variation level 1 and the set value (value for setting the payout rate to one of six predetermined stages) is 1, FIG. The probability variation promotion lottery table of (a) is referred. When the current probability variation level is probability variation level 1 and the set value is 2, the probability variation promotion lottery table in FIG. When the current probability variation level is probability variation level 1 and the set value is 3, the probability variation promotion lottery table in FIG. When the current probability variation level is probability variation level 1 and the set value is 4, the probability variation promotion lottery table in FIG. When the current probability variation level is probability variation level 1 and the set value is 5, the probability variation promotion lottery table of FIG. When the current probability variation level is probability variation level 1 and the set value is 6, the probability variation promotion lottery table in FIG.

  When the current probability variation level is probability variation level 2, the probability variation promotion lottery table in FIG. 34 is referred to. More specifically, when the current probability variation level is the probability variation level 2 and the set value is 1, the probability variation promotion lottery table of FIG. When the current probability variation level is probability variation level 2 and the set value is 2, the probability variation promotion lottery table in FIG. When the current probability variation level is the probability variation level 2 and the set value is 3, the probability variation promotion lottery table in FIG. When the current probability variation level is probability variation level 2 and the set value is 4, the probability variation promotion lottery table in FIG. When the current probability variation level is probability variation level 2 and the set value is 5, the probability variation promotion lottery table in FIG. When the current probability variation level is probability variation level 2 and the set value is 6, the probability variation promotion lottery table in FIG. 34 (f) is referred to.

  When the current probability variation level is probability variation level 3, the probability variation promotion lottery table in FIG. 35 is referred to. More specifically, when the current probability variation level is the probability variation level 3 and the set value is 1, the probability variation promotion lottery table of FIG. When the current probability variation level is probability variation level 3 and the set value is 2, the probability variation promotion lottery table in FIG. When the current probability variation level is probability variation level 3 and the set value is 3, the probability variation promotion lottery table in FIG. When the current probability variation level is probability variation level 3 and the set value is 4, the probability variation promotion lottery table in FIG. When the current probability variation level is probability variation level 3 and the set value is 5, the probability variation promotion lottery table in FIG. When the current probability variation level is probability variation level 3 and the set value is 6, the probability variation promotion lottery table in FIG.

<Occurrence navigation determination table>
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an occurrence navigation determination table according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  In the special ART (between MB flags), when the winning numbers 47, 22 to 25, 30 to 33, 38 to 41, 26 to 29, 34 to 37, or 42 to 45 are determined as internal winning combinations, Based on the generation navigation determination table shown in FIG. 36, any one of the pushing order for winning the corner cherry (strong cherry or weak cherry) and the pushing order for winning the middle bell (push order bell) It is determined whether to notify the order.

  In the occurrence navigation determination table, the probability variation level and the winning combination are associated with each of the winning numbers 47, 22 to 25, 30 to 33, 38 to 41, 26 to 29, 34 to 37, and 42 to 45. It is prescribed.

  Specifically, when the winning number is 22 to 25, if the current probability variation level is probability variation level 1, the push order for winning the middle bell (push order bell) is notified, and the current probability variation level is If the probability variation level is any one of 2 to 4, a push order for winning a corner cherry (weak cherry) is notified.

  When the winning number is 30 to 33, if the current probability change level is the probability change level 1, the push order for winning the middle bell (push order bell) is notified, and the current probability change level is the probability change level 2 to 2. If it is any of 4, a push order for winning a corner cherry (weak cherry) is notified.

  When the winning number is 38 to 41, if the current probability change level is the probability change level 1, the push order for winning the middle bell (push order bell) is notified, and the current probability change level is the probability change level 2 to 2. If it is any of 4, a push order for winning a corner cherry (weak cherry) is notified.

  When the winning number is 26 to 29, if the current probability variation level is probability variation level 1 or 2, the push order for winning the middle bell (push order bell) is notified, and the current probability variation level is the probability variation level. If it is 3 or 4, the push order for winning the corner cherry (strong cherry) is notified.

  When the winning number is 34 to 37, if the current probability change level is probability change level 1 or 2, the push order for winning the middle bell (push order bell) is notified, and the current probability change level is the probability change level. If it is 3 or 4, the push order for winning the corner cherry (strong cherry) is notified.

  When the winning number is 42 to 45, if the current probability change level is the probability change level 1 or 2, the push order for winning the middle bell (push order bell) is notified, and the current probability change level is the probability change level. If it is 3 or 4, the push order for winning the corner cherry (strong cherry) is notified.

  When the winning number is 47, if the current probability variation level is the probability variation level 1 or 2, the push order for winning the corner cherry (weak cherry) is notified, and the current probability variation level is the probability variation level 3 or 4. If so, the push order for winning the corner cherry (strong cherry) is notified.

  As described above, there are strong cherries and weak cherries in the corner cherries. In this embodiment, the special ART is selected depending on whether or not the red 7 flag (see step S970 in FIG. 67) is set to ON. In (between MB flags), the number of times the strong cherry wins and the number of times the weak cherry wins are counted as follows (see FIG. 67).

  That is, when the red 7 flag is set to ON, both the number of times the strong cherry wins and the number of times the weak cherry wins are counted in the special ART (between MB flags). On the other hand, if the red 7 flag is not set on, only the number of times the strong cherry won a prize among the number of times the strong cherry won and the weak cherry won in the special ART (between MB flags). Be counted.

  Then, based on the number of times that the strong cherry has won and the number of times that the weak cherry has won in the specialization zone (MB gaming state) (see FIG. 4) that operates after the special ART (between MB flags) ends. Then, the number of ART games is added (added) (see FIG. 69).

  Specifically, when the red 7 flag is set to ON, the number of ART games is added (added) based on both the number of times a strong cherry wins and the number of times a weak cherry wins. The additional special zone (MB gaming state) in which the number of ART games is added in this way is the first special zone (MB gaming state) (see FIG. 3).

  On the other hand, if the red 7 flag is not set to ON, the number of ART games is added based only on the number of times the strong cherry wins out of the number of times the strong cherry wins and the number of weak cherries win ( Added). The additional special zone (MB gaming state) in which the number of ART games is added in this way is the second special zone (MB gaming state) (see FIG. 3).

  It should be noted that the extra special zone (MB gaming state) that operates after the special ART (between MB flags) ends is the first extra special zone (MB gaming state) and the second extra special zone (MB gaming state). Which of the added special zones (MB gaming state), that is, whether or not the red 7 flag is set on is determined by the MB that triggered the operation of the special ART (between MB flags). It is determined at the time of internal winning (see FIGS. 41 and 66).

[Main control processing]
The main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 executes various processes according to the flowcharts shown in FIGS.

<Main control processing>
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a main control process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, when the power is turned on to the pachislot machine 1, the main CPU 93 executes a power-on process (see FIG. 38) (step S11). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup is normal or the setting has been changed appropriately, and an initialization process is executed according to the determination result.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes an initialization process at the end of one game (unit game) (step S12). In this initialization process, for example, an initialization storage area at the end of one game is initialized. By this initialization process, data stored in the internal winning combination storing area, the display combining storage area, etc. of the main RAM 95 is cleared.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes medal acceptance / start check processing (see FIG. 39) (step S13). In the medal acceptance / start check process, a process for detecting a medal inserted by the player and a process for detecting a start operation are performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 extracts a random number value and stores it in a random value storage area allocated to the main RAM 95 (step S14). Next, the main CPU 93 executes an internal lottery process (see FIG. 40) (step S15).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a lock effect determination process (step S16). The lock effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel stop initial setting process (see FIG. 42) (step S17). By this reel stop initial setting process, each piece of information (for example, stop table number) relating to the reel stop control is stored in the corresponding area of the main RAM 95 based on the result of the internal lottery process (internal winning combination).

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates start command data, and stores the generated start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S18). The start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 in the command data transmission process (see FIG. 49). The start command data includes various kinds of information (internal winning combination, gaming state, etc.) necessary for production.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a wait process (step S19). This wait process determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the previous game (start of the previous unit game), and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the predetermined time elapses. This is a process to wait until the digestion is complete. The predetermined time in the wait process, that is, the wait time is set to 4.1 seconds from the start of the previous unit game, for example.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel rotation start process (step S20). The reel rotation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates reel rotation start command data, and stores the generated reel rotation start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S21). The reel rotation start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 in the command data transmission process (see FIG. 49). As a result, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize the start of reel rotation, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a pull-in priority storage process (step S22). In this process, the main CPU 93 obtains the information acquired in the process of step S172 of the reel stop initial setting process (see FIG. 42), the pull-in priority table selection table in FIGS. 23 to 25, and the pull-in priority table in FIG. The drawing priority data for each symbol position of each rotating reel is acquired based on the above, and when the stop is permitted, the acquired drawing priority data is stored in the drawing priority data storage area (see FIG. 32). . As a result, the drawing priority order of all symbols on the rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R is determined. On the other hand, when the stop is not permitted (for example, when a winning combination is won), the main CPU 93 stores stop prohibition. The pull-in priority storage process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a reel stop control process (see FIG. 45) (step S23). By this process, the stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a winning search process (step S24). In this winning search process, after all reels are stopped, the symbol combination displayed on the winning determination line and the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 14 and 15) are collated, and the collated result is displayed in the display combination storage area. (See FIG. 29). Further, the number of medals to be paid out is obtained based on the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 14 and 15).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes payout of the number of medals according to the displayed symbol combination based on the result of the winning search process (step S25). Along with this medal payout process, the drive control of the hopper device 51 and the update of the credit number are performed based on the payout number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates display command data, and stores the generated display command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S26). The display command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 in the command data transmission process (see FIG. 49). As a result, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes RT control processing (see FIG. 46) (step S27). The gaming state is updated between the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, and the RT2 gaming state by the RT control process.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes bonus end check processing (step S28). The bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus operation check process (step S29). The bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the process of step S29, the main CPU 93 returns the process to step S12.

<Power-on processing>
The power-on process that is performed in step S11 in FIG. 37 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a power-on process performed in the pachislot main control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether the backup is normal (step S51). In this determination process, it is determined whether the backup is normal or not by error detection using the checksum value. For example, when the power is turned off, the main CPU 93 uses the set value of the pachislot 1 (a value for setting the payout rate at one of six predetermined stages) and the checksum value calculated from the set value as backup data to the main RAM 95. The setting value and the checksum value stored in the main RAM 95 are read in the determination process (step S51) when the power is turned on. Then, the main CPU 93 compares the checksum calculated from the read setting value with the checksum that has been backed up, and determines that the backup is normal if the comparison results match.

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the backup is normal, the main CPU 93 sets the backed-up setting value (step S52). As a result, when the backup is normal, the set value before the power is turned off is set.

  After the process of step S52 or when determining that the backup is not normal in step S51, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the setting change switch is on (step S53). When determining that the setting change switch is not on, the main CPU 93 determines whether the backup is normal (step S59).

  When it is determined in step S59 that the backup is not normal, the main CPU 93 executes power-on error processing (step S61). In this process, the main CPU 93 displays an error display or the like indicating that the backup is not normal. By the way, the main CPU 93 does not cancel the error state depending on the operation of the stop release switch or the reset switch in the state where the backup is not normal (backup error), and a new setting change has been made. Only when the error state is cleared.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S59 that the backup is normal, the main CPU 93 restores the state before power interruption based on the backup data stored in the main RAM 95 (step S60). After executing the process of step S60, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S53 that the setting change switch is ON, the main CPU 93 executes an initialization process for changing the setting (step S54).

  In the initialization process at the time of changing the setting, for example, the main CPU 93 clears the data stored in the internal winning combination storing area and the display winning combination storing area of the main RAM 95 and also clears the set value.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates initialization command data, and stores the generated initialization command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S55).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 executes a setting value changing process (step S56). In the set value changing process, the main CPU 93 selects a set value from 1 to 6 set in advance according to the operation result of the reset switch, and determines the operation result of the start lever 23 operated subsequently. The set value is confirmed based on this.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the setting change switch is in an on state, and repeats this process until a determination result that is not in the on state is obtained (step S57). If the determination result that the setting change switch is not in the on state is obtained, it means that the operation of the setting change switch has been completed, and the main CPU 93 generates initialization command data and generates the generated initialization command. Data is stored in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S58). The initialization command data includes presence / absence of setting value change, setting value information, and the like. After executing the process of step S58, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine.

<Medal reception / start check processing>
The medal acceptance / start check process performed in step S13 of FIG. 37 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a medal acceptance / start check process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (step S81). When a replay role is won in the previous unit game, medals are automatically inserted in the current unit game. That is, the determination process in step S81 is equivalent to determining whether or not a replay is won in the previous unit game.

  When it is determined in step S81 that there is an automatic insertion request, the main CPU 93 executes automatic insertion processing for automatically inserting the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game (step S82). Specifically, the main CPU 93 copies the automatic insertion counter to the insertion number counter and clears the automatic insertion counter.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates medal insertion command data, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S83). The medal insertion command data includes information such as the number of inserted medals.

  If it is determined in step S81 that there is no automatic insertion request, the main CPU 93 executes medal acceptance permission (step S84). Specifically, the main CPU 93 drives a solenoid of a selector (not shown) to prompt passage of medals in the selector.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum number of inserted coins according to the gaming state (step S85). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets the maximum value of the inserted number to “3” when the current gaming state is not the MB gaming state, and the maximum value of the inserted number when the current gaming state is the MB gaming state. Is set to “1”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is a medal acceptance permission (step S86). If it is determined that there is a medal acceptance permission, it means that a medal can be accepted, and the main CPU 93 executes a medal insertion check process for checking the number of inserted medals (step S87). ). In the medal insertion check process, the main CPU 93 updates the value of the insertion number counter according to the number of checked medals.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates medal insertion command data, and stores the generated medal insertion command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S88). The medal insertion command data includes information such as the number of inserted medals.

  After executing the process of step S83 or step S88, or when it is determined in step S86 that there is no medal acceptance permission, the main CPU 93 determines the number of inserted medals to be able to start a game (in a non-MB game state). It is determined whether or not the number is 3 (1 in the MB gaming state) (step S89).

  When determining in step S89 that the number of inserted medals is not the number that can start the game, the main CPU 93 returns the process to step S86.

  On the other hand, when determining that the number of inserted medals is the number that allows the game to start, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is ON (step S90).

  When determining in step S90 that the start switch 79 is not on, the main CPU 93 returns the process to step S86. On the other hand, when determining that the start switch 79 is on, the main CPU 93 prohibits medal acceptance (step S91). Specifically, the solenoid of the selector (not shown) is not driven, and the discharge of the medal inserted into the insertion slot from the medal payout opening 32 is urged. After executing the process of step S91, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine.

<Internal lottery processing>
The internal lottery process performed in step S15 of FIG. 37 will be described using FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table corresponding to the gaming state (step S111). In the present embodiment, in the non-MB gaming state, the main CPU 93 performs the normal operation shown in FIG. 16A regardless of whether the gaming state is the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, or the RT2 gaming state. Set the game state internal lottery table. In the MB gaming state, the main CPU 93 sets the MB internal lottery table shown in FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 obtains a random value stored in the random value storage area (step S112).

  Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a lottery value corresponding to the winning number using the predetermined area of the internal lottery table set in step S111, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (step S113). That is, the main CPU 93 collates the internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the subtraction result obtained in step S113 is smaller than 0 (step S114).

  When it is determined that the subtraction result is not smaller than 0, that is, when it is determined that so-called borrowing is not performed, the main CPU 93 updates the random number value and the winning number (step S115).

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all winning numbers in the internal lottery table being used have been checked (step S116).

  When determining that all the winning numbers have not been checked, the main CPU 93 returns the process to step S113.

  On the other hand, when determining that all winning numbers have been checked, the main CPU 93 sets 0 as the value of the data pointer (step S117). That is, the main CPU 93 determines that the display combination is lost as a result of the internal lottery.

  When it is determined in step S114 that the subtraction result is smaller than 0, that is, when it is determined that so-called borrowing has been performed, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table used and uses the small role / replay data pointer. And the value of the bonus data pointer are acquired (step S118).

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes the processing of step S117 or step S118 described above, and then refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determining table shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. An internal winning combination is acquired based on the value of (step S119). The processing of this step S119 refers to the small combination / replay internal winning combination determination table using the value of the small combination / replay data pointer determined in the above-described processing of step S117 or step S118. This is a process of determining a 2-byte data value indicating an internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the replay data pointer.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the corresponding internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 27) (step S120). The process of step S120 is a process of storing the 2-byte data value indicating the internal winning combination determined in the process of step S119 in the internal winning combination storing area (storage areas 1 to 20) shown in FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 31B) is 0 (step S121). This process is a process for determining whether or not the data value stored in the carryover combination storage area shown in FIG. That is, the process of step S121 is a process of determining whether MB has been carried over.

  Next, when the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S121 that the value of the carryover combination storage area is 0, the main CPU 93 refers to the MB internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 19 and sets the value of the bonus data pointer. Based on this, an internal winning combination is acquired (step S122). This processing corresponds to the value of the bonus data pointer by referring to the MB internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 19 using the value of the bonus data pointer determined in the processing of step S117 or step S118 described above. This is a process for determining a 2-byte data value indicating the internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 31B) (step S123). This process is a process of setting the value of the bit corresponding to the acquired internal winning combination among bits 0 to 2 of the carryover combination storage area shown in FIG.

  When the main CPU 93 determines that the value of the carryover combination storage area is not 0 in the process of step S121 described above, or after executing the process of step S123, the main winning combination stored in the carryover combination storage area The internal winning combination storing area is updated based on (Step S124). This process is a process of updating the data value of the internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 27 based on the type of the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area shown in FIG.

  After executing the process of step S124, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine.

<Lock production determination process>
The lock effect determination process performed in step S16 in FIG. 37 will be described using FIG. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a lock effect determination process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (step S151). The main CPU 93 can recognize the current gaming state by referring to the gaming state flag storage area of the main RAM 95 (see FIG. 31A).

  When determining that the current gaming state is not the RT2 gaming state, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine. On the other hand, when determining that the current gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB has won internally in the current unit game (step S152). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus data pointer acquired in step S118 of FIG. That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning number determined as the internal winning combination is any of 49, 52, and 53 (see FIG. 16A).

  When it is determined that the MB has not won internally in the current unit game, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined that the MB has won internally in the current unit game, the main CPU 93 determines one of the rotation effect number 1 and the rotation effect number 2 by lottery (step S153).

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the turning effect number determined in step S153 in the main RAM 95 (step S154).

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates lock effect determination command data, and stores the generated lock effect determination command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S155). The lock effect determination command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 in the command data transmission process (see FIG. 49). The lock effect determination command data includes information indicating the spinning effect number determined in step S153.

  When the turning effect number determined in step S153 is the turning effect number 1, the sub-control circuit 101 sets the red 7 flag to ON (see step S942 in FIG. 66). As described with reference to FIG. 36, when the red 7 flag is set to ON, the additional special zone (MB gaming state) that operates after the special ART (between MB flags) ends is the first special zone (MB Gaming state). That is, when the spinning effect number 1 is determined, the first specialization zone (MB gaming state) is activated, and when the spinning effect number 2 is determined, the second specialization zone (MB) MB gaming state) will be activated.

  After executing the process of step S155, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
The reel stop initial setting process performed in step S17 in FIG. 37 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a reel stop initial setting process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the main CPU 93 refers to the rotation stop number selection table (see FIG. 22A), and determines the rotation stop number based on the gaming state (between MB flags or non-MB flags) and the winning number. Is set (step S171).

  Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 22B), and acquires each piece of information based on the rotation stop number (step S172). For example, the main CPU 93 selects the pull-in priority table selection table number, the pull-in priority table number, the number of the stop table used during the first to third stop operations, and information necessary for performing a control change in the control change process (ie When the reels are stopped in a specific order, information used to reselect the stop table when the reels are stopped (or pressed) at a specific position is acquired. Incidentally, the stop table stores information on the number of sliding pieces with respect to the pressed position directly or indirectly. Using this information, there is no disadvantage to the player and an erroneous winning is generated. It is configured to stop at the stop position intended by the developer as long as it is not allowed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 stores the rotating identifier in each storage area of the symbol code storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S173), stores 3 in the stop button inactive counter (step S174), and ends this subroutine. To do.

<Reel rotation start processing>
The reel rotation start process performed in step S20 in FIG. 37 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a reel rotation start process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the reel lock activation flag is set to ON (step S191). When the reel effect number is stored in the main RAM 95 (see step S154 in FIG. 41), the reel lock activation flag is set on when the MB is won (see step S450 in FIG. 48). It is set off in the next unit game (see step S194 in FIG. 43). Therefore, the fact that the reel lock activation flag is set to ON indicates that the unit game is the first game in the MB game state operated during the RT2 game state.

  When determining that the reel lock activation flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 93 executes normal time acceleration processing (step S196). In this process, the main CPU 93 requests the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. When the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is requested, the driving of the stepping motor is controlled by an interrupt process (see FIG. 49) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec), and each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotation is started. The reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are controlled to be accelerated until their rotation reaches a constant speed, and then controlled so as to maintain the constant speed.

  On the other hand, when determining that the reel lock activation flag is set to ON, the main CPU 93 executes the processes of steps S192 to S195 before executing the normal acceleration process of step S196. That is, the normal rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is not started until the processing of steps S192 to S195 is completed (the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are locked).

  Specifically, when it is determined in step S191 that the reel lock activation flag is set to ON, the main CPU 93 generates lock command data and stores the generated lock command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95. (Step S192). The lock command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 in the command data transmission process (see FIG. 49). As a result, the sub control circuit 101 can recognize that the reel has been locked, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

  Next, the main CPU 93 activates a reel action based on the spinning performance number (see step S154 in FIG. 41) stored in the main RAM 95 (step S193). In this process, the main CPU 93 activates the red 7 reel action when the turning effect number stored in the main RAM 95 is the turning effect number 1. That is, the main CPU 93 causes the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to reversely rotate, and then stops the “red 7” symbol on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. The main CPU 93 activates the green 7 reel action when the turning effect number stored in the main RAM 95 is the turning effect number 2. That is, the main CPU 93 causes the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to reversely rotate, and then stops the “green 7” symbol on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

  As described with reference to FIG. 41, when the rotation effect number 1 is determined, after the special ART (between MB flags) is completed, the first additional special zone (MB gaming state) is activated. When the “Red 7” symbol is stopped and displayed, the player is informed that the first additional special zone (MB gaming state) is activated. In addition, when the spinning effect number 2 is determined, after the special ART (between MB flags) is finished, the second additional special zone (MB gaming state) is activated, so the “Green 7” symbol is stopped. When displayed, the player is notified that the second specialization zone (MB gaming state) is activated.

  Next, the main CPU 93 sets the reel lock activation flag to OFF (step S194). Then, the main CPU 93 clears the spinning effect number stored in the main RAM 95 (step S195).

  Thereafter, the main CPU 93 executes the normal acceleration process described above (step S196), and ends this subroutine.

<Pull-in priority table selection processing>
With reference to FIG. 44, the pull-in priority storage process performed in step S22 of FIG. 37 will be described in more detail. In the pull-in priority storage process, a pull-in priority table selection process shown in FIG. 44 is performed. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a pull-in priority table selection process performed in the pachislot main control circuit according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a pull-in priority table selection table number (see FIG. 22B) is set (step S231). When determining that the pull-in priority table selection table number is not set, the main CPU 93 sets the stored pull-in priority table number (step S232). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the pull-in priority table selection table number is set, the main CPU 93 sets a pull-in priority table selection table (see FIGS. 23 to 25) according to the pull-in priority table selection table number. (Step S233). Then, the main CPU 93 refers to the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 30 (b)) and the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 30 (a)), and selects the corresponding drawing priority table number from the drawing priority table selection table. Is set (step S234). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends this subroutine.

<Reel stop control process>
The reel stop control process performed in step S23 of FIG. 37 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a reel stop control process performed in the pachislot main control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (step S281). This process is a process for determining whether or not a signal is output from the stop switch provided on the stop switch substrate 80. When the main CPU 93 determines that a valid stop button has not been pressed, the main CPU 93 repeats the process of step S281.

  When it is determined in step S281 that the valid stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R have been pressed, the main CPU 93 operates according to the pressed stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R as shown in FIG. The stop button storage area and the pressing order storage area shown in FIG. 30B are updated (step S282). The main CPU 93 stores the types of operation stop buttons corresponding to the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation in the press order storage area shown in FIG. By referencing, the pressing order of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R can be determined.

  Next, the main CPU 93 decrements the stop button non-operation counter by 1 (step S283), determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (step S284), and stores the stop start position based on the symbol counter (step S285). ). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the corresponding reel when a stop operation is detected by the stop switch.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding piece number determination process (step S286). In this process, the main CPU 93 obtains a stop table from the stop table selection data group, and obtains the number of sliding symbols defined at the stop start position.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a sliding frame number correction process (step S287). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the drawing priority data of the symbol corresponding to the number of sliding symbols acquired in step S286 is the highest in the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols (0 to 4 frames). If there is higher pull-in priority data, the number of sliding symbols is corrected so that the symbol stops at that position. That is, the main CPU 93 determines the number of sliding symbols on which a combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination to be pulled in with higher priority is displayed from among a plurality of types of sliding symbols.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates reel stop command data, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S288). The reel stop command data includes information on the operation stop button and the like. The reel stop command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 in the command data transmission process (see FIG. 49). Thereby, the sub-control circuit 101 can produce an effect according to the stop operation.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines and stores a scheduled stop position of the search target reel based on the stop start position stored in step S285 and the slip piece number determination data determined in step S286 (step S289). The scheduled stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any one of predetermined numerical values “0” to “4” defined as the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and the symbol position where the reel rotation stops. It is.

  Next, the main CPU 93 performs a control change process when necessary according to the search symbol position (step S290). In this process, the main CPU 93 reselects a stop table to be used from the stop table selection data group when the stop position is a specific stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (step S291).

  When determining that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0, the main CPU 93 executes the pull-in priority order storing process (step S292), and returns the process to step S281. The pull-in priority storage process in step S292 is the same as the pull-in priority storage process in step S22 of FIG. 37, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  On the other hand, when determining that the stop button non-operation counter is 0, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine.

<RT control processing>
The RT control process performed in step S27 of FIG. 37 will be described using FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an RT control process performed in the pachislot main control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the MB gaming state (step S351). The main CPU 93 can recognize the current gaming state by referring to the gaming state flag storage area of the main RAM 95 (see FIG. 31A). When determining that the current gaming state is the MB gaming state, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the current gaming state is not the MB gaming state, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is between MB flags (step S352). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines that the current gaming state is between MB flags when “1” is stored in the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 31B), and the carryover combination storage area ( When “1” is not stored in FIG. 31B, it is determined that the current gaming state is not between MB flags. When determining that the current gaming state is between the MB flags, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the current gaming state is not between the MB flags, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not any of the CU lips 1 to 3 has won a prize (step S353). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line is a symbol combination (see FIG. 14) corresponding to any one of the CU lips 1 to 3.

  When it is determined that any one of the CU Lips 1 to 3 has won, the main CPU 93 updates the gaming state to the RT0 gaming state (Step S354). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets bit 0 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 31A) to “1”, and sets bits 1 and 2 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 31A) to “1”. 0 ”. After executing the process of step S354, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine.

  When it is determined in step S353 that none of the CU lips 1 to 3 has won, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not any of the left spilled eyes 1 to 6 has won (step S355). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line is a symbol combination corresponding to any of the left spill eyes 1 to 6 (see FIG. 14).

  When determining that any of the left spilled eyes 1 to 6 has won, the main CPU 93 updates the gaming state to the RT1 gaming state (step S356). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 31A) to “1”, and sets bits 0 and 2 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 31A) to “1”. 0 ”. After executing the process of step S356, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S355 that none of the left spilled eyes 1 to 6 has won, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not any of the raising lips 1 to 9 has been won (step S357). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line is a symbol combination (see FIG. 14) corresponding to any of the raising replies 1 to 9.

  When it is determined that any of the raising lips 1 to 9 has won, the main CPU 93 updates the gaming state to the RT2 gaming state (step S358). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets bit 2 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 31A) to “1” and sets bits 0 and 1 of the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 31A) to “1”. 0 ”. When it is determined in step S357 that none of the raising replies 1 to 9 has won, or after executing the process of step S358, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine.

<Bonus end check process>
The bonus end check process performed in step S28 of FIG. 37 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a bonus end check process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the MB gaming state (step S421). The main CPU 93 can recognize the current gaming state by referring to the gaming state flag storage area of the main RAM 95 (see FIG. 31A). When determining that the current gaming state is not the MB gaming state, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the current gaming state is the MB gaming state, the main CPU 93 performs CB termination processing (step S422). In the MB gaming state, the CB gaming state ends every time a unit game is played. Then, by repeating the CB end processing and the CB operation processing (see step S445 in FIG. 48), in the MB gaming state, the CB gaming state ends and operates repeatedly until the MB gaming state ends.

  Next, the main CPU 93 updates the value of the bonus end number counter (see step S447 in FIG. 48) (step S423). In this process, the main CPU 93 updates the value of the bonus end number counter by subtracting the number of medals paid out in the MB gaming state from a preset number of payouts.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is smaller than 0 (step S424). When determining that the value of the bonus end number counter is not smaller than 0, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the value of the bonus end number counter is smaller than 0, the main CPU 93 performs MB end processing (step S425). In this process, the main CPU 93 updates bit 3 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 31A) to “0”.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates bonus end command data, and stores the generated bonus end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S426). The bonus end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 in the command data transmission process (see FIG. 49). As a result, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize that the MB gaming state has ended.

  After executing the process of step S426, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine.

<Bonus activation check process>
The bonus operation check process performed in step S29 in FIG. 37 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a bonus operation check process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the MB gaming state (step S441). The main CPU 93 can recognize the current gaming state by referring to the gaming state flag storage area of the main RAM 95 (see FIG. 31A).

  When determining that the current gaming state is the MB gaming state, the main CPU 93 performs a CB operation process (step S442). By repeating the CB operation process and the CB end process (see step S422 in FIG. 47), in the MB gaming state, the operation and the end of the CB gaming state are repeated until the MB gaming state ends. After executing the process of step S442, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine.

  When determining in step S441 that the current gaming state is not the MB gaming state, the main CPU 93 determines whether any of MBs 1 to 3 has won a prize (step S443). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line is a symbol combination corresponding to any of MB1 to MB3 (see FIG. 14).

  When it is determined that any of MBs 1 to 3 has won, the main CPU 93 performs MB operation processing (step S444). In this process, the main CPU 93 updates bit 3 of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 31A) to “1”. Then, the main CPU 93 performs CB operation processing (step S445).

  Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 31B) (step S446). Then, the main CPU 93 sets “7” in the bonus end number counter (step S447). Each time a medal is paid out in the MB gaming state, the value of the bonus end number counter is subtracted, and when the value of the bonus end number counter becomes smaller than 0, the MB gaming state ends (see FIG. 47). Step S423 to step S425). In the present embodiment, since the number of medals paid out in one unit game in the MB gaming state is one, the MB gaming state ends when eight unit games are performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates bonus start command data, and stores the generated bonus start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S448). The bonus start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 in the command data transmission process (see FIG. 49). As a result, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize that the MB gaming state has started.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the rotation effect number (see step S153 in FIG. 41) is stored in the main RAM 95 (step S449). If it is determined that the rotation effect number is not stored in the main RAM 95, the main CPU 93 ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the spinning effect number is stored in the main RAM 95, the main CPU 93 sets the reel lock activation flag to ON (step S450). As a result, a red 7 reel action or a green 7 reel action is performed (see step S193 in FIG. 43), and the first additional special zone (MB gaming state) and the second additional special zone (MB gaming state) The player is notified of which of the additional special zones (MB gaming state) is activated. After executing the process of step S450, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S443 that none of the MBs 1 to 3 has won, the main CPU 93 determines the replay role (middle lip 1, lower lip 1-2, CU lip 1-3, CD lip 1-4, upper lip 1-12, 7 control lip 1-18, raising lip 1-9, chance lip 1-15, or BAR control lip 1-7) is determined whether or not (Step S451). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines that the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line is a replay role (middle lip 1, lower lip 1-2, CU lip 1-3, CD lip 1-4, upper lip 1-12. , 7 control lip 1-18, raising lip 1-9, chance lip 1-15, or a symbol combination corresponding to BAR control lip 1-7) (see FIG. 14). .

  Replay role (middle lip 1, lower lip 1-2, CU lip 1-3, CD lip 1-4, upper lip 1-12, 7 control lip 1-18, lift lip 1-9, chance lip 1-15, Alternatively, when determining that the BAR control lips 1 to 7) have won, the main CPU 93 makes an automatic insertion request (step S452). In this process, the main CPU 93 copies the value of the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion counter.

  In step S451, a replay combination (middle lip 1, lower lip 1-2, CU lip 1-3, CD lip 1-4, upper lip 1-12, 7 control lip 1-18, raising lip 1-9, chance lip 1 -15 and BAR control lips 1-7) are determined not to win, or after executing the process of step S452, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine.

<Interrupt processing>
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention. This process is executed every 1.1172 milliseconds.

  First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (step S461). Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs input port check processing (step S462). In this process, the main CPU 93 confirms the presence / absence of a signal transmitted to the microcomputer 92. For example, the main CPU 93 stores the on-edge and off-edge of the start switch 79, stop switch, etc. for each interrupt process. The main CPU 93 stores input state command data including information on the on-edge and off-edge of various switches in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95. The stored input state command data is transmitted to the sub control circuit 101 in a command data transmission process of an interrupt process described later. Accordingly, various effects can be executed using the operation means such as the start lever 23 and the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs timer update processing (step S463). Next, the main CPU 93 performs command data transmission processing (step S464). In this process, the main CPU 93 transmits the command data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub control circuit 101.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a process of controlling the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (step S465). More specifically, the main CPU 93 starts the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in response to a request for starting the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, that is, in response to the start operation. Control is performed so that 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate. Further, in accordance with the stop operation, control is performed so that the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R corresponding to the stop operation stops.

  Subsequently, the main CPU 93 performs a lamp / 7SEG driving process (step S466). For example, the main CPU 93 displays the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, etc. on various display units. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 restores the register (step S467), and terminates the interrupt processing that occurs periodically.

[Sub-control processing]
The sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 executes various processes according to the flowcharts shown in FIGS.

<Processing at power-on>
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a sub-control process performed when the power is turned on in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process (step S601). In this process, the sub CPU 102 performs error check of the sub RAM 103 and the like, and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task, a sound control task, which are timer interrupt synchronization task groups, and a mother task, which is a VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) interrupt synchronization task group.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates a lamp control task (see FIG. 51) (step S602). The lamp control task waits for the sub CPU 102 to receive a timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 102 every 2 milliseconds, and in response to receiving the timer interrupt event message, It is a process which performs the process which controls a lighting state.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates a sound control task (see FIG. 52) (step S603). The sound control task is a process in which the sub CPU 102 executes a process of controlling a sound output state from speakers such as the speakers 58, 64, 65L, and 65R.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the mother task (see FIG. 53) (step S604) and aborts the process. The mother task is a task group for VSYNC (vertical synchronization signal) interrupt synchronization, and a vertical synchronization signal (VSYNC interrupt signal) sent from the liquid crystal display device 11 when an image of one frame is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Is used.

<Ramp control task>
The lamp control task activated in step S602 in FIG. 50 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a lamp control task performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes a timer interrupt initialization process (step S621). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes lamp related data initialization processing (step S622).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 waits for a timer interrupt (step S623). In this process, until the sub CPU 102 receives a timer interrupt event message every 2 milliseconds, the sub CPU 102 executes a task group different from the timer interrupt synchronization. As a task group different from timer interrupt synchronization, for example, a main board communication task which is a task group for command reception interrupt synchronization can be cited. Further, a task group (not shown) for power supply interrupt synchronization and a task group (not shown) for door monitoring unit communication synchronization can be mentioned.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a sound control task (see FIG. 52) (step S624). In this process, the task in the next priority of the timer interrupt synchronization task group which is the same group as the lamp control task is executed. In this embodiment, the priority order of the task group for timer interrupt synchronization is basically the order of the lamp control task and the sound control task. Therefore, in step S624, the sound control task at the next priority of the lamp control task is executed. In step S624, the processes of steps S643 and S644 are performed in the sound control task shown in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes lamp data analysis processing (step S625), executes lamp effect execution processing (lamp lighting control processing) (step S626), and returns the processing to step S623.

<Sound control task>
The sound control task activated in step S603 in FIG. 50 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a sound control task performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process of sound related data related to the sound output state from speakers such as the speakers 58, 64, 65L, and 65R (step S641).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a task in the next priority of the timer interrupt synchronization task group that is the same group as the sound control task, that is, the lamp control task (step S642).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes sound data analysis processing (step S643), performs sound effect execution processing (step S644), and returns the processing to step S642.

<Mother task>
The mother task activated in step S604 in FIG. 50 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a mother task performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the mother task, the sub CPU 102 activates the main task (step S661), activates the main board communication task (step S662), activates the animation task (step S663), and aborts the process.

<Main task>
The main task activated in step S661 in FIG. 53 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a main task performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the main task, the sub CPU 102 executes a VSYNC interrupt initialization process (step S681) and waits for a VSYNC interrupt (step S682).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes a drawing process (step S683), and returns the process to step S682.

<Main board communication task>
The main board communication task activated in step S662 in FIG. 53 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a main board communication task performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes initialization of the communication message queue (step S701), and executes a reception command check (step S702).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one has been received (step S703). If it is determined that a command different from the previous command has not been received, the sub CPU 102 returns the process to step S702.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a command different from the previous command has been received, it is determined that the received command is a legitimate command, game information is created from the received command, and the created game information is stored in the sub-RAM 103. (Step S704). Next, the sub CPU 102 executes command analysis processing (see FIG. 56) (step S705), and returns the processing to step S702.

<Command analysis processing>
The command analysis process performed in step S705 of FIG. 55 will be described using FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  In the command analysis process, the sub CPU 102 executes an effect content determination process (see FIG. 58) (step S711), executes a ramp data determination process (step S712), and executes a sound data determination process (step S713). Each determined data is registered (step S714), and this subroutine is finished.

<Anime task>
The animation task activated in step S663 of FIG. 53 will be described using FIG. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an animation task performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 checks a change from the previous game information (step S731). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines that the game information stored in the sub RAM 103 (see step S704 in FIG. 55) is different from the game information stored in the sub RAM 103 at the time of the previous animation task. Check if it is.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes an object control process (step S732). Specifically, when a check result indicating that the game information has changed is obtained in step S731, the sub CPU 102 controls the image according to the change in the game information.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 102 executes animation task management processing (step S733). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 manages the order of images displayed in various effects. When the sub CPU 102 executes the animation task management process, the process returns to step S731.

<Production content determination process>
The effect content determination process performed in step S711 in FIG. 56 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an effect content determination process performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not initialization command data (see step S55 and step S58 in FIG. 38) has been received (step S751).

  If it is determined in step S751 that initialization command data has been received, the sub CPU 102 executes initialization command reception processing (step S752) and ends this subroutine. In the initialization command reception process, for example, the sub CPU 102 is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 when the power is turned on when the setting change switch provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachi-slot 1 is on. The execution request of the hall menu task according to the initialization command data to be executed. As a result, the hall menu is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. In addition, effect data based on information transmitted as initialization command data (presence / absence of setting value change, setting value information, etc.) is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S751 that initialization command data has not been received, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not medal insertion command data (see step S83 and step S88 in FIG. 39) has been received (see FIG. 39). Step S753).

  If it is determined in step S753 that the medal insertion command data has been received, the sub CPU 102 executes a medal insertion command reception process (step S754) and ends this subroutine. In the process at the time of receiving a medal insertion command, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as medal insertion command data (information indicating whether or not a medal has been inserted, a value of the inserted number counter, a credit counter, etc.) is set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S753 that the medal insertion command data has not been received, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not start command data (see step S18 in FIG. 37) has been received (step S755).

  If it is determined in step S755 that start command data has been received, the sub CPU 102 executes start command reception processing (see FIG. 59) (step S756), and ends this subroutine. In the start command receiving process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as start command data (information indicating a game state flag type, an internal winning combination type (winning number), etc.) is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S755 that start command data has not been received, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not lock effect determination command data (see step S155 in FIG. 41) has been received (step S757). .

  If it is determined in step S757 that the lock effect determination command data has been received, the sub CPU 102 executes a lock effect determination command reception process (step S758), and ends this subroutine. The process at the time of receiving the lock effect determination command will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S757 that the lock effect determination command data has not been received, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the reel rotation start command data (see step S21 in FIG. 37) has been received (step S75). S759).

  If it is determined in step S759 that the reel rotation start command data has been received, the sub CPU 102 executes a reel rotation start command reception process (step S760) and ends this subroutine. In the reel rotation start command reception process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as reel rotation start command data (information indicating that the rotation of the reel has started) is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S759 that the reel rotation start command data has not been received, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not lock command data (see step S192 in FIG. 43) has been received (step S761). .

  If it is determined in step S761 that lock command data has been received, the sub CPU 102 executes a lock command reception process (step S762), and ends this subroutine. In the lock command reception processing, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as lock command data (information indicating that the reel has been locked) is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S761 that lock command data has not been received, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not reel stop command data (see step S288 in FIG. 45) has been received (step S763).

  If it is determined in step S763 that the reel stop command data has been received, the sub CPU 102 executes a reel stop command reception process (step S764), and ends this subroutine. In the reel stop command reception process, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as reel stop command data (information indicating stop reel type, stop start position, number of sliding pieces (or planned stop position), etc.) is set. Is done. The reel stop command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S763 that the reel stop command data has not been received, the sub CPU 102 determines whether display command data (see step S26 in FIG. 37) has been received (step S765).

  If it is determined in step S765 that display command data has been received, the sub CPU 102 executes display command reception processing (see FIG. 67) (step S766), and ends this subroutine. In the processing at the time of display command reception, for example, effect data based on information (information indicating a display combination etc.) transmitted as display command data is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S765 that display command data has not been received, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not bonus start command data (see step S448 in FIG. 48) has been received (step S767).

  If it is determined in step S767 that bonus start command data has been received, the sub CPU 102 executes bonus start command reception processing (step S768), and ends this subroutine. In the bonus start command reception processing, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as bonus start command data (information indicating that the MB gaming state has started) is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S767 that bonus start command data has not been received, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not bonus end command data (see step S426 in FIG. 47) has been received (step S769). .

  If it is determined in step S769 that bonus end command data has been received, the sub CPU 102 executes bonus end command reception processing (step S770), and ends this subroutine. In the bonus end command reception processing, for example, effect data based on information transmitted as bonus end command data (information indicating that the MB gaming state has ended) is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S769 that bonus end command data has not been received, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<Processing when receiving a start command>
The start command reception process performed in step S756 of FIG. 58 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a start command reception process performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART preparing flag is set to ON (step S801). The ART preparing flag is a flag indicating that the ART is being prepared, and is set when the ART lottery is won (see step S845 in FIG. 61 and step S986 in FIG. 68).

  When determining that the ART preparing flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART preparing process (step S802). The ART preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the processing of step S802, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the ART preparing flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the MB gaming state (step S803). 58. Since the start command data received in step S755 of FIG. 58 includes information indicating the gaming state flag stored in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 31A) of the main RAM 95, the start command data is received. By doing so, the sub CPU 102 can recognize the current gaming state.

  If it is determined that the current gaming state is the MB gaming state, the sub CPU 102 executes the MB mid-process (step S804). The in-MB processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the processing of step S804, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the current gaming state is not the MB gaming state, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART flag is set to ON (step S805). The ART flag is a flag indicating that ART is in progress, and is set when any of the raising replies 1 to 9 wins during ART preparation (see step S964 in FIG. 67).

  When determining that the ART flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 executes ART processing (step S806). The processing during ART will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the processing of step S806, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the ART flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the precursor effect flag is set to ON (step S807). The sign effect flag is a flag indicating that it is a period in which an effect (the present sign effect and the gasse sign effect) suggesting the transition to ART is performed (see step S828 in FIG. 60).

  When determining that the sign effect flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 executes a sign effect process (step S808). The precursor effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the processing of step S808, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the sign effect flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 executes normal processing (step S809). The normal process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the processing of step S809, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<Normal processing>
The normal process performed in step S809 in FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing normal processing performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether the winning number is 12, 47, 48, or 51 based on the information indicating the type (winning number) of the internal winning combination included in the start command data (see step S755 in FIG. 58). It is determined whether or not (step S821).

  When determining that the winning number is any one of 12, 47, 48, and 51, the sub CPU 102 executes ART lottery (step S822). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the winning or non-winning by performing lottery based on the random number value. When the ART lottery is won, the game state is shifted from the normal gaming state to ART via a precursor effect (see step S842 in FIG. 61). The route for shifting from the normal gaming state to the ART in this way is the first route described with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART lottery performed in step S822 has been won (step S823).

  When determining that the ART lottery performed in step S822 has not been won, the sub CPU 102 executes the sign effect transition lottery (step S824). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines by lottery whether or not to shift to the gasse sign effect.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not it has been decided to shift to the gasse sign effect (step S825).

  If it is determined that it is determined to shift to the gasse sign effect, the sub CPU 102 sets effect data corresponding to the gasse sign effect (step S826). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect data corresponding to the gasse sign effect as the data used for the current effect from the effect data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86.

  If it is determined in step S823 that the ART lottery has been won, the sub CPU 102 sets effect data corresponding to the present sign effect (step S827). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect data corresponding to the sign effect from the effect data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 as data used for the current effect.

  After executing the process of step S826 or step S827, the sub CPU 102 sets the precursor effect flag to on (step S828). As a result, from the next unit game, the present sign effect or the gasse sign effect is executed (see step S842 in FIG. 61).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “7” in the precursor effect game number counter (step S829). The value of the precursor effect game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games for which the precursor effect is executed, and is stored in the sub RAM 103. After executing the process of step S829, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  When it is determined in step S821 that the winning number is not any of 12, 47, 48, and 51, or when it is determined in step S825 that it is not determined to shift to the gasse sign effect, the sub CPU 102 executes the start command Based on the information indicating the type (winning number) of the internal winning combination included in the data (see step S755 in FIG. 58), it is determined whether or not the winning number is any of 49, 52, and 53 ( Step S830). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the MB has won internally.

  If it is determined that the winning number is not 49, 52, or 53, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the winning number is any one of 49, 52, and 53, the sub CPU 102 executes ART lottery (step S831). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the winning or non-winning by performing lottery based on the random number value. When the ART lottery is won, the game state is shifted from the normal gaming state to the ART through the MB medium challenge effect (see step S984 in FIG. 68). The route for shifting from the normal gaming state to the ART in this manner is the second route described with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART lottery performed in step S831 has been won (step S832).

  If it is determined that the ART lottery performed in step S831 is won, the sub CPU 102 sets effect data corresponding to the challenge effect in the MB (step S833). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect data corresponding to the challenge effect in the MB from the effect data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 as data used for the current effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the ART lottery performed in step S831 has not been won, the sub CPU 102 sets effect data corresponding to the challenge effect during the gaze MB (step S834). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines the effect data corresponding to the challenge effect during the Gasse MB from the effect data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86 as data used for the current effect.

  In this way, in step S833 or step S834, the production data corresponding to the challenge production during the MB or the challenge production during the MBE MB is set, but unlike the indication production, the challenge production during MB is not yet performed in the next unit game. I will not. The mid-MB challenge effect is executed only after the MB wins (see step S983 and step S984 in FIG. 68).

  After executing the process of step S833 or step S834, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<Precursor effect processing>
The precursor effect process performed in step S808 in FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a precursor effect process performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 decrements the value of the precursor effect game number counter (see step S829 in FIG. 60) by 1 (step S841). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the precursor effect game number counter stored in the sub RAM 103 in the sub RAM 103 as a new value of the predictor effect game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes the present sign effect or the gusset sign effect based on the effect data set in step S826 or step S827 in FIG. 60 (step S842).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the indication effect game number counter is 0 (step S843). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the indication effect game number counter is not 0, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the value of the indication effect game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART lottery performed in step S822 of FIG. 60 has been won (step S844).

  If it is determined that the ART lottery performed in step S822 in FIG. 60 has been won, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART preparing flag to ON (step S845). Thereby, the push order for winning the raising lips 1 to 9 is notified (see step S862 in FIG. 62), and when the raising lips 1 to 9 are awarded, the process proceeds to ART (step in FIG. 67). S964).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “50” in the ART game number counter (step S846). The value of the ART game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games executed in ART (AT game state in which the push order for winning the internal winning combination is notified and the RT2 game state), and is stored in the sub RAM 103. Has been.

  If it is determined in step S844 that the ART lottery has not been won, or after executing the process of step S846, the sub CPU 102 clears the indication effect game number counter (step S847). Then, the sub CPU 102 sets the warning effect flag to off (step S848). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

<Processing during ART preparation>
The ART preparation process performed in step S802 of FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the ART preparatory process performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (step S861). 58. Since the start command data received in step S755 of FIG. 58 includes information indicating the gaming state flag stored in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 31A) of the main RAM 95, the start command data is received. By doing so, the sub CPU 102 can recognize the current gaming state. When determining that the current gaming state is not the RT1 gaming state, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the sub CPU 102 executes a push order navigation effect for winning the raising lips 1 to 9 when the raising lips 1 to 9 are won internally. (Step S862).

  The push order navigation effect is an effect of causing the liquid crystal display device 11 to display a push order navigation image. The push order navigation image is an image for informing the push order (the press order of the left stop button 19L, the middle stop button 19C, and the right stop button 19R) for winning the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 stores a plurality of push order navigation image data. Each push order navigation image data corresponds to an image for informing the push order for winning one internal winning combination.

  In the process of step S862, when the winning number is any one of 5 to 8, the sub CPU 102 receives the winning replies 1 to 9 from the plurality of push order navigation image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. The push order navigation image data corresponding to the push order to be determined is determined as data used for the current presentation. As a result, for example, when the winning number is 5, an image that suggests that the stop operation is performed in the order of “middle” → “left” → “right” (see FIG. 20) is displayed as a push order navigation image It is displayed on the display device 11.

  The player can win up replies 1 to 9 by performing a stop operation in the order of “middle” → “left” → “right” in accordance with the navigation. Thereby, the player can shift to ART (see step S964 in FIG. 67). After executing the process of step S862, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<Processing during ART>
The processing during ART performed in step S806 in FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the ART processing performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the special ART flag is set on (step S881). The special ART flag is a flag indicating that the special ART is in progress, and is set when the MB is internally won during the ART (see step S906 and step S909 in FIG. 64).

  When determining that the special ART flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 executes special ART processing (step S882). The special ART processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S882, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the special ART flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value of the ART game number counter (see step S846 in FIG. 61) (step S883). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the ART game number counter stored in the sub RAM 103 in the sub RAM 103 as a new value of the ART game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is 0 (step S884). When determining that the value of the ART game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART flag to OFF (step S885). This terminates ART. After executing the processing of step S885, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not 0, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the special ART warning sign flag is set to ON (step S886). The special ART warning sign flag is a flag indicating that it is a period in which an effect (special ART warning effect) suggesting that the special ART is activated is performed, and the winning number 49 (MB + F_middle stage cherry) and the winning number 52 ( MB + F_MB Lip), winning number 13 (F_MB Lip), winning number 53 (MB + F_Lip 2), or winning number 2 (F_Lip 2) is set when triggered as an internal winning combination (step) (See S891 and Step S894).

  If it is determined that the special ART warning flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 executes special ART warning signal processing (step S887). The special ART precursory process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S887, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the special ART warning sign flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 displays information indicating the internal winning combination type (winning number) included in the start command data (see step S755 in FIG. 58). Based on this, it is determined whether or not the winning number is 49 (MB + F_middle cherry) (step S888).

  When determining that the winning number is not 49 (MB + F_middle cherry), the sub CPU 102 determines based on the information indicating the type (winning number) of the internal winning combination included in the start command data (see step S755 in FIG. 58). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning number is any one of 52 (MB + F_MB Lip), 13 (F_MB Lip), 53 (MB + F_Lip 2), and 2 (F_Lip 2) (step S892).

  When determining that the winning number is not 52 (MB + F_MB Lip), 13 (F_MB Lip), 53 (MB + F_Lip 2), or 2 (F_Lip 2), the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning number is any one of 52 (MB + F_MB Lip), 13 (F_MB Lip), 53 (MB + F_Lip 2), and 2 (F_Lip 2), the sub CPU 102 determines the ART game. Add 10 games to the number (step S893). In this process, the sub CPU 102 causes the sub RAM 103 to store a value obtained by adding 10 to the value of the ART game number counter stored in the sub RAM 103 as a new value of the ART game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the special ART warning signal on (step S894). Thereby, the special ART precursor effect is executed from the next unit game (see FIG. 64). When the winning number is 52 (MB + F_MB Lip) or 53 (MB + F_Lip 2), since the MB is won internally, the special ART precursor effect performed in this case is the special ART precursor effect. On the other hand, when the winning number is 13 (F_MB Lip) or 2 (F_Lip 2), since the MB is not winning internally, the special ART precursor effect performed in this case is the Gasse Special ART precursor effect. Become.

  After executing the process of step S894, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S888 that the winning number is 49 (MB + F_middle cherry), the sub CPU 102 adds 10 games to the number of ART games (step S889). In this process, the sub CPU 102 causes the sub RAM 103 to store a value obtained by adding 10 to the value of the ART game number counter stored in the sub RAM 103 as a new value of the ART game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the special ART confirmation flag to ON (step S890). Then, the sub CPU 102 sets the special ART precursory flag to ON (step S891). Thereby, the special ART precursor effect is executed from the next unit game (see FIG. 64). If the winning number is 49 (MB + F_middle stage cherry), the MB has won internally, and if the special ART precursor flag is set ON in step S891, the special ART precursor flag is set in step S894. Unlike the case where is set to ON, the MB always wins internally, so the special ART precursor effect performed in this case is always the special ART precursor effect. Therefore, when the special ART confirmation flag (see step S890) is set to ON, it is confirmed that the special ART is activated (see step S906 in FIG. 64).

  After executing the process of step S891, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<Special ART Precursor Treatment>
The special ART precursory process performed in step S887 in FIG. 63 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the special ART precursory process performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, when any of the winning numbers 22 to 45 is determined as an internal winning combination, the sub CPU 102 executes a push order navigation effect for winning the middle bell 1 (step S901). In this process, when the winning number is any of 22 to 45, the sub CPU 102 pushes the middle bell 1 for winning from the plurality of push order navigation image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. Push order navigation image data corresponding to the order is determined as data used for the current presentation. As a result, for example, when the winning number is 22, an image that suggests that the stop operation (see FIGS. 20 and 21) for the middle reel 3C is performed as the first stop operation is displayed as the push order navigation image on the liquid crystal display device. 11 is displayed. Thereby, if a stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C as the first stop operation, the middle bell 1 wins.

  As described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21, when the winning number is 22 to 45, the stop operation for the left reel 3 </ b> L is performed between the MB flags as the first stop operation as compared with the non-MB flag. In this case, the winning combination is changed from the left special combination to the corner cherry. Therefore, when a stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation, the winning combination is different (a left special combination is won between non-MB flags, whereas a corner cherry is won between MB flags). Therefore, it is easily determined whether the MB is won internally. In the present embodiment, the push order for winning the middle bell 1 is notified, and the player is prompted to perform a stop operation (stop operation for reels other than the left reel 3L as the first stop operation) in the push order. Therefore, the situation where the presence / absence of the MB internal winning is determined from the difference in winning combination when the stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation is avoided.

  After executing the processing of step S901, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the special ART precursory game is the tenth game (the unit game currently being executed is the tenth unit after the special ART precursor effect is started). It is determined whether or not it is a game (step S902).

  When determining that the special ART precursory game is not the tenth game, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the special ART precursory game is the tenth game, the sub CPU 102 sets the special ART precursory flag to OFF (step S903). Thereby, the special ART precursor effect ends.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the special ART confirmation flag (see step S890 in FIG. 63) is set to ON (step S904).

  When determining that the special ART confirmation flag is set on, the sub CPU 102 sets the special ART confirmation flag to off (step S905).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets a special ART flag to ON (step S906). As a result, the special ART is activated (see step S882 in FIG. 63).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “10” in the special ART game number counter (step S907). The value of the special ART game number counter is a value that is subtracted every time a unit game is played in the special ART, and is stored in the sub-RAM 103. After executing the process of step S907, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S904 that the special ART confirmation flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the MB is won internally (step S908). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the winning number is 52 (MB + F_MB Lip) or 53 (MB + F_Lip 2). If it is determined that the MB is not internally won, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the MB is internally won, the sub CPU 102 sets the special ART flag to ON (step S909). As a result, the special ART is activated (see step S882 in FIG. 63).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “10” in the special ART game number counter (step S910). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

<Special ART processing>
With reference to FIG. 65, the special ART in-process performed in step S882 in FIG. 63 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing special ART processing performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the special ART game number counter (see step S907 and step S910 in FIG. 64) is 0 (step S921).

  When determining that the value of the special ART game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 determines the internal winning combination type (winning number) included in the start command data (see step S755 in FIG. 58). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning number is any of 16 to 21 (step S922).

  If it is determined that the winning number is any of 16 to 21, the sub CPU 102 executes a push order navigation effect for winning the irregular special combination (step S923). In this process, the sub CPU 102 selects the push order navigation image data corresponding to the push order for winning the irregular special role from the plurality of push order navigation image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. Decide on the data to be used. As a result, for example, when the winning number is 16, an image that suggests that the stop operation (see FIG. 21) for the right reel 3R is performed as the first stop operation is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 as a push order navigation image. Will be. When a stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R as the first stop operation, the irregular special combination 1, 2, or 5 wins when the stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing (if the irregular special combination is missed), MB1 wins (see FIG. 21).

  When MB1 wins, the special ART (between MB flags) ends (see step S968 in FIG. 67), and the added special zone (MB gaming state) is activated (see step S988 in FIG. 68). After executing the process of step S923, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S921 that the value of the special ART game number counter is not 0, or if it is determined in step S922 that the winning number is not 16 to 21, the sub CPU 102 determines start command data (FIG. 58). Whether or not the winning number is any one of 2, 50, 51, 49, and 9 to 11 is determined based on the information indicating the type (winning number) of the internal winning combination included in step S755). (Step S924).

  When it is determined that the winning number is any one of 2, 50, 51, 49, and 9 to 11, the sub CPU 102 determines the current probability change level and setting in the probability change promotion lottery table shown in FIGS. By referring to the probability variation promotion lottery table according to the value and performing lottery, the probability variation level of the transfer destination is determined based on the winning number (step S925).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 changes the probability variation level from the current probability variation level to the probability variation level determined as the transition probability variation level in step S925 (step S926).

  When it is determined in step S924 that the winning number is not any of 2, 50, 51, 49, and 9 to 11, or after executing the process of step S926, the sub CPU 102 determines that the winning number is 47, 22 to 22. 25, 30 to 33, 38 to 41, 26 to 29, 34 to 37, and 42 to 45, referring to the generation navigation determination table shown in FIG. 36, the winning number and the current probability variation level Based on, determine which push order to notify of the push order to win the corner cherry (strong cherry or weak cherry) and the push order to win the middle bell (push order bell) (Step S927).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a push order navigation effect for winning a winning combination determined to be notified of the push order in step S927 out of the square cherry (strong cherry or weak cherry) and the middle bell (push order bell). It executes (step S928). In this process, the sub CPU 102 selects a push order corresponding to the push order for winning the winning combination determined to be notified in step S927 from the plurality of push order navigation image data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. The forward navigation image data is determined as data used for the current presentation. As a result, for example, when the winning number is 26, when it is determined to notify the pushing order for winning the corner cherry (strong cherry), the stop operation (see FIG. 21) for the left reel 3L is performed as the first stop operation. An image suggesting to be displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 as a push order navigation image. When a stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation, a corner cherry (strong cherry) wins. As a result, the number of ART games is increased (see step S974 in FIG. 67 and step S1006 in FIG. 69).

  After executing the processing of step S928, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value of the special ART game number counter (step S929). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 causes the sub RAM 103 to store a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the special ART game number counter stored in the sub RAM 103 as a new special ART game number counter value.

  After executing the process of step S929, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine. In the special ART processing, the value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted (see step S883 in FIG. 63).

<Processing upon receipt of lock production determination command>
66, the process at the time of receiving the lock effect determination command performed in step S758 of FIG. 58 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a lock effect determination command reception process performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines that the rotation effect number determined in step S153 in FIG. 41 is the rotation effect based on the information indicating the rotation effect number included in the lock effect determination command data (see step S757 in FIG. 58). It is determined whether or not the number is 1 (step S941).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the rotation effect number determined in step S153 in FIG. 41 is the rotation effect number 1, the sub CPU 102 sets the red 7 flag to ON (step S942). When the red 7 flag is set to ON, the additional special zone (MB gaming state) that operates after the special ART (between MB flags) ends becomes the first special zone (MB gaming state) (FIG. 67). Step S972 and Step S974, and Step S1006 and Step S1008 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, if the red 7 flag is not set to ON, the additional special zone (MB gaming state) that operates after the special ART (between MB flags) ends is the second special zone (MB gaming state). (See step S974 in FIG. 67 and step S1006 in FIG. 69).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines the final added game number from among 100 games, 200 games, and 300 games by lottery (step S943). The final added game number is the number of ART games added to the final game in the added special zone (MB gaming state) (see step S1003 in FIG. 69). After executing the process of step S943, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S941 that the turning effect number determined in step S153 in FIG. 41 is not the turning effect number 1, the sub CPU 102 sets the final added game number to 0 games, 50 games, and 100 games. Among these, it determines by lottery (step S944). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

<Display command reception processing>
The display command reception process performed in step S766 in FIG. 58 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a display command reception process performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART preparing flag (see step S845 in FIG. 61 and step S986 in FIG. 68) is set to ON (step S961).

  When determining that the ART preparing flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of the raising replies 1 to 9 has been won (step S962). Since the display command data received in step S765 of FIG. 58 includes information indicating the display combination, the sub CPU 102 recognizes the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line by receiving the display command data. Can do.

  When it is determined that any of the raising replies 1 to 9 has won, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART preparing flag to OFF (step S963). Then, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART flag to ON (step S964). Thereby, the process shifts to ART (see step S806 in FIG. 59).

  If it is determined in step S961 that the ART ready flag is not set on, if it is determined in step S962 that none of the raising replies 1 to 9 has won, or after executing the process of step S964 The sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the special ART flag (see step S906 and step S909 in FIG. 64) is set to ON (step S965). When determining that the special ART flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the special ART flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines which of MB1 to MB3 based on the information indicating the display combination included in the display command data received in step S765 of FIG. It is determined whether or not a prize has been won (step S966).

  If it is determined that any of MB1 to MB3 has won, the sub CPU 102 clears the special ART game number counter (see step S907 and step S910 in FIG. 64) (step S967). Then, the sub CPU 102 sets the special ART flag to OFF (step S968), and sets the red 7 flag to OFF (step S969). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S966 that none of the MBs 1 to 3 has won, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the red 7 flag (see step S942 in FIG. 66) is set to ON (step S970). .

  If it is determined that the red 7 flag is set on, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the weak cherry has won based on the information indicating the display combination included in the display command data received in step S765 of FIG. Is determined (step S971).

  When determining that the weak cherry has won, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the value of the weak cherry stock counter (step S972). In this process, the sub CPU 102 causes the sub RAM 103 to store a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the weak cherry stock counter stored in the sub RAM 103 as a new weak cherry stock counter value. The value of the weak cherry stock counter indicates the number of times that the weak cherry won in the special ART. In the present embodiment, the number of times a weak cherry is won is counted on condition that the red 7 flag is set on.

  If it is determined in step S970 that the red 7 flag is not set to ON, if it is determined in step S971 that a weak cherry has not been won, or after executing the processing in step S972, the sub CPU 102 performs processing shown in FIG. Based on the information indicating the display combination included in the display command data received in step S765, it is determined whether or not the strong cherry has won (step S973).

  When determining that the strong cherry has won, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the value of the strong cherry stock counter (step S974). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 causes the sub RAM 103 to store a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the strong cherry stock counter stored in the sub RAM 103 as a new value of the strong cherry stock counter. The value of the strong cherry stock counter indicates the number of times the strong cherry won in the special ART. In the present embodiment, the number of times the strong cherry is won is counted regardless of whether the red 7 flag is set on.

  If it is determined in step S973 that the strong cherry has not won, or after executing the process of step S974, the sub CPU 102 displays the display combination included in the display command data received in step S765 of FIG. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the BAR control lip 1 has won (step S975).

  When determining that the BAR control lip 1 has won, the sub CPU 102 adds 10 to the value of the ART game number counter (see step S846 in FIG. 61 and step S987 in FIG. 68) (step S976). In this process, the sub CPU 102 causes the sub RAM 103 to store a value obtained by adding 10 to the value of the ART game number counter stored in the sub RAM 103 as a new value of the ART game number counter.

  When it is determined in step S975 that the BAR control lip 1 has not won, or after executing the process of step S976, the sub CPU 102 executes a penalty process (step S977). The penalty process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S977, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<MB processing>
The MB processing in step S804 in FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing in-MB processing performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (step S981). 58. Since the start command data received in step S755 of FIG. 58 includes information indicating the gaming state flag stored in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 31A) of the main RAM 95, the start command data is received. By doing so, the sub CPU 102 can recognize the current gaming state.

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the current gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, the sub CPU 102 executes an extra special zone processing (step S988). The processing in the additional specialization zone will be described later with reference to FIG. The number of ART games is increased by executing the processing in the additional specialization zone. After executing the processing of step S988, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S981 that the current gaming state is not the RT2 gaming state, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART lottery performed in step S831 in FIG. 60 has been won (step S982).

  If it is determined that the ART lottery performed in step S831 in FIG. 60 has not been won, the sub CPU 102 executes the challenge effect during the Gase MB based on the effect data set in step S834 in FIG. 60 (step S983). . Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the ART lottery performed in step S831 in FIG. 60 is won, the sub CPU 102 executes the present MB challenge effect based on the effect data set in step S833 in FIG. 60 (step S984). ).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the unit game performed in the MB gaming state is the eighth game (whether or not the unit game currently being performed is the final game in the MB gaming state) (step). S985). When determining that the unit game played in the MB gaming state is not the eighth game, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the unit game played in the MB gaming state is the eighth game, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART preparing flag to ON (step S986). In this way, when the challenge effect during the MB is performed, the process shifts to the final game in the MB gaming state during ART preparation. Then, the push order for winning the winning lips 1 to 9 is notified (see step S862 in FIG. 62), and when the raising lips 1 to 9 are winning, the process proceeds to ART (step S964 in FIG. 67). reference).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “50” in the ART game number counter (step S987). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

<Additional special zone processing>
With reference to FIG. 69, the process of adding specialization zone performed in step S988 of FIG. 68 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing processing in the additional specialization zone performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the unit game played in the MB gaming state is the eighth game (whether or not the unit game currently being played is the final game in the MB gaming state) (step S1001). ).

  If it is determined that the unit game played in the MB gaming state is the eighth game, the sub CPU 102 reports the number of final added games (step S1002). In this process, the sub CPU 102 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the final added game number determined in step S943 or step S944 in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the final added game number to the value of the ART game number counter (see step S846 in FIG. 61 and step S987 in FIG. 68) (step S1003). In this process, the sub CPU 102 adds a value obtained by adding the final added game number determined in step S943 or step S944 of FIG. 66 to the value of the ART game number counter stored in the sub RAM 103, and creates a new ART game number counter. Is stored in the sub RAM 103 as a value of. After executing the processing of step S1003, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S1001 that the unit game performed in the MB gaming state is not the eighth game, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the unit game performed in the MB gaming state is the first game (step S1004). ). When determining that the unit game played in the MB gaming state is not the first game, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the unit game played in the MB gaming state is the first game, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the strong cherry stock counter (see step S974 in FIG. 67) is zero ( Step S1005).

  When determining that the value of the strong cherry stock counter is not 0, the sub CPU 102 decrements the value of the strong cherry stock counter by 1 and adds the number of ART games (step S1006). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 stores a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the strong cherry stock counter stored in the sub RAM 103 in the sub RAM 103 as a new value of the strong cherry stock counter. In addition, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games by lottery from among 10 games, 30 games, and 50 games. Then, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the ART game number counter (see step S846 in FIG. 61 and step S987 in FIG. 68) plus the number of added games determined by lottery to the value of the new ART game number counter. Is stored in the sub-RAM 103.

  After executing the process of step S1006, the sub CPU returns the process to step S1005. As a result, the number of ART games is increased in step S1006 by the number corresponding to the value of the strong cherry stock counter (the number of times the strong cherry is won in the special ART).

  If it is determined in step S1005 that the value of the strong cherry stock counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the weak cherry stock counter (see step S972 in FIG. 67) is 0 (step S1007). .

  When determining that the value of the weak cherry stock counter is not 0, the sub CPU 102 decrements the value of the weak cherry stock counter by 1 and adds the number of ART games (step S1008). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 stores a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the weak cherry stock counter stored in the sub RAM 103 in the sub RAM 103 as a new weak cherry stock counter value. Further, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of additional games by lottery from among 5 games, 10 games, and 20 games. Then, the sub CPU 102 adds the value of the ART game number counter (see step S846 in FIG. 61 and step S987 in FIG. 68) plus the number of added games determined by lottery to the value of the new ART game number counter. Is stored in the sub-RAM 103.

  After executing the process of step S1008, the sub CPU 102 returns the process to step S1007. As a result, the number of ART games is increased by the number corresponding to the value of the weak cherry stock counter (the number of times the weak cherry is won in the special ART). The expected number of ART games to be added based on a weak cherry winning once is lower than the expected number of ART games to be added based on a strong cherry winning once.

  If it is determined in step S1007 that the value of the weak cherry stock counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 notifies the total number of added games (step S1009). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the total value of the number of ART games added in step S1006 and the number of ART games added in step S1008. After executing the processing of step S1009, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<Penalty processing>
The penalty process performed in step S977 in FIG. 67 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing penalty processing performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current gaming state is between MB flags (step S1021). Since the start command data received in step S755 of FIG. 58 includes information stored in the carryover combination storage area (see FIG. 31B) of the main RAM 95, the sub CPU 102 receives the start command data. Can recognize the current gaming state. When determining that the current gaming state is not between the MB flags, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the current gaming state is between MB flags, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a push order navigation effect (see winning numbers 22 to 45 in FIG. 21) for winning the middle bell has been executed. Judgment is made (step S1022). If the sub CPU 102 determines that the push order navigation effect for winning the middle bell has been executed, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the push order navigation effect for winning the middle bell has not been executed, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the middle bell has won (step S1023). Since the display command data received in step S765 of FIG. 58 includes information indicating the display combination, the sub CPU 102 recognizes the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line by receiving the display command data. Can do. If it is determined that the middle bell has not won, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the middle bell has won a prize, the sub CPU 102 generates a penalty (step S1024). In this process, the sub CPU 102 sets the penalty flag to ON and sets the number of penalty game counters to a predetermined number (10). The penalty flag is a flag indicating that a penalty is occurring. Although not shown, if the penalty flag is set to ON, the push order navigation effect is not executed in ART. The number of penalty game counters indicates the remaining number of unit games (penalty games) for which the push order navigation effect is not executed in ART, and is stored in the sub RAM 103. The number of penalty game counters is decremented each time a unit game is played, and when the number of penalty game counters becomes 0, the penalty flag is set off. After executing the processing of step S1024, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  In ART, a push order navigation effect (see FIG. 20) for winning the middle bell is usually executed, and the player performs a stop operation in accordance with the navigation and wins the other bell by winning the middle bell. More medals can be obtained (10) than the case (see FIG. 15). However, in the penalty game, the push order navigation effect is not executed, so that it becomes difficult for the player to win the middle bell, and the player cannot receive the payout of 10 medals that can be originally acquired. End up.

  As explained in FIG. 4, in the special ART (between MB flags), by winning the corner cherry according to the navigation, the benefit of adding the number of ART games is not enjoyed, but the middle bell is awarded without following the navigation. Therefore, there is a possibility that a player who wants to acquire many (10) medals appears. In the present embodiment, in this manner, the player who has won 10 medals by winning the middle bell without following the navigation until the used amount (10) of medals is used in ART. There is a penalty for not navigating.

<Reel stop command reception processing>
The reel stop command reception process performed in step S764 in FIG. 58 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a reel stop command reception process performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART flag (see step S964 in FIG. 67) is set to ON (step S1041).

  When determining that the ART flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 executes a penalty sound setting process (step S1042). The penalty sound setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When it is determined in step S1041 that the ART flag is not set to ON, or after executing the process of step S1042, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<Penalty sound setting processing>
The penalty sound setting process performed in step S1042 of FIG. 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a penalty sound setting process performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a push order navigation effect has been executed (step S1061).

  If it is determined that the push order navigation effect is not executed, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an irregular push (stop operation in a different order from “left” → “middle” → “right”) has been performed. (Step S1062). 58. Since the reel stop command data received in step S763 in FIG. 58 includes information indicating the type of the stop reel, the sub CPU 102 receives the reel stop command data, so that the sub CPU 102 operates the stop button in the operating order (pushing order). Can be recognized.

  If it is determined that the irregular pressing has been performed, the sub CPU 102 generates a penalty sound (step S1063). In this process, the sub CPU 102 generates a sound from the speaker indicating that the irregular pressing is prohibited. Thereby, it can suppress that a player performs irregular pushing.

  If it is determined in step S1061 that the push order navigation effect has been executed, if it is determined in step S1062 that no irregular push has been performed, or after executing the process of step S1063, the sub CPU 102 ignores the push order navigation. It is determined whether or not it has been done (step S1064). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the stop button has been operated in a pressing order different from the pressing order notified by the pressing order navigation effect (step S1064).

  If it is determined that the push order navigation is ignored, the sub CPU 102 generates a penalty sound (step S1065). In this process, the sub CPU 102 generates a sound from the speaker that suggests that ignoring the push order navigation is prohibited. Thereby, it can suppress that a player ignores pushing order navigation.

  When it is determined in step S1064 that the push order navigation is not ignored, or after executing the process of step S1065, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to FIGS.

  According to the above-described embodiment, the normal gaming state and the ART are provided as the gaming state (sub). ART is an AT gaming state and is an RT2 gaming state.

  The AT gaming state is a state in which the push order for stopping the internal winning combination (stop button stop order) is notified. In the AT gaming state, when a predetermined push order (an internal winning combination where a winning is achieved by pressing the stop button in an appropriate order, see FIG. 20 and FIG. 21) is won internally When the pressing order to be notified is notified, the player can win the pressing order by operating the stop button according to the notified pressing order.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the AT gaming state, when the push order is determined as the internal winning combination, an image (push order navigation image) for notifying the push order necessary for winning the push order is displayed. It has been described as being displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. However, the notification of the pressing order in the AT gaming state is not limited to notification by image, and notification may be performed using sound or light.

  Also, what is notified in the AT gaming state is not limited to the order of pressing required to win the pressing order. In the AT gaming state, any information necessary for winning a predetermined combination may be notified. For example, when a plurality of internal winning combinations are set as push winning combinations and the appropriate order is predetermined for each internal winning combination, the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery may be notified. . If the player who knows the appropriate order for each internal winning combination can know the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery, the player can perform the stop operation in the appropriate order. Further, a winning may be established when a stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing, and the appropriate timing may be notified in the AT gaming state.

  According to the above-described embodiment, the first route and the second route are provided as routes for changing the gaming state (sub) from the normal gaming state to the ART. The first route is a route that shifts from the normal gaming state to ART via the precursor effect, and the second route is a route that shifts from the normal gaming state to ART via the MB medium challenge effect.

  In the present invention, the content of the precursor effect related to the first route is not particularly limited. For example, the color of the pedestal light provided under the reel may indicate whether or not the ART lottery has been won. Further, a predetermined mission may be generated, and when the mission is cleared, it may be shifted to ART. For example, when a designated small role has won a predetermined number of times, it is possible to shift to ART. In this case, for example, the mission of “Replay or win a bell within 10 games”, the mission of “Replay within 8 games” and the mission of “Bell within 8 games” are staged. It is also possible to shift to the next mission by clearing one mission, and to shift to ART when all missions are cleared. The content of the mission may be notified to the player by displaying it on the liquid crystal display device. Moreover, it is good also as making it transfer to ART, when a predetermined symbol (red 7 symbol) is prepared in a predetermined pressing order (reverse pressing). Further, the player may be prompted to repeatedly hit the BET button, and when an accessory placed on the upper part of the liquid crystal display device falls, the player may be shifted to ART.

  In the present invention, the content of the mid-MB challenge effect related to the second route is not particularly limited. For example, in accordance with the operation of the BET button, it is possible to perform an effect of attacking with a character toward the character (enemy) displayed on the liquid crystal display device. Also, in the final game in the MB gaming state, after the end of the MB challenge effect (see step S984 in FIG. 68), when a predetermined lottery is performed and the lottery is won (in step S987 in FIG. 68) The ART game number may be added (separately from the provision of the ART game number). In this case, it may be notified that the number of ART games has been added by performing a predetermined effect (for example, an effect that generates a freeze). The effect of generating freeze is an effect in which the time during which the operation of the stop button is disabled after the start lever is operated becomes longer than usual.

  According to the above-described embodiment, in the ART, when the MB is won internally, the special ART is activated. The special ART is a state for increasing (adding) the number of ART games, and the player plays a game while expecting the special ART to operate during the ART (MB wins internally). .

  In the above-described embodiment, when the MB is internally won in ART, the special ART is not activated immediately, but the special ART precursor effect is executed for a predetermined period (see FIGS. 63 and 64). The special ART precursor effect is an effect suggesting that the special ART is activated.

  Here, when the MB is internally won in ART, chance replay may be internally won (MB and chance replay are duplicated simultaneously) (internal winning number 52 in FIG. 16 (a), and , See the small role / replay data pointer 13 in FIG. 17). In this case, the chance replay wins by notifying the pressing order. In other words, if the chance replay wins, there is a possibility that the MB is winning internally, that is, a special ART may be activated. Therefore, the player who has visually recognized that the combination of symbols corresponding to the chance replay (see FIG. 14) has been stopped and displayed along the winning determination line is expected to expect the special ART to operate. Can do.

  On the other hand, there is a case where the chance replay is won internally but the MB is not internally won (see the internal winning number 13 in FIG. 16A and the small role / replay data pointer 13 in FIG. 17). Also in this case, the chance replay wins (see FIG. 20), but the special ART does not operate because the MB is not internally won. That is, just because the chance replay wins does not mean that the MB is winning internally (special ART is activated).

  Then, not only when the MB and the chance replay are won in duplicate, but also when only the chance replay is an internal win among the MB and the chance replay, the special ART precursor effect is executed. When the MB and the chance replay are overlapped, the special ART is activated after the special ART precursor effect, and the special ART precursor effect performed in this case is a so-called present precursor effect. On the other hand, when only the chance replay of the MB and the chance replay wins internally, the special ART does not operate, and the special ART precursor effect performed in this case is a so-called gasse precursor effect.

  Here, in the above-described embodiment, the first specific combination (middle bell), the second specific combination (horn cherry), and the third specific combination in the non-carrying state during ART (a state that is not between the MB flags). When the (left special combination) is won internally (see the internal winning numbers 22 to 45 in FIG. 16A and the small role / replay data pointers 22 to 45 in FIGS. 17 and 18), the stop button is pressed. The relationship between the order and the winning combination is as follows.

  In other words, the first specific combination (middle bell) can win by performing the first specific stop operation. The first specific stop operation is a stop operation in the order of “middle” → “left” → “right” or “middle” → “right” → “left” when the winning number is 22 to 29, When the winning number is 30 to 37, the stop operation is in the order of “Right” → “Left” → “Middle”. When the winning number is 38 to 45, “Right” → “Middle” → “Left” ”In the order of“ ”(see FIG. 20).

  The third specific combination (left special combination) can win a prize by performing the second specific stop operation. The second specific stop operation is a stop operation in the order of “left” → “middle” → “right” or “left” → “right” → “middle” (see FIG. 20).

  On the other hand, in the carryover state during ART (a state between the ART and the MB flag), the first specific combination (middle bell), the second specific combination (horn cherry), and the third specific combination (left special combination) Is internal winning (see the internal winning numbers 22 to 45 in FIG. 16A and the small combination / replay data pointers 22 to 45 in FIG. 17), the relationship between the pressing order of the stop button and the winning combination is as follows: become that way.

  In other words, the first specific combination (middle bell) can win by performing the first specific stop operation. The first specific stop operation is a stop operation in the order of “middle” → “left” → “right” or “middle” → “right” → “left” when the winning number is 22 to 29, When the winning number is 30 to 37, the stop operation is in the order of “Right” → “Left” → “Middle”. When the winning number is 38 to 45, “Right” → “Middle” → “Left” Is a stop operation in the order of "" (see FIG. 21). The relationship between the pushing order and the winning combination is the same as in the non-carry-over state during ART (between non-MB flags).

  By performing the second specific stop operation, the second specific combination (horn cherry) can win. The second specific stop operation is a stop operation in the order of “left” → “middle” → “right” or “left” → “right” → “middle” (see FIG. 21). The relationship between the pushing order and the winning combination is different from that in the non-carry-over state during ART (between non-MB flags).

  As described above, the second specific stop operation is performed in the non-carry-on state during ART (between non-MB flags) and the carry-over state during ART (between MB flags) (that is, depending on whether or not the MB is internally winning). The winning combination is different when the left reel is operated as the first stop operation. And if it is an experienced player who is familiar with the gaming machine, there is a possibility that this player knows this, and such a player can perform the second specific stop operation (the stop for the left reel as the first stop operation). Is the MB won by confirming which of the 2nd specified combination (horn cherry) and the 3rd specified combination (left special combination) wins? It is possible to easily infer whether or not (that is, whether or not a special ART is activated). In this case, when only the chance replay of the MB and the chance replay wins internally, the significance that the special ART precursor effect (that is, the gaze effect) is executed is lost.

  In this regard, in the above-described embodiment, the first specific combination (middle bell), the second specific combination (horn cherry), and the third specific combination (left special combination) are performed during the period in which the special ART precursor effect is being executed. When the internal winning is made, the pressing order related to the first specific stop operation is notified (see step S901 in FIG. 64). As described above, when the first specific stop operation is performed, whether the carryover state during ART (between non-MB flags) or the carryover state during ART (between MB flags) (that is, MB) Regardless of whether or not is winning internally), the first specific combination (middle bell) wins. Therefore, through the notification, the player is prompted to perform the first specific stop operation (blocking the second specific stop operation), and even a skilled player who is familiar with the gaming machine, It is possible to create a situation where it is difficult to infer whether the MB is winning internally (that is, whether the special ART is activated).

  As described above, when the first specific combination (middle bell), the second specific combination (horn cherry), and the third specific combination (left special combination) are won internally during the period in which the special ART precursor effect is being executed. In view of the significance that the push order related to the first specific stop operation is notified, it is desirable that the special ART precursor effect and the Gasse special ART precursor effect are the same effect. In other words, during the period in which the special ART precursor effect is being executed, it is the same from the effect data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate when the MB is won internally and when the MB is not internally won. It is desirable that the production data is set.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the carryover state during ART (between MB flags), the first specific combination (middle bell) and the second specific combination (corner) are compared with the non-carry-over state during ART (between non-MB flags). Cherry) and the third specific combination (left special combination) are internally won (see internal winning numbers 22 to 45 in FIG. 16A and the small combination / replay data pointers 22 to 45 in FIG. 17). When the second specific stop operation is performed (when the stop operation for the left reel is performed as the first stop operation), the winning combination is changed from the third specific combination (left special combination) to the second specific combination (corner). It was explained that it was changed to (Cherry). However, in the present invention, when the first specific combination, the second specific combination, and the third specific combination are internally won during the non-carry-over state during the ART, and the second specific stop operation is performed, a prize is awarded. The combination may be the first specific combination instead of the third specific combination. In this case, the third specific combination may be configured not to overlap with the first specific combination and the second specific combination.

  According to the above-described embodiment, the first specific combination (middle bell) and the second specific combination (horn cherry) are determined as the internal winning combination in the carry-over state during ART (the state between the ART and the MB flag). When the first specific stop operation is performed, the first specific combination (middle bell) wins, and when the second specific stop operation is performed, the second specific combination (horn cherry) wins. Then, the number of ART games increases based on the fact that the second specific combination (horn cherry) has won in the carry-over state during ART (special ART).

  Here, according to the above-described embodiment, when the first specific combination (middle bell) and the second specific combination (horn cherry) are determined as the internal winning combination in the carry-over state during ART (special ART), The push order related to the first specific stop operation or the push order related to the second specific stop operation is notified. When the pressing order related to the second specific stop operation is notified, the player can win the second specific combination (horn cherry) by performing the second specific stop operation according to the pressing order. Thereby, it is possible to create a situation where the player can easily enjoy the benefit of increasing the number of ART games.

  Further, according to the above-described embodiment, when a special combination (MB) is determined as an internal winning combination in ART, the replay winning probability does not fluctuate, and the replay high probability gaming state (RT2 gaming state) is maintained. Is done. That is, in generating the carry-over state during ART (special ART), the RT state is not changed. According to the above-described embodiment, instead of changing the RT state, the number of ART games is increased by notifying the pressing order related to the second specific stop operation and increasing the winning probability of the second specific combination (corner cherry). The player benefits from the increase. Therefore, the management of the game state can be simplified, and it is possible to prevent the data area in the main control circuit from being compressed when generating a state for increasing the number of ART games.

  Further, according to the above-described embodiment, the first specific combination (middle bell), the second specific combination (horn cherry), and the third specific combination (left special combination) in the ART non-carry-over state (between non-MB flags). Is determined as an internal winning combination, the first specific combination (middle bell) wins when the first specific stop operation is performed, and the third specific combination (left special combination) when the second specific stop operation is performed. Won the prize. On the other hand, when the first specific combination (middle bell), the second specific combination (corner cherry), and the third specific combination (left special combination) are determined as the internal winning combination in the carry-over state during the ART (between MB flags) When the first specific stop operation is performed, the first specific combination (middle bell) wins, and when the second specific stop operation is performed, the second specific combination (horn cherry) wins.

  That is, the stop control differs between the ART non-carry-over state (between non-MB flags) and the ART carry-over state (between MB flags), and the second specific stop operation in the ART non-carry-over state (between non-MB flags) The second specific combination (horn cherry) does not win even if the second specific combination (horn cherry) is won in the carry-over state during the ART (between MB flags) when the second specific stop operation is performed. In this way, the second specific combination (horn cherry) that triggers an increase in the number of ART games shifts from the non-carry-on state during ART (between non-MB flags) to the carry-over state during ART (between MB flags) and stops. Since it becomes possible to win a prize for the first time by changing the control, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the second specific combination (horn cherry).

  In addition, according to the above-described embodiment, the higher the probability variation level, the higher the probability that it is determined to notify the pressing order related to the second specific stop operation. Therefore, the higher the probability variation level, the easier it is for the second specific combination (horn cherry) to win, and as a result, the number of ART games tends to increase. In this way, by providing a mode (level) with different probabilities determined to notify the pressing order related to the second specific stop operation, it is possible to have variations in the ease of increasing the number of ART games, Thereby, the interest of a game can be improved. Then, the player can play a game while expecting to move to a higher probability level.

  In the above-described embodiment, the number of ART games is determined based on the number of times that the second specific combination (horn cherry) wins in the special ART (between MB flags) after waiting for the additional special zone (MB gaming state) to operate. Has been described as being added (added) (see step S1006 and step S1008 in FIG. 69). However, in the present invention, the timing at which the number of ART games is added is not particularly limited, and when the second specific combination wins in the special ART, the number of ART games may be added during the special ART. For example, the number of ART games may be immediately increased as in the case where the second specific combination is won in the special ART or the BAR control lip 1 is won (see step S976 in FIG. 67).

  In the present invention, other modes may be adopted as appropriate with respect to the addition of the number of ART games. For example, the number of added games calculated based on the winning of the second specific combination in the special ART (for example, the total value of the number of ART games added in step S1006 in FIG. 69 and the number of ART games added in step S1008). If the number of games is less than the predetermined number of games, the number of games that are insufficient with respect to the predetermined number of games may be added. That is, a minimum value (the minimum guaranteed number of games) of the ART games to be added based on the winning of the second specific combination may be set. In this case, the minimum guaranteed number of games (for example, 50 games) added in the first additional specialization zone is made larger than the minimum guaranteed number of games (for example, 30 games) added in the second additional specialization zone. Also good.

  In the embodiment described above, in the special ART (between MB flags), when the push order for winning the corner cherry (strong cherry or weak cherry) is not notified, the middle bell (push order bell) is won. It has been described that the pressing order is notified (see FIG. 36). That is, it is assumed that one of the pushing order for winning the corner cherry (strong cherry or weak cherry) and the pushing order for winning the middle bell (push order bell) are always notified. explained. However, in the present invention, if it is not determined to notify stop operation information (for example, a pressing order for winning a corner cherry) necessary for performing the second specific stop operation, in order to win another combination It is good also as not alert | reporting stop operation information required for this. The generation navigation determination table in FIG. 36 is used as a method for determining whether or not to notify stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation (for example, a pressing order for winning a corner cherry). It is not limited to the existing method, and an arbitrary lottery method can be adopted.

  According to the above-described embodiment, in the carry-over state during ART (special ART), when the push order navigation effect is executed and the navigation is ignored (when the player does not follow the navigation), Penalties are imposed on players. On the other hand, when such a stop operation is performed in a non-carrying state during ART (normal ART that is not a special ART), no penalty is imposed, but a sound suggesting that a penalty is generated is output.

  In the non-carrying state during ART (ordinary ART that is not a special ART), such an output (warning) causes a carry-over state during ART (that is, if the player does not follow the navigation, a penalty is actually applied). Prior to the transition to a state in which the player is imposed, the player can be alerted in advance to perform a stop operation according to the navigation when the navigation is performed. Further, when navigation is performed, the player can be conditioned to follow the navigation. As a result, in the carry-over state during ART (special ART), it is possible to reduce the possibility of the player performing a stop operation different from the notified content due to an operation error or the like, and a penalty is imposed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from being reduced.

  Further, according to the above-described embodiment, as described above, in the carry-over state during ART (special ART), the first specific combination (middle bell) and the second specific combination (horn cherry) are determined as the internal winning combination. When the pressing order related to the second specific stop operation is notified, the second specific combination (corner cherry) wins by performing the second specific stop operation according to the notification. This increases the number of ART games. On the other hand, according to the above-described embodiment, when the first specific combination (middle bell) wins, more medals are paid out than when the second specific combination (horn cherry) wins.

  In such a situation, the second specific stop (corner cherry) is won by performing the second specific stop operation according to the notification, and the benefit of the increase in the number of ART games is not received, but the first specific stop is not performed according to the notification. There is a possibility that a player who wins the first specific combination (middle bell) by operating and wins many medals may appear. Such a stop operation is not recommended by gaming machine manufacturers, and as a gaming machine manufacturer, it is desirable to avoid a situation in which the ball payout rate increases due to such a stopping operation. By the way.

  In this regard, according to the above-described embodiment, when the pressing order related to the second specific stop operation is notified, when the first specific stop operation is performed instead of the second specific stop operation (first specific combination (middle stage) When a stop operation is performed according to the pressing order for winning the bell), a penalty is imposed on the player. Further, as described above, when a stop operation different from the notified content is performed, a warning with a penalty sound is given, so the player can be prompted to perform the stop operation according to the notification. Thus, by not following the notification, it is possible to prevent the player from acquiring many medals and capturing the gaming machine.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that a penalty of not performing navigation in ART is given to a player who has won 10 medals by winning the middle bell without following navigation (see FIG. 70). The content of the disadvantage in the present invention is not particularly limited, and thus a configuration for preventing control that is advantageous to the player can be appropriately employed. For example, the number of ART games may not be increased even if the second specific combination (for example, a corner cherry) wins in the carry-over state during ART (special ART). Specifically, when the penalty flag is set to ON, processing related to the addition of the number of ART games (for example, processing in steps S972 and S974 in FIG. 67, steps S1003 and S1006 in FIG. 69, steps) The processing of S1008 and the like may not be executed. Further, it may be configured not to execute the processing related to the transition to ART (for example, the processing in step S822, step S831 in FIG. 60, etc.).

  In the above-described embodiment, when the push order navigation is ignored, a sound (penalty sound) suggesting that ignoring the push order navigation is prohibited is described as being generated from the speaker (FIG. 72). reference). In the present invention, the output suggesting that a disadvantage occurs is not limited to sound (output using a speaker), but is an image (output using a liquid crystal display device) or light (output using an LED). It may be due to. Moreover, you may perform the said suggestion by vibrating a stop button.

  Hereinafter, modified examples will be described.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that the ART lottery related to the first route is performed when any of the winning numbers 12, 47, 48, and 51 is determined as the internal winning combination (FIG. 60). Step S821). In addition, it has been described that the ART lottery related to the second route is performed when any of the winning numbers 49, 52, and 53 is determined as the internal winning combination (see step S830 in FIG. 60). However, in the present invention, the trigger for performing the ART lottery according to the first route and the trigger for performing the ART lottery according to the second route are not particularly limited. For example, ART lottery may be performed in each unit game regardless of the determined type of internal winning combination. In addition, when a predetermined combination (for example, weak cherry, strong cherry, watermelon, etc.) different from the above-described embodiment is won internally, or when the combination becomes a temper, but the winning effect or MB It is good also as making it shift to medium challenge production.

  Further, the route in which the gaming state (sub) shifts from the normal gaming state to the ART is not limited to the first route and the second route described above. For example, when the state that does not shift to ART continues for a predetermined number (for example, 1000) of unit games (for example, when the number of unit games performed after the end of the previous ART has reached the number of ceiling games) ) ART lottery may be performed. In this case, for example, in the mini liquid crystal display device provided beside the reel, when the unit game is played once, a state in which the character climbs the building one floor at a time is displayed, and the character reaches the rooftop. ART lottery may be performed. While the character climbs the building, a dialogue suggesting the number of remaining games until the character reaches the rooftop may be output at a predetermined timing. In addition, when shifting to ART triggered by ART lottery performed when the character reaches the rooftop, the number of ART games is increased compared to the case of shifting to ART by the first route and the second route described above. Also good.

  In the present invention, the following first addition zone and second addition zone may be provided as a state (zone) in which the number of ART games is added.

  In the first extra zone, a predetermined number of unit games (for example, ten times) are set as one set, and a predetermined number of points (for example, 50 points) are acquired during one set, thereby increasing the number of ART games. Done. For example, the number of points is set for each winning combination, and when a certain winning combination is won in one unit game, the set number of points can be obtained for the winning combination. For example, if 10 points for a bell, 30 points for a watermelon, and 20 points for a replay are set, if a bell, watermelon, and replay are won once in one set Since a total of 60 points (50 points or more) can be obtained, the number of ART games is added.

  If a predetermined number of points cannot be obtained in one set, the first extra zone ends at that time. On the other hand, if a predetermined number of points can be obtained in one set, the number of ART games is added at the end of the one set, and another set is then generated. As a result, the first additional zone continues. If a predetermined number of points can be obtained in the other set, the number of ART games is further increased at the end of the set. Thereafter, another set is generated and the first additional zone continues. As a result, as long as a predetermined number of points are continuously acquired, the set is continued one after another, and the number of ART games is added at the end of each set ("Set + number of ART games added" continues). When a predetermined number or more points are acquired during one set, the points exceeding the predetermined number are carried over to the next set. In the above example, 60 points are acquired during one set, and the excess 10 points are carried over to the next set.

  In addition, a plurality of modes having different probabilities that a predetermined number of points can be obtained in one set are provided. The predetermined number (number of points to be acquired during one set) and the number of points that can be acquired when each winning combination is determined by lottery based on the mode. The higher the probability that a predetermined number of points can be earned during one set, the easier it is to determine a smaller value as the predetermined number (the number of points to be earned during one set). A large value is easily determined as the number of points that can be obtained. For this reason, the higher the probability, the higher the continuation rate of the first additional zone. When the first addition zone starts, one mode is determined from among a plurality of modes.

  The second extra zone continues while a unit game is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 7 times). In the second add-on zone, the number of ART games is always added in each unit game. The number of added games varies depending on the winning combination in the second added zone. Based on the winning combination during the ART, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the second extra zone, and when the lottery is won, the lottery moves to the second extra zone. When a predetermined combination (for example, bell or replay) is won internally in the second extra zone, a chance to shift to a special ART (special ART opportunity) occurs in the unit game next to the unit game in which the predetermined combination is won internally If successful, the program shifts to a special ART. The special ART chance is a one-game challenge game, and the probability of whether or not to shift to the special ART varies depending on the winning combination in the game.

  In the special ART that is transferred via the second extra zone, the number of ART games is increased when a rare combination (for example, a strong cherry or a strong watermelon) wins. On the other hand, a reel lock effect is performed in the special ART. In the reel lock effect, the player seems to have stopped the reel, but the reel is not actually stopped. Therefore, there is a possibility that a plurality of pseudo games may be performed by performing the reel lock effect. In such a pseudo game, the number of ART games is added.

  In the present invention, after the ART is finished, a challenge game for continuing the ART may be generated. The challenge game is composed of a predetermined number of unit games (for example, two times), and the ART continues when a predetermined combination (for example, a bell) wins in all the predetermined number of unit games. When it fails to win a predetermined combination, the challenge game ends. When a rare combination (for example, strong cherry or strong watermelon) or a specific combination wins, the continuation of ART is decided at that time without waiting for a predetermined number of unit games to be played.

  The first embodiment has described the pachislot according to the inventions (I-1) to (I-8) below.

(I-1) Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and reel display window 4) capable of performing symbol variation display and stop display;
Start command means (for example, start lever 23 and start switch 79) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, an internal lottery means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, the main CPU 93 for executing the processing of FIG. 40);
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, variation control means (for example, processing in step S196 in FIG. 43 and step S465 in FIG. 49) that performs symbol variation display on the symbol display means. A main CPU 93) that executes the process of
Stop command means (for example, stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R and a stop switch) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
When a predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery means, and the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a predetermined stop operation, a stop mode corresponding to the predetermined internal winning combination Then, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 93 for executing the process of FIG. 45 and the process of step S465 of FIG. 49) for stopping and displaying the symbols on which the fluctuation display is performed by the fluctuation control means,
Notification data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) capable of storing notification data for notifying stop operation information necessary for performing the predetermined stop operation;
A notification output means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) capable of performing output for notification based on the notification data;
Based on the notification data stored in the notification data storage means, notification means for notifying the stop operation information by the output means for notification (for example, the sub CPU 102 that executes the push order navigation effect in ART);
From the replay low-probability gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay that triggers the operation of the replay that is a unit game that is performed without inserting the game medium when the predetermined condition is satisfied, is the first predetermined probability. The game state management means (for example, the main CPU 93 that executes the process of step S358 of FIG. 46, and FIG. 31) that shifts to the replay high-probability gaming state in which the winning probability is a second predetermined probability that is higher than the first predetermined probability. (A) a main RAM 95 for storing a game state flag storage area),
The stop control means includes
A special combination (for example, MB) is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal lottery unit in the ART gaming state in which the notification is performed by the notification unit and the ART in the replay high probability gaming state (for example, RT2 gaming state). Thereafter, in the carry-over state during the ART (for example, between MB flags) until the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in a stop mode corresponding to the special role, the internal lottery means causes the first specific role (for example, If the middle bell), the second specific combination (for example, horn cherry) and the third specific combination (for example, the left special combination) are determined as internal winning combinations,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a first specific stop operation, the variation control means is in a stop mode corresponding to the first specific combination (for example, a middle bell). While the symbols that have been displayed in a variable display are stopped,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a second specific stop operation, the variation control means is in a stop mode corresponding to the second specific combination (for example, a corner cherry). To stop and display the symbols for which the variable display is performed,
In the ART, a state other than the ART carryover state, which is not in the ART carryover state (for example, between non-MB flags), the internal lottery means and the first specific combination (for example, the middle bell) and the second When a specific combination (for example, a corner cherry) and the third specific combination (for example, a left special combination) are determined as internal winning combinations,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to the first specific stop operation, the variation control is performed in a stop mode corresponding to the first specific combination (for example, a middle bell). While the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to the second specific stop operation, the variation is performed in a stop mode corresponding to the third specific combination (for example, the left special combination). Stop and display the symbols that are displayed by the control means.
The notification means (for example, the sub CPU 102 that executes the process of step S928 in FIG. 65)
In the ART carry-over state (for example, special ART), the first specific combination (for example, middle bell), the second specific combination (for example, horn cherry), and the third specific combination (for example, special ART) Left special combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, stop operation information necessary for performing the first specific stop operation (for example, the pressing order for winning the middle bell), and the second specific stop Informing stop operation information of any one of stop operation information necessary for performing an operation (for example, a pressing order for winning a corner cherry),
The gaming machine further includes:
In the ART carry-over state (for example, special ART), the first specific combination (for example, middle bell), the second specific combination (for example, horn cherry), and the third specific combination (for example, special ART) Left special combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, based on the current mode (for example, one of probability variation levels 1 to 4), as the stop operation information notified by the notification means, 1 Stop operation information necessary for performing a specific stop operation (for example, a pressing order for winning the middle bell) and stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation (for example, winning a corner cherry) Notification information determination means (for example, the sub CPU 102 that executes the process of step S927 in FIG. 65),
From a low mode in which the probability that the stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation is determined by the notification information determination unit is relatively low when a specific condition is satisfied, the notification information determination unit A mode transition means for shifting to a high mode in which the probability that stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation is determined is higher than the low mode (for example, a sub that executes the process of step S926 in FIG. 65) CPU 102),
The notification information determination means includes
When the current mode is the high mode, the second specific stop operation is performed as the stop operation information notified by the notification means with higher probability than when the current mode is the low mode. Determine the stop operation information required for
The gaming machine further includes:
Based on the fact that the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in the stop mode corresponding to the second specific combination (for example, corner cherry) in the carry-over state during the ART (for example, special ART), the unit in the ART An ART game number increasing means for increasing the number of ART games, which is the number of times a game is played (for example, the sub CPU 102 that executes the processes of steps S1006 and S1008 in FIG. 69);
The gaming state management means includes
When the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal lottery means in the ART, a replay high probability gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay is the second predetermined probability is maintained.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the invention of (I-1), after a special combination is determined as an internal winning combination in ART, the carry-over state during ART is continued until the special combination wins. When the first specific combination, the second specific combination and the third specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination in the carry-over state during the ART, when the first specific stop operation is performed, the first specific combination wins, When the specific stop operation is performed, the second specific combination wins. The number of ART games increases based on the fact that the second specific combination has won in the carry-over state during ART.

  Here, according to the invention of (I-1), when the first specific combination, the second specific combination, and the third specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination in the carryover state during ART, the first specific stop operation One of the stop operation information required for performing the stop operation information and the stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation is notified. When the stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation is notified, the player can win the second specific combination by performing the second specific stop operation according to the stop operation information. Thereby, it is possible to create a situation where the player can easily enjoy the benefit of increasing the number of ART games.

  According to the invention of (I-1), when the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the ART, the replay winning probability does not fluctuate, and the replay high probability gaming state is maintained. That is, when the carry-over state during ART (a state for increasing the number of ART games) is generated, the RT state is not changed. According to the invention of (I-1), instead of changing the RT state, notifying the stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation and increasing the winning probability of the second specific combination, The player benefits from the increase in the number of ART games. Therefore, the management of the game state can be simplified, and it is possible to prevent the data area in the main control circuit from being compressed when generating a state for increasing the number of ART games.

  Further, according to the invention of (I-1), when the first specific combination, the second specific combination, and the third specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination in the non-carrying state during ART, the first specific stop operation Is performed, the first specific combination wins, and when the second specific stop operation is performed, the third specific combination wins. On the other hand, when the first specific combination, the second specific combination and the third specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination in the carry-over state during the ART, when the first specific stop operation is performed, the first specific combination wins, When the second specific stop operation is performed, the second specific combination wins.

  That is, the stop control is different between the ART non-carry-over state and the ART carry-over state, and even if the second specific stop operation is performed in the ART non-carry-over state, the second specific combination does not win, but the ART carry-over In the state, the second specific combination wins when the second specific stop operation is performed. In this way, the second specific combination that becomes an opportunity to increase the number of ART games can be won only by changing from the non-carry-over state during ART to the carry-over state during ART and changing the stop control. 2. The player's interest in specific roles can be increased.

  Further, according to the invention of (I-1), there is a higher probability that the high mode is determined to notify the stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation than the low mode. Accordingly, the second specific combination is more likely to win in the high mode than in the low mode, and as a result, the number of ART games is likely to increase. As described above, by providing a mode in which the probabilities determined to notify the stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation are different from each other, it is possible to provide variations in the ease of increasing the number of ART games. This can improve the interest of the game. Then, the player can play a game while expecting to shift to the high mode.

(I-2) Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and reel display window 4) capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols,
Start command means (for example, start lever 23 and start switch 79) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, an internal lottery means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, the main CPU 93 for executing the processing of FIG. 40);
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, variation control means (for example, processing in step S196 in FIG. 43 and step S465 in FIG. 49) that performs symbol variation display on the symbol display means. A main CPU 93) that executes the process of
Stop command means (for example, stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R and a stop switch) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
When a predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery means, and the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a predetermined stop operation, a stop mode corresponding to the predetermined internal winning combination Then, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 93 for executing the process of FIG. 45 and the process of step S465 of FIG. 49) for stopping and displaying the symbols on which the fluctuation display is performed by the fluctuation control means,
Notification data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) capable of storing notification data for notifying stop operation information necessary for performing the predetermined stop operation;
A notification output means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) capable of performing output for notification based on the notification data;
Based on the notification data stored in the notification data storage means, notification means for notifying the stop operation information by the output means for notification (for example, the sub CPU 102 that executes the push order navigation effect in ART);
From the replay low-probability gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay that triggers the operation of the replay that is a unit game that is performed without inserting the game medium when the predetermined condition is satisfied, is the first predetermined probability. The game state management means (for example, the main CPU 93 that executes the process of step S358 of FIG. 46, and FIG. 31) that shifts to the replay high-probability gaming state in which the winning probability is a second predetermined probability that is higher than the first predetermined probability. (A) a main RAM 95 for storing a game state flag storage area),
The stop control means includes
A special combination (for example, MB) is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal lottery unit in the ART gaming state in which the notification is performed by the notification unit and the ART in the replay high probability gaming state (for example, RT2 gaming state). Thereafter, in the carry-over state during ART (for example, between MB flags) until the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in a stop mode corresponding to the special role, the internal lottery means causes the first specific role (for example, When the middle bell) and the second specific combination (for example, horn cherry) are determined as the internal winning combination,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a first specific stop operation, the variation control means is in a stop mode corresponding to the first specific combination (for example, a middle bell). While the symbols that have been displayed in a variable display are stopped,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a second specific stop operation, the variation control means is in a stop mode corresponding to the second specific combination (for example, a corner cherry). To stop and display the symbols for which the variable display is performed,
The notification means (for example, the sub CPU 102 that executes the process of step S928 in FIG. 65)
In the ART carryover state (for example, special ART), the internal lottery means determines the first specific combination (for example, middle bell) and the second specific combination (for example, horn cherry) as internal winning combinations. In this case, stop operation information necessary for performing the first specific stop operation (for example, a pressing order for winning a middle bell), or stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation (for example, , Push order to win the horn cherry)
The gaming machine further includes:
Based on the fact that the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in the stop mode corresponding to the second specific combination (for example, corner cherry) in the carry-over state during the ART (for example, special ART), the unit in the ART An ART game number increasing means for increasing the number of ART games, which is the number of times a game is played (for example, the sub CPU 102 that executes the processes of steps S1006 and S1008 in FIG. 69);
The gaming state management means includes
When the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal lottery means in the ART, a replay high probability gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay is the second predetermined probability is maintained.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the invention of (I-2), after a special combination is determined as an internal winning combination in ART, the carry-over state during ART is continued until the special combination wins. In the carryover state during ART, when the first specific combination and the second specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination, when the first specific stop operation is performed, the first specific combination wins and the second specific stop operation is performed. The second specified role will win the prize. The number of ART games increases based on the fact that the second specific combination has won in the carry-over state during ART.

  Here, according to the invention of (I-2), it is necessary to perform the first specific stop operation when the first specific combination and the second specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination in the carryover state during ART. Stop operation information or stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation is notified. When the stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation is notified, the player can win the second specific combination by performing the second specific stop operation according to the stop operation information. Thereby, it is possible to create a situation where the player can easily enjoy the benefit of increasing the number of ART games.

  Further, according to the invention of (I-2), when a special combination is determined as an internal winning combination in ART, the winning probability of replay does not fluctuate, and the replay high probability gaming state is maintained. That is, when the carry-over state during ART (a state for increasing the number of ART games) is generated, the RT state is not changed. According to the invention of (I-2), instead of changing the RT state, notifying the stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation and increasing the winning probability of the second specific combination, The player benefits from the increase in the number of ART games. Therefore, the management of the game state can be simplified, and it is possible to prevent the data area in the main control circuit from being compressed when generating a state for increasing the number of ART games.

(I-3) The gaming machine of (I-2),
The stop control means includes
In the ART, a state other than the ART carryover state, which is not in the ART carryover state (for example, between non-MB flags), the internal lottery means and the first specific combination (for example, the middle bell) and the second When a specific combination (for example, a corner cherry) and a third specific combination (for example, a left special combination) are determined as internal winning combinations,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to the first specific stop operation, the variation control is performed in a stop mode corresponding to the first specific combination (for example, a middle bell). While the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to the second specific stop operation, the variation is performed in a stop mode corresponding to the third specific combination (for example, the left special combination). Stop and display the symbols that are displayed by the control means.
In the ART carryover state (for example, between MB flags), the internal lottery means causes the first specific combination (for example, middle bell), the second specific combination (for example, corner cherry), and the third specific combination (for example, , Left special role) is determined as an internal winning role,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to the first specific stop operation, the variation control is performed in a stop mode corresponding to the first specific combination (for example, a middle bell). While the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to the second specific stop operation, the variation control is performed in a stop mode corresponding to the second specific combination (for example, a corner cherry). Stop displaying symbols that have been changed by means
It is characterized by that.

  According to the invention of (I-3), when the first specific combination, the second specific combination and the third specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination in the non-carrying state during ART, the first specific stop operation is performed. The first specific combination wins, and when the second specific stop operation is performed, the third specific combination wins. On the other hand, when the first specific combination, the second specific combination and the third specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination in the carry-over state during the ART, when the first specific stop operation is performed, the first specific combination wins, When the second specific stop operation is performed, the second specific combination wins.

  That is, the stop control is different between the ART non-carry-over state and the ART carry-over state, and even if the second specific stop operation is performed in the ART non-carry-over state, the second specific combination does not win, but the ART carry-over In the state, the second specific combination wins when the second specific stop operation is performed. In this way, the second specific combination that becomes an opportunity to increase the number of ART games can be won only by changing from the non-carry-over state during ART to the carry-over state during ART and changing the stop control. 2. The player's interest in specific roles can be increased.

(I-4) The gaming machine according to (I-2) or (I-3),
The gaming machine further includes:
In the ART carryover state (for example, special ART), the internal lottery means determines the first specific combination (for example, middle bell) and the second specific combination (for example, horn cherry) as internal winning combinations. In this case, notification information determination means (for example, step of FIG. 65) for determining whether or not to notify stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation (for example, a pressing order for winning a corner cherry) Sub CPU102) that executes the process of S927,
The notification means includes
In the ART carryover state (for example, special ART), the internal lottery means determines the first specific combination (for example, middle bell) and the second specific combination (for example, horn cherry) as internal winning combinations. The notification information determining means determines that the stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation (for example, the pressing order for winning a corner cherry) is determined to be notified. Notifying stop operation information (for example, the pressing order for winning a corner cherry) necessary for performing a specific stop operation,
The notification information determination means includes
A plurality of modes (for example, probability variation levels 1 to 4) having different probabilities determined to notify stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation (for example, a pressing order for winning a corner cherry) Determined to notify the stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation with a probability according to one of the modes,
The gaming machine further includes:
In order to perform the second specific stop operation from the low mode with a relatively low probability of being determined to notify stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation when a specific condition is satisfied A mode transition unit (for example, a sub CPU 102 that executes the process of step S926 in FIG. 65) that shifts to a high mode in which the probability determined to notify necessary stop operation information is higher than the low mode;
It is characterized by that.

  According to the invention of (I-4), the probability that the high mode is determined to notify the stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation is higher than the low mode. Accordingly, the second specific combination is more likely to win in the high mode than in the low mode, and as a result, the number of ART games is likely to increase. As described above, by providing a mode in which the probabilities determined to notify the stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation are different from each other, it is possible to provide variations in the ease of increasing the number of ART games. This can improve the interest of the game. Then, the player can play a game while expecting to shift to the high mode.

(I-5) Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and reel display window 4) capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols,
Start command means (for example, start lever 23 and start switch 79) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, an internal lottery means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, the main CPU 93 for executing the processing of FIG. 40);
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, variation control means (for example, processing in step S196 in FIG. 43 and step S465 in FIG. 49) that performs symbol variation display on the symbol display means. A main CPU 93) that executes the process of
Stop command means (for example, stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R and a stop switch) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
When a predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery means, and the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a predetermined stop operation, a stop mode corresponding to the predetermined internal winning combination Then, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 93 for executing the process of FIG. 45 and the process of step S465 of FIG. 49) for stopping and displaying the symbols on which the fluctuation display is performed by the fluctuation control means,
Notification data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) capable of storing notification data for notifying stop operation information necessary for performing the predetermined stop operation;
A notification output means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) capable of performing output for notification based on the notification data;
Based on the notification data stored in the notification data storage means, notification means for notifying the stop operation information by the output means for notification (for example, the sub CPU 102 that executes the push order navigation effect in ART);
From the replay low-probability gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay that triggers the operation of the replay that is a unit game that is performed without inserting the game medium when the predetermined condition is satisfied, is the first predetermined probability. The game state management means (for example, the main CPU 93 that executes the process of step S358 of FIG. 46, and FIG. 31) that shifts to the replay high-probability gaming state in which the winning probability is a second predetermined probability that is higher than the first predetermined probability. (Main RAM 95 for storing the game state flag storage area of (a)),
In the AT gaming state that is notified by the notification means and in the ART that is the replay high-probability gaming state (for example, RT2 gaming state), a special role (for example, MB) and a special role (for example, a chance) by the internal lottery means. In the case where both of the special combination (for example, chance replay) are determined as the internal winning combination by the internal lottery means in the ART. The unit in the ART only when both the special combination (for example, MB) and the special combination (for example, chance replay) are determined as internal winning combinations by the internal lottery means in the ART. Special A that activates a special ART to increase the number of ART games, which is the number of times a game is played T actuating means (e.g., sub CPU102 for executing the processing of step S906 and step S909 in FIG. 64) and,
When both the special combination and the special combination are determined as internal winning combinations by the internal lottery means in the ART, and only the special combination of the special combination and the special combination is determined by the internal lottery means in the ART. In any of the cases determined as an internal winning combination, special ART precursor effect execution means (for example, step S891 and FIG. 63 in FIG. 63) that executes a special ART precursor effect suggesting that the special ART is activated. A sub-CPU 102) that executes the process of step S894,
The stop control means includes
After the special combination (for example, MB) is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal lottery means in the ART, until the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in a stop mode corresponding to the special combination. In a carryover state (for example, between MB flags), when a predetermined combination (for example, a corner cherry) and a combination other than the predetermined combination are determined as an internal winning combination by the internal lottery means,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a first specific stop operation, the variation control is performed in a stop mode corresponding to a combination other than the predetermined combination (for example, a middle bell). While the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a second specific stop operation, the change control means varies in a stop mode corresponding to the predetermined combination (for example, a corner cherry). Stop the display that is being displayed,
In the ART, a state other than the carry-over state during the ART, in the non-carry-through state during the ART (for example, between non-MB flags), the internal lottery means makes the predetermined combination (for example, a corner cherry) and If the role is determined as an internal winning role,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to the first specific stop operation, the fluctuation is performed in a stop mode corresponding to a role other than the predetermined role (for example, a middle bell). While the control means displays the symbols that have been displayed in a variable manner,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to the second specific stop operation, in a stop mode corresponding to a combination other than the predetermined combination (for example, a left special combination), Stop and display the symbols for which variation display is performed by the variation control means,
The notification means (for example, the sub CPU 102 that executes the process of step S901 in FIG. 64)
If the special lottery effect is determined by the internal lottery means during the period in which the special ART precursor effect execution means is being executed, the first winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Notifying stop operation information necessary for performing a specific stop operation (for example, the pressing order for winning the middle bell),
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the invention of (I-5), when both the special combination and the special combination are determined as the internal winning combination in the ART, the special ART for increasing the number of ART games is operated, while the special ART is A special ART precursor effect suggesting that it is activated is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the special ART will operate through the special ART precursor effect.

  Further, according to the invention of (I-5), when only a special combination is determined as an internal winning combination among the special combination and special combination in the ART, the special ART is not activated. An ART precursor effect (that is, a gaze effect) is executed. On the other hand, according to the invention of (I-5), when the predetermined combination and a combination other than the predetermined combination are determined as the internal winning combination in the non-carry-over state during ART, the predetermined specific stop operation is performed. When a combination other than the combination wins and the second specific stop operation is performed, a combination other than the predetermined combination wins. On the other hand, when the predetermined combination and a combination other than the predetermined combination are determined as the internal winning combination in the carryover state during the ART, when the first specific stop operation is performed, the combination other than the predetermined combination wins and the second identification When the stop operation is performed, the predetermined combination wins. That is, the stop control is different between the ART non-carry-over state and the ART carry-over state, and even if the second specific stop operation is performed in the ART non-carry-over state, the predetermined combination is not won, but in the ART carry-over state, When the second specific stop operation is performed, the predetermined combination wins.

  As described above, according to the invention of (I-5), the second specific stop is performed in the non-carrying state during ART and the carryover state during ART (that is, depending on whether or not the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination). The winning combination when the operation is performed is different. Thus, by performing the second specific stop operation, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination (that is, whether or not the special ART is activated). ing. In this case, even if only the special combination of the special combination and special combination is determined as the internal winning combination in ART, the significance that the special ART precursor effect (that is, the gaze effect) is executed is lost.

  In view of this point, according to the invention of (I-5), when the special combination and the combination other than the predetermined combination are determined as the internal winning combination during the period in which the special ART precursor effect is being executed, The stop operation information necessary for performing the stop operation is notified. When the first specific stop operation is performed, whether the carryover state during ART or the carryover state during ART (that is, regardless of whether or not the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination) A role other than the predetermined role wins. Therefore, through the notification, the player is prompted to perform the first specific stop operation (to prevent the second specific stop operation from being performed), and the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination because the winning combination is different. It is possible to avoid that it is easily discriminated whether the special ART is activated (that is, whether the special ART is activated). As a result, it is possible to maintain the significance that the special ART precursor effect (that is, the gasse effect) is executed even when only the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination among the special combination and special combination in ART. .

(I-6) The gaming machine of (I-5),
The stop control means includes
In the ART carryover state (for example, between MB flags), the internal lottery means makes the first specific combination (for example, middle bell), the second specific combination (for example, corner cherry), and the third specific combination (for example, left special) Is determined as an internal winning combination,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to the first specific stop operation, the variation control is performed in a stop mode corresponding to the first specific combination (for example, a middle bell). While the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to the second specific stop operation, the variation control is performed in a stop mode corresponding to the second specific combination (for example, a corner cherry). Stop displaying symbols that have been changed by means of
In the non-carrying state during ART (for example, between non-MB flags), the internal lottery means causes the first specific combination (for example, middle bell), the second specific combination (for example, horn cherry), and the third specific combination. (For example, left special role) is determined as an internal winning role,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to the first specific stop operation, the variation control is performed in a stop mode corresponding to the first specific combination (for example, a middle bell). While the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to the second specific stop operation, the variation is performed in a stop mode corresponding to the third specific combination (for example, the left special combination). Stop and display the symbols that are displayed by the control means.
The notification means includes
The first specific combination, the second specific combination, and the third specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination by the internal lottery means during the period in which the special ART precursor generation is executed by the special ART precursor execution execution means. If it is, the stop operation information necessary for performing the first specific stop operation (for example, the pressing order for winning the middle bell) is notified.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the invention of (I-6), when the first specific combination, the second specific combination, and the third specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination in the non-carry-over state during ART, the first specific stop operation is performed. The first specific combination wins, and when the second specific stop operation is performed, the third specific combination wins. On the other hand, when the first specific combination, the second specific combination, and the third specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination in the carry-over state during the ART, when the first specific stop operation is performed, the first specific combination is won. Then, when the second specific stop operation is performed, the second specific combination wins. That is, the stop control is different between the ART non-carry-over state and the ART carry-over state, and even if the second specific stop operation is performed in the ART non-carry-over state, the second specific combination does not win, but the ART carry-over In the state, the second specific combination wins when the second specific stop operation is performed.

  As described above, according to the invention of (I-6), the second specific stop is performed in the non-carrying state during ART and the carryover state during ART (that is, depending on whether or not the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination). The winning combination when the operation is performed is different. And if it is an experienced player who is familiar with the gaming machine, there is a possibility of knowing this, and such a player intentionally performs the second specific stop operation and performs the second specific stop operation. It is easy to determine whether a special combination is determined as an internal winning combination (that is, whether a special ART is activated) by confirming which combination of the combination and the third specified combination wins It is possible to guess.

  In view of this point, according to the invention of (I-6), the first specific combination, the second specific combination, and the third specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination during the period in which the special ART precursor effect is executed. In such a case, stop operation information necessary for performing the first specific stop operation is notified. When the first specific stop operation is performed, whether the carryover state during ART or the carryover state during ART (that is, regardless of whether or not the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination) The first specific combination wins. Therefore, through the notification, the player is prompted to perform the first specific stop operation (blocking the second specific stop operation), and even a skilled player who is familiar with the gaming machine, It is possible to create a situation in which it is difficult to infer whether or not a special combination is determined as an internal winning combination (that is, whether or not a special ART is activated).

(I-7) Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and reel display window 4) capable of performing symbol variation display and stop display;
Start command means (for example, start lever 23 and start switch 79) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, an internal lottery means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, the main CPU 93 for executing the processing of FIG. 40);
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, variation control means (for example, processing in step S196 in FIG. 43 and step S465 in FIG. 49) that performs symbol variation display on the symbol display means. A main CPU 93) that executes the process of
Stop command means (for example, stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R and a stop switch) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
When a predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery means, and the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a predetermined stop operation, a stop mode corresponding to the predetermined internal winning combination Then, stop control means (for example, the main CPU 93 for executing the process of FIG. 45 and the process of step S465 of FIG. 49) for stopping and displaying the symbols on which the fluctuation display is performed by the fluctuation control means,
Notification data storage means (for example, ROM cartridge substrate 86) capable of storing notification data for notifying stop operation information necessary for performing the predetermined stop operation;
A notification output means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) capable of performing output for notification based on the notification data;
Based on the notification data stored in the notification data storage means, notification means for notifying the stop operation information by the output means for notification (for example, the sub CPU 102 that executes the push order navigation effect in ART);
From the replay low-probability gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay that triggers the operation of the replay that is a unit game that is performed without inserting the game medium when the predetermined condition is satisfied, is the first predetermined probability. The game state management means (for example, the main CPU 93 that executes the process of step S358 of FIG. 46, and FIG. 31) that shifts to the replay high-probability gaming state in which the winning probability is a second predetermined probability that is higher than the first predetermined probability. (A) a main RAM 95 for storing a game state flag storage area),
The stop control means includes
A special combination (for example, MB) is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal lottery unit in the ART gaming state in which the notification is performed by the notification unit and the ART in the replay high probability gaming state (for example, RT2 gaming state). Thereafter, in the carry-over state during the ART (for example, between MB flags) until the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in a stop mode corresponding to the special role, the internal lottery means causes the first specific role (for example, When the middle bell) and the second specific combination (for example, horn cherry) are determined as the internal winning combination,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a first specific stop operation, the variation control means is in a stop mode corresponding to the first specific combination (for example, a middle bell). While the symbols that have been displayed in a variable display are stopped,
When the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a second specific stop operation, the variation control means is in a stop mode corresponding to the second specific combination (for example, a corner cherry). To stop and display the symbols for which the variable display is performed,
The notification means (for example, the sub CPU 102 that executes the process of step S928 in FIG. 65)
In the ART carryover state (for example, special ART), the internal lottery means determines the first specific combination (for example, middle bell) and the second specific combination (for example, horn cherry) as internal winning combinations. If the specific condition is satisfied, the stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation (for example, the pressing order for winning the corner cherry) is notified,
The gaming machine further includes:
Based on the fact that the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in the stop mode corresponding to the second specific combination (for example, corner cherry) in the carry-over state during the ART (for example, special ART), the unit in the ART ART game number increase means for increasing the number of ART games, which is the number of times a game is played (for example, the sub CPU 102 that executes the processes of steps S1006 and S1008 in FIG. 69);
When the stop operation information necessary for performing the predetermined stop operation is notified by the notification unit, the stop command signal output from the stop command unit is different from the predetermined stop operation. (For example, when the stop button is operated in a pressing order different from the pressing order notified by the pressing order navigation effect), the carry-over state during the ART (for example, special ART), Only when the ART is a carry-over state during an ART (for example, a special ART) out of the ART non-carry-over state (for example, a normal ART that is not a special ART) that is a state other than the ART carry-over state. A disadvantage giving means for giving a disadvantage to the player (for example, the sub CPU 102 that executes the process of step S1024 in FIG. 70);
When the stop operation information necessary for performing the predetermined stop operation is notified by the notification unit, the stop command signal output from the stop command unit is different from the predetermined stop operation. (For example, when the stop button is operated in a pressing order different from the pressing order notified by the pressing order navigation effect), the carry-over state during the ART (for example, special ART) and the ART A disadvantage suggestion output control means (for example, FIG. 5) that performs an output suggesting that the disadvantage occurs in any state of a medium non-carry-over state (for example, a normal ART that is not a special ART). 72, which executes the process of step S1065 of 72),
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the invention of (I-7), after the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination in ART, the carry-over state during the ART is continued until the special combination wins. In the carryover state during ART, when the first specific combination and the second specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination, when the first specific stop operation is performed, the first specific combination wins and the second specific stop operation is performed. The second specified role will win the prize. The number of ART games increases based on the fact that the second specific combination has won in the carry-over state during ART.

  Here, according to the invention of (I-7), when the first specific combination and the second specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination in the carry-over state during ART, based on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied. The stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation is notified. When the stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation is notified, the player can win the second specific combination by performing the second specific stop operation according to the stop operation information. Thereby, it is possible to create a situation where the player can easily enjoy the benefit of increasing the number of ART games.

  Further, according to the invention of (I-7), the stop operation information necessary for performing the predetermined stop operation is notified in the carry-over state during ART, and the predetermined stop operation is not performed. In this case (when the player does not follow the notification), a disadvantage is given to the player. On the other hand, when such a stop operation is performed in the non-carry-over state during ART, a disadvantage is not given, but an output suggesting that a disadvantage occurs is performed.

  When such an output (warning) is performed in the non-carry-over state during ART, the state shifts to the carry-over state during ART (that is, a state where a disadvantage is actually given when the player does not follow the notification) Prior to this, when the stop operation information is notified, the player can be alerted in advance so as to perform the stop operation according to the notification. Further, when a notification is made, the player can be conditioned to follow the notification. As a result, in the carry-over state during ART, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the player performing a stop operation different from the notified content due to an operation mistake or the like, and the player is given a disadvantage. Can be prevented from diminishing the will.

(I-8) The gaming machine according to (I-7),
The gaming machine further includes:
When the symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in the stop mode corresponding to the first specific combination (for example, middle bell), the symbol is displayed in the stop mode corresponding to the second specific combination (for example, corner cherry). A game medium providing means (for example, the main CPU 93 for executing the process of step S25 in FIG. 37) for providing more game media than when the symbols are stopped and displayed on the display means;
The disadvantage giving means is:
In the case where the stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation is notified by the notification means, the stop command signal output from the stop command means corresponds to the first specific stop operation. If it is, it will give a disadvantage to the player,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the invention of (I-8), as described above, in the carryover state during the ART, the first specific combination and the second specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination and are necessary for performing the second specific stop operation. When the stop operation information is notified, the second specific combination is won by performing the second specific stop operation according to the notification. This increases the number of ART games. On the other hand, according to the invention of (I-8), when the first specific combination wins, more game media are given than when the second specific combination wins.

  In such a situation, the first specific stop operation is not performed according to the notification, but the second specific combination is won by performing the second specific stop operation according to the notification and the benefit of the increase in the number of ART games is not received. Therefore, there is a possibility that a player who wins the first specific combination and tries to acquire a lot of game media appears. Such a stop operation is not recommended by gaming machine manufacturers, and as a gaming machine manufacturer, it is desirable to avoid a situation in which the ball payout rate increases due to such a stopping operation. By the way.

  In this regard, according to the invention of (I-8), when the stop operation information necessary for performing the second specific stop operation is notified, the first specific stop operation is performed instead of the second specific stop operation. A disadvantage is given to the player. Further, as described above, since a warning is issued when a stop operation different from the notified content is performed, the player can be prompted to perform the stop operation according to the notification. Thus, by not following the notification, it is possible to prevent the player from acquiring a lot of game media and capturing the gaming machine.

  In the present invention, when an AT gaming state (a state in which information for winning a combination of symbols corresponding to an internal winning combination is provided) is provided, a process related to the operation and termination of the AT gaming state or during the AT gaming state The processing relating to the notification performed in step S <b> 1 may be performed in the main control circuit 91 or may be performed in the sub control circuit 101.

[Second Embodiment]
The first embodiment has been described above. Hereinafter, a second embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. In the following, the same components as those of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portions where the description in the first embodiment applies also in the second embodiment will be omitted.

[Reduced number of ART games]
The outline of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the second embodiment, the number of ART games may decrease in ART. FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining a decrease in the number of ART games.

  FIG. 73 shows two cases as the case where the number of ART games decreases, that is, the case where an “ART game number reduction effect” occurs and the case where an “abnormal special role is missed” occurs.

  Similar to the first embodiment, in the second embodiment, when the MB wins in the ART, the special ART is activated (see FIG. 3). Special ART is a state for increasing (adding) the number of ART games. When the MB wins in the ART, the special ART is not activated immediately, but the special ART precursor effect is executed for a predetermined period (see FIGS. 63 and 64). The special ART precursor effect is an effect suggesting that the special ART is activated.

  The ART game number reduction effect shown in FIG. 73 occurs during a period in which such a special ART precursor effect is being executed. When the ART game number reduction lottery performed during the generation of the ART game number reduction effect is won, the number of ART games decreases. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76.

  Similarly to the first embodiment, in the second embodiment, when an MB is won in a special ART (between MB flags), an extra special zone (MB gaming state) (first extra special zone or second extra special zone). (See Fig. 3). In the added special zone (MB gaming state), the number of ART games is added (added) based on the number of times the second specific combination (horn cherry) has won in the special ART (between MB flags).

  As described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 65, when any of “16” to “21” is determined as the winning number in the special ART (between MB flags), the “special special role” is awarded. The order of pressing is notified. By performing a stop operation in accordance with the notification, the “special special role” or “MB1” is awarded. That is, if the stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing, the “unusual special role” is won, and if the stop operation is not performed at an appropriate time, the “unusual special role” is not won and “MB1” is Win a prize (ie, miss the “anomalous special role”). When MB1 wins, the special ART (between MB flags) ends, and the extra special zone (MB gaming state) is activated.

  In the present embodiment, when “MB1” is won in the special ART (between MB flags) as described above (when the “abnormal special role” is missed), the number of ART games may decrease. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80.

<Special ART Precursor Treatment>
With reference to FIG. 74, the special ART precursory process performed in step S887 of FIG. 63 will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a special ART precursory process performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes in steps S1901 to S1910. These processes are the same as the processes in steps S901 to S910 in FIG. 64, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  If it is determined in step S1902 that the special ART warning sign game is not the tenth game, after executing the process of step S1907, if it is determined in step S1908 that the MB is not internally winning, or the process of step S1910 is executed. After the execution, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART game number reduction effect execution process (step S1911). The ART game number reduction effect execution process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. After executing the process of step S1911, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<ART game number reduction effect execution processing>
The ART game number reduction effect execution process performed in step S1911 of FIG. 74 will be described using FIG. 75 and FIG. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an ART game number reduction effect execution process performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a reduced game number determination table for ART game number reduction effect.

  In the ART game number reduction effect execution process shown in FIG. 75, first, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is larger than 30 (step S1921). The value of the ART game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games executed in ART (AT game state in which the push order for winning the internal winning combination is notified and the RT2 game state), and is stored in the sub RAM 103. (See Step S846 in FIG. 61 and Step S987 in FIG. 68). When determining that the value of the ART game number counter is 30 or less, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the value of the ART game number counter is larger than 30, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART game number reduction lottery (step S1922). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the winning or non-winning by performing lottery based on the random number value.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART game number reduction lottery has been won (step S1923). When determining that the ART game number reduction lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 102 determines that the ART game number reduction lottery has been won, the sub CPU 102 performs lottery based on the ART game number reduction effect reduction game number determination table (see FIG. 76) stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. By performing, the number of reduced games is determined (step S1924).

  As shown in FIG. 76, in the ART game number reduction effect reduction game number determination table, lottery values are associated with the reduction game numbers (10, 20, and 30), respectively. In the process of step S1924, the sub CPU 102 determines any one of 10, 20, and 30 as the reduced game number by referring to the reduced game number determination table for the ART game number reduction effect.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the reduced game number from the value of the ART game number counter (step S1925). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 stores, in the sub RAM 103, a value obtained by subtracting the reduced game number determined in step S1924 from the value of the ART game number counter stored in the sub RAM 103 as a new value of the ART game number counter. Let After executing the process of step S1925, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the ART game number reduction lottery is won, the number of ART games is reduced by 10, 20, or 30 games.

  Although not shown, when the ART game number reduction effect execution process shown in FIG. 75 is started, the ART game number reduction effect is executed. The ART game number reduction effect is an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and an image showing a character fighting state is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. When the ART game number reduction lottery is not won, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays how the teammate character wins the enemy character. On the other hand, when the ART game number reduction lottery is won, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays that the teammate character is defeated by the enemy character, and “10”, “ One of the values “20” and “30” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. This informs the player that the number of ART games has decreased.

<Display command reception processing>
The display command reception process performed in step S766 of FIG. 58 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. 77 and 78 are flowcharts showing a display command reception process performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes of steps S1961 to S1965. Since these processes are the same as the processes of steps S961 to S965 of FIG. 67, the description thereof is omitted here.

  If it is determined in step S1965 that the special ART flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the irregular special combination has won (step S1966). Since the display command data received in step S765 of FIG. 58 includes information indicating the display combination, the sub CPU 102 recognizes the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line by receiving the display command data. Can do.

  If it is determined that the irregular special combination is won, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the value of the irregular special combination prize counter (step S1967). In this process, the sub CPU 102 causes the sub RAM 103 to store a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the irregular special role winning number counter stored in the sub RAM 103 as the value of the new irregular special role winning number counter. The value of the irregular special role winning number counter indicates the number of times the irregular special role has been won in the special ART.

  If it is determined in step S1966 that the irregular special combination has not won, or after executing the process of step S1967, the sub CPU 102 determines whether any of MB1 to MB3 has been won (step S1968). .

  If it is determined that any of MBs 1 to 3 has been won, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART game number reduction process at the time of MB winning (step S1969). The processing for reducing the number of ART games at the time of MB winning will be described later with reference to FIG. 79 and FIG.

  After executing the process of step S1969, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes of step S1970 to step S1972. These processes are the same as the processes of step S967 to step S969 of FIG. Description of is omitted.

  If it is determined in step S1968 that none of the MBs 1 to 3 has won, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes in steps S1973 to S1980. These processes are performed in steps S970 to S977 in FIG. Since this process is the same as this process, a description thereof is omitted here.

<Process to reduce the number of ART games when winning MB>
With reference to FIG. 79 and FIG. 80, the MB winning ART game number reduction process performed in step S1969 of FIG. 77 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an ART game number reduction process at the time of MB winning performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an MB winning time reduction game number determination table.

  In the MB winning ART game number reduction process shown in FIG. 79, first, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the irregular special role winning number counter (see step S1967 in FIG. 77) is 3 or more (step S1991). ).

  If it is determined that the value of the irregular special role winning number counter is less than 3, the sub CPU 102 decreases the number based on the MB winning time reduction game number determination table (see FIG. 80) stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. The number of games is determined (step S1992).

  As shown in FIG. 80, in the MB winning prize reduction game number determination table, the number of irregular special role winning times (the value of the irregular special role winning number counter) (0, 1, and 2) is reduced. The correspondence between the number of irregular special roles winning and the number of reduced games is defined so that the number of reduced games increases as the number of irregular special roles won.

  In the processing of step S1992, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of games corresponding to the number of irregular special role winnings as the reduced number of games by referring to the MB winning time reduction game number determination table. Specifically, when the value of the irregular special role winning number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 determines the reduced game number to be 30. When the value of the irregular special role winning number counter is 1, the sub CPU 102 determines the decrease game number to be 20. When the value of the irregular special role winning number counter is 2, the sub CPU 102 determines the reduced game number to be 10.

  After executing the process of step S1992, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter stored in the sub RAM 103 is larger than the reduced game number determined in step S1992 (step S1993).

  When determining that the value of the ART game number counter is larger than the reduced game number, the sub CPU 102 subtracts the reduced game number from the value of the ART game number counter (step S1994). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores, in the sub RAM 103, a value obtained by subtracting the reduced game number determined in step S1992 from the value of the ART game number counter stored in the sub RAM 103 as a new ART game number counter value. Let

  If it is determined in step S1993 that the value of the ART game number counter is equal to or less than the reduced game number, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” in the ART game number counter (step S1995). Then, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART flag (see step S964 in FIG. 67) to OFF (step S1996). As a result, ART ends.

  If it is determined in step S1991 that the value of the irregular special role winning number counter is 3 or more, or after executing the processing of step S1994 or step S1996, the sub CPU 102 clears the irregular special role winning number counter (step S1997). Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when an MB is won in a special ART, if the number of times that an irregular special role is won in the special ART (the number of irregular special roles) is 2 or less, The number of ART games is reduced by the number of games corresponding to the number of games. On the other hand, when the number of irregular special role winnings is 3 or more, the number of ART games does not decrease.

  The pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment has been described as an embodiment of the present invention.

  As a conventional gaming machine, it is an assist time (AT) for notifying a stop operation for winning a combination (small combination) related to paying out medals, and a winning combination (replay) that triggers the re-game operation Those having an ART state with a high probability are known. For example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-248441, an ART state and a special ART state having a higher replay win probability than the ART state are provided. In the ART state, one set (100 games) is played. On the condition that a replay such as a special replay is won in the special ART state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to add the number of ART sets. When the lottery is won, the number of ART sets is added.

  The present inventor can create new entertainment characteristics by devising the game performed in the AT gaming state in the process of earnestly examining the gaming machine having the AT gaming state as described above. It came to the idea that it might be.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object thereof is to create new entertainment characteristics in gaming machines having an AT gaming state.

  In this regard, the pachislo 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(II-1) Symbol display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R and reel display window 4) capable of performing symbol variation display and stop display;
Start command means (start lever 23 and start switch 79) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (main CPU 93 executing the process of FIG. 40),
In response to the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, a fluctuation control means for performing symbol display on the symbol display means (the process in step S196 in FIG. 43 and the process in step S465 in FIG. 49). Main CPU 93) for executing
Stop command means (stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R and stop switch) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
When a predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a predetermined stop operation, it corresponds to the predetermined internal winning combination In a display mode, stop control means (main CPU 93 for executing the process of FIG. 45 and the process of step S465 of FIG. 49) for stopping and displaying the symbols on which the variable display is performed by the fluctuation control means;
Informing means for informing stop operation information necessary for performing the predetermined stop operation (sub CPU 102 for executing push order navigation effect in ART);
AT operation means (sub CPU 102 that executes the process of step S964 in FIG. 67) that activates the AT gaming state that is notified by the notification means when a predetermined condition is established;
The number of times of management (ART game number counter value), which is the number of unit games managed in the AT gaming state, is a specific value from the initial value (50) when the AT gaming state is activated by the AT operating means. AT termination means for terminating the AT gaming state when (0) is reached (sub CPU 102 executing the processing of step S885 in FIG. 63 and step S1996 in FIG. 79);
Each time a unit game is executed in the AT gaming state, a management target number counting means for updating the management target number so that a difference between the management target number and the specific value is decreased by one (see FIG. 63, the sub CPU 102 executing the process of step S883),
When a specific condition is satisfied in the AT gaming state, the management target is set such that a difference between the management target count and the specific value is reduced separately from the management target count update by the management target count counting means. Management target number special update means for updating the number of times (step S1925 in FIG. 75 and sub CPU 102 that executes the processes in steps S1994 and S1995 in FIG. 79);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the pachislot 1 according to the second embodiment, the number of times of management (the value of the ART game number counter) is managed in ART, and the number of times of management (the value of the ART game number counter) is set to a specific value (0). When it reaches, ART ends. The number of times to be managed (the value of the ART game number counter) is updated so that the difference from the specific value (0) is decreased by one each time a unit game is executed once in ART. Separately from this, the number of times of management (the value of the ART game number counter) is updated so that the difference from the specific value (0) becomes small when a specific condition is satisfied in ART.

  As described above, according to the pachislot 1 according to the second embodiment, each time a unit game is executed in ART, the difference between the number of times of management (the value of the ART game number counter) and a specific value (0). Is reduced by one, but when a specific condition is met, the difference is further reduced. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied, the timing at which the number of times of management (the value of the ART game number counter) reaches the specific value (0) is advanced by the amount corresponding to the decrease. . In other words, when a specific condition is satisfied, the number of unit games that can be executed in ART (the number of ART games) decreases. As a result, it is possible to create a situation that makes the player feel uneasy about the specific condition being satisfied, and to create a tension of the player. As a result, the player can play the game while having a thrilling experience.

  In particular, according to the pachislot 1 according to the second embodiment, the number of ART games decreases when the ART game number reduction lottery performed during the period in which the special ART precursor effect is executed is won. “Winning the ART game number reduction lottery” corresponds to the above “specific condition”.

  Here, the special ART precursor effect is an effect suggesting that the special ART is activated, and in the period in which the special ART precursor effect is being executed, the player usually expects the special ART to operate. Hugging In the second embodiment, an ART game number reduction lottery is performed during a period in which such a special ART precursor effect is being executed, and the ART game number may decrease. Therefore, it is possible to mix the player's expectation for the operation of the special ART and the player's anxiety about the decrease in the number of ART games, and to generate such conflicting player's feelings. Can improve the interest of the special ART precursor effect.

  The winning probability of the ART game number reduction lottery (see step S1922 in FIG. 75) can be designed as appropriate. However, it is possible to make the player feel uneasy about the decrease in the number of ART games. It is desirable to adopt a value of (for example, 30% or more). For example, if the winning probability of the ART game number reduction lottery is 50%, each time a unit game is performed during the period when the special ART precursor effect is executed (when the value of the ART game number counter is greater than 30) Because the number of ART games decreases with a probability of 5/5, the player can feel very anxious.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when the maximum value of the reduced game number is 30 (see FIG. 76), and the value of the ART game number counter is 30 (maximum value of the reduced game number) or less, the ART The number of games is not reduced (the ART game number reduction lottery is not performed) (see step S1921 in FIG. 75). Even if the value of the ART game number counter is 30 or less, if the number of ART games is reduced, the number of reduced games may be larger than the value of the ART game number counter. . In this case, as a result of subtracting the value of the ART game number counter, the value of the ART game number counter becomes 0, and a situation may occur in which ART ends at that time. In this case, the ART is terminated due to the decrease in the number of ART games, and the player's expectation that the special ART is activated (addition of the ART game number) is suddenly lost, and the player is excessively discouraged. I could let you. In the second embodiment, when the value of the ART game number counter is 30 or less, it is configured not to decrease the number of ART games, thereby preventing such a situation and motivating the player. Trying to maintain.

  Further, by adopting such a configuration, when the value of the ART game number counter is larger than 30 (for example, 35), the value of the ART game number counter is greater when the special ART precursor effect starts. The ART game number counter is smaller when the special ART precursor effect ends than when the special ART precursor effect starts when the value is 30 or less (for example, 25) (the ART game number counter It is possible to create a situation in which a special ART precursor effect starts when the value is 30 or less). As a result, the change in the value of the ART game number counter during the period in which the special ART precursor effect is being executed can be varied, and the value of the ART game number counter at the time when the special ART precursor effect starts. On the other hand, the player can be interested.

  However, in the present invention, during the period when the special ART precursor effect is being executed, regardless of the value of the ART game number counter (even when the value of the ART game number counter is 30 or less), The number of ART games may be reduced according to the result. As a result, as described above, a situation in which ART is suddenly terminated due to a decrease in the number of ART games can occur, so that the tension of the player during the period in which the special ART precursor effect is being executed is increased, and the player You can have a more thrilling experience while playing games. In addition, if the winning probability of the ART game number reduction lottery is set to be relatively high (for example, 50% or more), the number of ART games is repeatedly reduced every time a unit game is performed during the period in which the special ART precursor effect is executed. Then, before the special ART precursor effect ends (before the special ART starts), there is a high possibility that the value of the ART game number counter becomes 0 and the ART ends. When such a configuration is adopted, it becomes difficult to shift from the special ART precursor effect to the special ART, and the decrease in the number of ART games during the period in which the special ART precursor effect is being executed is This is a great barrier to enjoying the benefit of adding the number of ART games in the specialization zone after ART. As a result, it was possible to shift to a special ART before the value of the ART game number counter became 0 (while breaking through the barrier) while suppressing an excessive increase in the payout rate due to the addition of the number of ART games. I was able to give great joy to the player.

  As described above, the ART game number reduction lottery is performed during the period in which the special ART precursor effect is executed. In the present invention, the timing at which the ART game number reduction lottery is performed (the timing at which the ART game number reduction effect is generated). ) Is not limited to the period during which the special ART precursor effect is being executed. The timing at which the ART game number reduction lottery is performed can be any timing during the ART. For example, when the value of the ART game number counter reaches a predetermined value, the ART game number reduction lottery is performed. It is also possible that In addition, a lottery for reducing the number of ART games on condition that a lottery to be performed at any timing (for example, when the value of the ART game number counter reaches a predetermined value or when a predetermined combination is won internally) is won. May be performed.

  In addition, according to the pachislot 1 according to the second embodiment, when the number of times that an irregular special role is won in the special ART (number of irregular special roles) is 2 or less, when the MB wins (the irregular special role is changed). If it is missed), the number of ART games decreases. “The MB wins when the number of irregular special role winnings is 2 or less” corresponds to the above “specific condition”.

  When an MB is won in a special ART, an additional special zone will be activated. However, if the MB wins when the number of irregular special roles won is two or less, the number of ART games will decrease, so for the player It is desirable not to win the MB (do not miss the irregular special role) until the number of irregular special role winnings reaches 3. Therefore, according to the pachi-slot 1 according to the second embodiment, the stop operation for preventing the MB from winning a prize before the specialization zone is activated (the final stage of the special ART) It is possible to prompt the player to perform (push operation), thereby improving the interest of the special ART.

  If the combination of symbols corresponding to the irregular special role (see FIG. 15) is not known, the player cannot perform the pushing operation for winning the irregular special role. It is desirable to be configured to notify. For example, in step S923 of FIG. 65, a push order navigation for winning the internal special anomaly winning combination is generated, and a symbol that needs to be pressed to win the anomalous special role (design to be aimed at) ) May be notified to the player. If the symbol to be aimed is known, as described with reference to FIG. 21, the player can win the irregular special combination by performing a stop operation at an appropriate timing aiming at the symbol.

  Such notification of the symbol to be aimed at may be performed up to a predetermined number of times. For example, as described in the second embodiment, on the premise of the configuration (see FIG. 79) in which the number of ART games is reduced by winning MB when the number of irregular special role winnings is 2 or less. If the number of notifications of the symbol to be aimed at is three, the number of ART games will decrease unless the target is successfully achieved in all three notifications (see from the player's point of view). For example, in order to prevent the number of ART games from decreasing, the pushing operation cannot be failed even once). This makes it possible to increase the importance of the pressing technique, and in order to perform an accurate pressing operation, the player can be enthusiastic about the game in the final stage of the special ART (immediately before the additional specialization zone).

  As described above, in the present invention, between the first combination (anomalous special combination) and the second combination (MB), “the second combination by missing the first combination (anomalous special combination)”. In the case where there is a relationship that “a winning combination (MB) wins”, “a second winning combination when the number of winnings of the first winning combination is equal to or less than a predetermined number” is set as a “specific condition”. Can be adopted. However, in this case, the condition that “the number of times the first winning combination is less than or equal to a predetermined number” is not essential, and the number of ART games is unconditionally reduced when the second winning combination is won. It is good.

  In the second embodiment, every time a unit game is executed in ART, the value of the ART game number counter is decremented by 1, and when the value of the ART game number counter reaches 0, the ART is terminated. explained. However, in the present invention, every time a unit game is executed in ART, the value of the ART game number counter (number of times to be managed) is incremented by one, and the value of the ART game number counter (number of times to be managed) is specified. The ART may be terminated when the value of is reached. In such an embodiment, when a specific condition is established in ART, the value of the ART game number counter may be added.

(II-2) The gaming machine of (II-1),
The stop control means includes
When a specific internal winning combination (any of the winning numbers “16” to “21” in FIG. 16) is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the stop command signal is sent from the stop command means at a specific timing. When output, the symbols constituting the specific symbol combination (“anomalous special role”) are displayed on the symbol display means while being stopped, while the stop command signal from the stop command means is a timing other than the specific timing. In the case of being output at, the symbols other than the symbols constituting the specific symbol combination are stopped and displayed on the symbol display means,
The management object number special update means is:
When the specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the AT gaming state, when the stop command signal is output from the stop instruction means at a timing other than the specific timing (“anomaly” If the “special role” is missed, the management target count is updated so that the difference between the management target count and the specific value is reduced separately from the management target count update by the management target count counting means. (Sub CPU 102 that executes the processing of step S1994 and step S1995 in FIG. 79),
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachi-slot 1 according to the second embodiment, when a specific internal winning combination (any of winning numbers “16” to “21”) is determined as an internal winning combination, a stop operation is performed at a specific timing. In the case where the stop operation is performed at a timing other than the specific timing, the symbols constituting the specific symbol combination (“anomalous special role”) are stopped and displayed. The symbols other than the symbols constituting “anomalous special role”) (the symbols constituting “MB1”) are stopped and displayed. That is, if the stop operation is not performed at a specific timing, the specific symbol combination (the symbol combination corresponding to “anomalous special role”) is not stopped and displayed (“anomalous special role” is missed). In the case where a specific internal winning combination (any of winning numbers “16” to “21”) is determined as an internal winning combination in ART, if the stop operation is not performed at a specific timing, The difference between the number of times (the value of the ART game number counter) and the specific value (0) is reduced. That is, the number of ART games decreases when a specific symbol combination (“anomalous special role”) is missed.

  Thus, according to the pachislot 1 according to the second embodiment, the result of the stop operation by the player is reflected in the number of unit games that can be executed in ART, and the number of ART games decreases depending on the result of the stop operation. There is a possibility. Therefore, it is possible for the player to start the stop operation with a sense of tension, and to have the game played while having a more thrilling experience. In addition, it becomes possible to intervene the pressing technique in the number of unit games that can be executed in the ART, and the player can enjoy the pressing operation during the ART.

  In the present invention, instead of the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, a gaming machine (pachislot machine) such as the following (II-3) may be adopted.

(II-3) The gaming machine of (II-1),
The management object number special update means is:
When the specific condition is satisfied after the predetermined management target number of times special update condition is satisfied in the AT gaming state, the management target number is updated so that a difference between the management target number and the specific value is reduced. On the other hand, if the specific condition is not satisfied, the management target number is updated so that the difference between the management target number and the specific value is increased (the processing in steps S2925 and S2927 in FIG. 81, In addition, the sub CPU 102 that executes the processing of step S1994, step S1995 of FIG. 79, and step S2968 of FIG.
It is characterized by that.

  Such a modification will be described with reference to FIGS.

<ART game number reduction effect execution processing>
FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an ART game number reduction effect execution process performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention. The ART game number reduction effect execution process shown in FIG. 81 is executed in step S1911 of FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes in steps S2921 to S2923. These processes are the same as the processes in steps S1921 to S1923 in FIG. 75, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  If it is determined in step S2923 that the ART game number reduction lottery has been won, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes in steps S2924 and S2925. These processes are the same as the processes in steps S1924 and S1925 in FIG. Since this is a process, a description thereof is omitted here.

  If it is determined in step S2923 that the ART game number reduction lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 102 is based on an ART game number reduction effect increase game number determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. By performing lottery, the number of increased games is determined (step S2926).

  In the ART game number reduction effect reduction game number determination table (see FIG. 76), in the ART game number reduction effect increase game number determination table, the increase game number (10, 20, and 30) Each lottery value is associated with each other. In the process of step S2926, the sub CPU 102 determines any one of 10, 20, and 30 as the increased number of games by referring to the ART game number decreasing effect increase game number determination table.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 adds the increased number of games to the value of the ART game number counter (step S2927). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 stores, in the sub RAM 103, a value obtained by adding the number of increased games determined in step S2926 to the value of the ART game number counter stored in the sub RAM 103 as a new value of the ART game number counter. Let When the value obtained by adding the increased number of games to the value of the ART game number counter exceeds the initial value (50) of the ART game number counter, the sub CPU 102 sets the initial value (50) of the ART game number counter to a new value. The value is stored in the sub RAM 103 as the value of the ART game number counter.

  After executing the processing of step S2927, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  Thus, in this modification, when the ART game number reduction lottery is won, the number of ART games is reduced by 10, 20 or 30 games. On the other hand, if the ART game number reduction lottery is not won, the number of ART games is increased by 10, 20, or 30 games.

  When the ART game number reduction lottery is not won, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays that the teammate character wins the enemy character, and “10” according to the value determined as the increase game number. , “20”, and “30” are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. This informs the player that the number of ART games has increased. On the other hand, when the ART game number reduction lottery is won, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays that the teammate character is defeated by the enemy character, and “10”, “ One of the values “20” and “30” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. This informs the player that the number of ART games has decreased.

<Display command reception processing>
FIG. 82 and FIG. 83 are flowcharts showing a display command reception process performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention. The display command reception process shown in FIGS. 82 and 83 is executed in step S766 of FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes the processing of step S2961 to step S2967. Since these processing are the same as the processing of step S1961 to step S1967 of FIG. 77, description thereof is omitted here.

  After executing the processing of step S2967, the sub CPU 102 adds 10 to the value of the ART game number counter (step S2968). In this process, the sub CPU 102 causes the sub RAM 103 to store a value obtained by adding 10 to the value of the ART game number counter stored in the sub RAM 103 as a new value of the ART game number counter.

  Thus, in this modification, the number of ART games increases each time an irregular special role is won in a special ART. On the other hand, as described above, when an MB is won in a special ART (when an irregular special combination is missed), the number of ART games can be reduced.

  After executing the processing of step S2968, the sub CPU 102 executes the processing of step S2969 to step S2973, which are the same as the processing of step S1968 to step S1972 of FIG. Description of is omitted. Also, the processing from step S2974 to step S2981 is the same as the processing from step S1973 to step S1980 in FIG. 78, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  As described above, according to the pachi-slot 1 according to the present modification example, when a specific condition is satisfied after a predetermined management object number special update condition is established in ART, the number of management objects (the value of the ART game number counter) is While the difference from the specific value (0) is small, if the specific condition is not satisfied, the difference between the number of times of management (the value of the ART game number counter) and the specific value (0) is large. . That is, after a predetermined management target number of times special update condition is satisfied, the number of ART games decreases when a specific condition is satisfied, while the number of ART games increases when a specific condition is not satisfied. To do.

  Specifically, when the ART game number reduction effect is generated during the period in which the special ART precursor effect is executed, when the ART game number reduction lottery is won, the ART game number decreases, while the ART game number reduction lottery If the game is not won, the number of ART games increases. In addition, when a special internal winning combination (any of winning numbers “16” to “21”) is determined as an internal winning combination in the special ART and the MB wins (when an irregular special combination is missed), While the number of ART games decreases, the number of ART games increases when an irregular special role wins. “The effect of reducing the number of ART games occurs during the period in which the special ART precursor effect is being executed” and “a specific internal winning combination (any one of the winning numbers“ 16 ”to“ 21 ”) is internal in the special ART. “Determining as a winning combination” corresponds to the “predetermined update condition for the predetermined number of times of management”. The “specific conditions” are as described above.

  In this way, when the predetermined management target number special update condition is satisfied, the number of ART games may decrease or increase depending on whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. The variation in the number of games in the process of digesting ART can be made rich in variations. In addition, the player's anxiety about the establishment of a specific condition and the player's expectation for the absence of a specific condition can be mixed, and such conflicting player's feelings can be balanced. By creating it, it is possible to provide an interesting ART that makes it difficult for players to get bored.

  As described in the above modification, even if the number of ART games increases, if the value of the increased ART game number counter does not exceed the initial value (50), it will be output. It is possible to make the ball easy to predict to some extent, and it is possible to prevent the player's excessive gambling.

(II-4) Symbol display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R and reel display window 4) capable of performing symbol variation display and stop display;
Start command means (start lever 23 and start switch 79) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (main CPU 93 executing the process of FIG. 40),
In response to the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, a fluctuation control means for performing symbol display on the symbol display means (the process in step S196 in FIG. 43 and the process in step S465 in FIG. 49). Main CPU 93) for executing
Stop command means (stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R and stop switch) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
When a predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a predetermined stop operation, it corresponds to the predetermined internal winning combination In a display mode, stop control means (main CPU 93 for executing the process of FIG. 45 and the process of step S465 of FIG. 49) for stopping and displaying the symbols on which the variable display is performed by the fluctuation control means;
Informing means for informing stop operation information necessary for performing the predetermined stop operation (sub CPU 102 for executing push order navigation effect in ART);
AT operation means (sub CPU 102 that executes the process of step S964 in FIG. 67) that activates the AT gaming state that is notified by the notification means when a predetermined condition is established;
The managed variable (value of the ART game number counter) managed in the AT gaming state has reached a specific value (0) from the initial value (50) when the AT gaming state is activated by the AT operating means. In this case, AT end means for ending the AT gaming state (sub CPU 102 executing the processing of step S885 in FIG. 63 and step S1996 in FIG. 79),
When the first specific condition is satisfied in the AT gaming state, first managed variable updating means for updating the managed variable so that the difference between the managed variable and the specific value becomes small (FIG. 63). Sub CPU102) that executes the process of step S883 of FIG.
When the second specific condition is satisfied in the AT gaming state, the difference between the managed variable and the specific value is reduced separately from the update of the managed variable by the first managed variable updating means. Second management target variable updating means for updating the management target variable (step S1925 in FIG. 75 and sub CPU 102 that executes the processing in steps S1994 and S1995 in FIG. 79);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the pachislot 1 according to the second embodiment, the management target variable (the value of the ART game number counter) is managed in ART, and the management target variable (the value of the ART game number counter) is set to a specific value (0). When it reaches, ART ends. The managed variable (the value of the ART game number counter) is updated so that the difference from the specific value (0) becomes small when the first specific condition is satisfied in ART. Separately from this, the managed variable (the value of the ART game number counter) is updated so that the difference from the specific value (0) becomes small when the second specific condition is satisfied in ART. .

  Here, in the pachislot 1 according to the second embodiment, every time a unit game is executed in ART, the difference between the managed variable (the value of the ART game number counter) and the specific value (0) is one by one. It is configured to be smaller, and “one unit game is executed” corresponds to the “first specific condition”. In addition, the “second specific condition” is the above-mentioned “specific condition”, “when winning the ART game number reduction lottery” and “the number of irregular special role winnings is 2 or less” The “winning MB” corresponds to the “second specific condition”.

  Thus, according to the pachislot 1 according to the second embodiment, not only when the first specific condition is satisfied in ART but also when the second specific condition is satisfied, the managed variable (the number of ART games) The difference between the counter value) and the specific value (0) is reduced. Therefore, when the second specific condition is satisfied, the managed variable (the value of the ART game number counter) approaches the specific value (0) by the amount that the difference has decreased accordingly (that is, ART). Will approach the end of). As a result, it is possible to create a situation that makes the player feel anxious about the second specific condition being satisfied, and to create a tension of the player. As a result, the player can play the game while having a thrilling experience.

  In the second embodiment, every time a unit game is executed in ART, the value of the ART game number counter is decremented by 1, and when the value of the ART game number counter reaches 0, the ART is terminated. explained. However, in the present invention, every time a medal is paid out in ART, the value of the ART end number counter (managed variable) is subtracted by the number of medals paid out, and the value of the ART end number counter (managed variable) is specified. The ART may end when the value (0) is reached. In such an aspect, “the winning of the small role” corresponds to the “first specific condition”. In addition, when the “second specific condition” is satisfied in ART, the value of the ART end number counter may be subtracted.

[Third Embodiment]
The first embodiment and the second embodiment have been described above. Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described. The basic configuration of the pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first and second embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portions where the descriptions in the first embodiment and the second embodiment apply also in the third embodiment will be omitted.

  The outline of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the ART transition route. FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the ART winning probability and the ART mode.

[ART migration route]
In the first embodiment, as a route in which the gaming state (sub) transitions from the normal gaming state to ART (ART transition route), a route (first route, FIG. 60) that transitions from the normal gaming state to ART via the indication effect. And the route for transitioning from the normal gaming state to the ART via the challenge effect during MB (second route, see FIG. 60 and FIG. 68). . In contrast, in the third embodiment, five routes of the first route to the fifth route are provided as the ART transition route.

  In the third embodiment, the ART is activated when a predetermined condition is established. FIG. 84 shows five conditions (the following (I) to (V)) as predetermined conditions.

Condition (I): A predetermined combination (any of winning numbers 12, 47, 48, and 51) is determined as an internal winning combination (internal winning) in the normal mode. Condition (II): MB ( Winning number 49, 52, or 53) is determined as an internal winning combination (internal winning) Condition (III): The specific combination (left special combination) is stopped along the winning determination line in the normal mode Displayed (winning) Condition (IV): A predetermined combination (winning number 12, 47, 48, or 51) is determined as an internal winning combination (internal winning) in the high probability mode. (V): The ceiling counter reaches the specific number of games (1000)

  The probability of winning an ART lottery (ART winning probability) is different between the normal mode and the high probability mode, and the ART winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than the ART winning probability in the normal mode.

  The route in which the gaming state (sub) shifts from the normal gaming state to ART when the condition (I) is satisfied is the first route. In the first route, when the condition (I) is satisfied, the ART lottery is executed, and when the ART lottery is won, the gaming state (sub) shifts from the normal gaming state to the ART (see FIG. 94). ).

  A route in which the gaming state (sub) shifts from the normal gaming state to the ART when the condition (II) is satisfied is a second route. In the second route, when the condition (II) is satisfied, the ART lottery is executed, and when the ART lottery is won, the gaming state (sub) shifts from the normal gaming state to the ART (see FIG. 95). ).

  A route in which the gaming state (sub) shifts from the normal gaming state to the ART when the condition (III) is satisfied is a third route. In the third route, when the condition (III) is satisfied, the ART lottery is executed, and when the ART lottery is won, the gaming state (sub) shifts from the normal gaming state to the ART (see FIG. 105). ).

  A route in which the gaming state (sub) shifts from the normal gaming state to the ART when the condition (IV) is satisfied is a fourth route. In the fourth route, when the condition (IV) is satisfied, the ART lottery is executed. When the ART lottery is won, the gaming state (sub) shifts from the normal gaming state to the ART (see FIG. 94). ).

  A route in which the gaming state (sub) shifts from the normal gaming state to the ART when the condition (V) is satisfied is the fifth route. In the fifth route, when the condition (V) is satisfied, it is determined that the gaming state (sub) shifts from the normal gaming state to the ART (see FIG. 106).

  In 3rd Embodiment, the ART system selection button is provided in the base part 12 (refer FIG. 5) (not shown). The ART method selection button is configured as a jog dial. By rotating the dial, one of a plurality of objects can be selected, and the selected object can be determined by pressing the button. .

  By operating the ART method selection button, the player can select one of the first to fifth routes (see FIGS. 88, 89, and 91). In the present embodiment, the gaming state (sub) can transition from the normal gaming state to ART only via the route selected using the ART method selection button. Details will be described later.

[ART winning probability and ART mode]
FIG. 85A is a diagram showing an ART mode when the ART winning probability is relatively low. FIG. 85 (b) is a diagram showing an ART mode when the ART winning probability is medium. FIG. 85 (c) is a diagram showing an ART mode when the ART winning probability is relatively high.

  The ART mode shows the characteristics of ART, and the ART in this embodiment is characterized by “the initial value of the ART end number counter”, “the number of added ART games”, and “the ART continuation rate”. Hereinafter, “the initial value of the ART end number counter”, “the number of added ART games”, and “the ART continuation rate” will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the ART game number counter (data indicating the remaining number of unit games executed in the ART) is managed in the ART. Specifically, in the first embodiment, when it is determined that the ART operates, “50” is set as an initial value in the ART game number counter. Each time a unit game is executed once in ART (excluding special ART), the value of the ART game number counter is decremented by one. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of ART games is to be increased (added), the value of the ART game number counter is added by the number of added games. Then, when the value of the ART game number counter becomes 0, the ART ends.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the ART end number counter and the ART game number counter are managed in ART.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the ART is activated, an “initial value” is set in the ART end number counter (see FIG. 97). Each time a medal is paid out in ART, the value of the ART end number counter is subtracted by the number of payouts. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of ART games is to be increased (added), the value of the ART game number counter is added by the number of added games (steps S1003, S1006, and S1008 in FIG. 69). reference).

  The value of the ART game number counter is not subtracted while the value of the ART end number counter is greater than zero. When the value of the ART end number counter reaches 0, subtraction of the value of the ART game number counter starts. Every time a unit game is executed in ART, the value of the ART game number counter is decremented by one. . Then, when the value of the ART game number counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not to continue ART by an ART continuing lottery. If the ART continuation lottery is won, the “initial value” is set again in the ART end number counter and the ART continues. If the ART continuation lottery is not won, the ART ends (see FIG. 107).

  The “ART end number counter (initial value)” shown in FIG. 85 is a value that is set in the ART end number counter when it is determined that the ART is to operate. “ART additional game number” is an expected value of the total number of games added during the ART period. “ART continuation rate” is the probability of winning an ART continuation lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 85, in the present embodiment, nine ART modes ((i) to (ix)) are provided. The player can select one of the nine ART modes ((i) to (ix)) by operating the above-described ART method selection button (see FIGS. 90 and 92). . When the ART is activated, the ART is executed so that the selected ART mode is obtained.

  When the ART mode (i) is selected, the “initial value of the ART end number counter” is a medium value (300), the “art addition game number” is a relatively large value, and the “ART continuation” The ART is controlled so that the “rate” becomes a relatively small value (25%).

  When the ART mode (ii) is selected, “the initial value of the ART end number counter” is a relatively large value (500), “the number of added ART games” is a medium value, and “ART continuation” The ART is controlled so that the “rate” becomes a relatively small value (25%).

  When the ART mode (iii) is selected, “the initial value of the ART end number counter” is a medium value (300), “the number of added ART games” is a medium value, and “ART continuation rate” ”Is controlled so that“ ”becomes a medium value (50%).

  When the ART mode (iv) is selected, the “initial value of the ART end number counter” is a relatively small value (100), the “ART additional game number” is a medium value, and the “ART continuation” The ART is controlled so that the “rate” becomes a medium value (50%).

  When the ART mode (v) is selected, the “initial value of the ART end number counter” is a medium value (300), the “ART added game number” is a relatively small value, and the “ART continuation” The ART is controlled so that the “rate” becomes a medium value (50%).

  When the ART mode (vi) is selected, the “initial value of the ART end number counter” is a medium value (300), the “ART added game number” is a medium value, and the “ART continuation rate” "Is controlled so that" "becomes a relatively small value (25%).

  When the ART mode (vii) is selected, the “initial value of the ART end number counter” is a relatively small value (100), the “ART added game number” is a relatively small value, and “ART The ART is controlled so that the “continuation rate” becomes a medium value (50%).

  When the ART mode (viii) is selected, the “initial value of the ART end number counter” is a medium value (300), the “ART added game number” is a relatively small value, and “ART continuation” The ART is controlled so that the “rate” becomes a relatively small value (25%).

  When the ART mode (ix) is selected, the “initial value of the ART end number counter” becomes a relatively small value (100), the “art addition game number” becomes a medium value, and the “ART continuation” The ART is controlled so that the “rate” becomes a relatively small value (25%).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the ART mode is associated with the probability of winning an ART lottery (ART winning probability), and the ART lottery is performed based on the ART winning probability corresponding to the selected ART mode. Is called. As the ART winning probability corresponding to the ART mode, “low” (low ART winning probability), “medium” (medium ART winning probability), and “high” (high ART winning probability) are provided.

  ART modes (i) to (iii) correspond to a low ART winning probability, and when any of the ART modes (i) to (iii) is selected, the ART modes (iv) to (iv) to The ART winning probability is lower than when any of (ix) is selected. Therefore, selecting any one of the ART modes (i) to (iii) is synonymous with selecting a low ART winning probability.

  ART modes (iv) to (vi) correspond to medium ART winning probability, and when any of ART modes (iv) to (vi) is selected, ART modes (i) to (vi) The ART winning probability is higher than when any of (iii) is selected, and the ART winning probability is lower than when any of the ART modes (vii) to (ix) is selected. Therefore, selecting any one of the ART modes (iv) to (vi) is synonymous with selecting the intermediate ART winning probability.

  ART modes (vii) to (ix) correspond to high ART winning probabilities, and when any of the ART modes (vii) to (ix) is selected, the ART modes (i) to (ix) The ART winning probability is higher than when any of (vi) is selected. Therefore, selecting any one of the ART modes (vii) to (ix) is synonymous with selecting a high ART winning probability.

  In the present embodiment, the ART is controlled such that the lower the ART winning probability corresponding to the ART mode, the greater the number of unit games that are executed after the ART is activated until the ART is terminated.

  The number of unit games executed after ART is activated until ART is ended is indicated by a combination of “initial value of ART end number counter”, “art number of added games”, and “ART continuation rate”. It is.

  That is, the greater the “initial value of the ART end number counter”, the greater the number of unit games executed until the value of the ART end number counter reaches zero. The number of unit games that are executed before the game ends may increase. In addition, since the number of unit games executed until the value of the ART game number counter reaches 0 increases as the “number of ART added games” increases, the ART ends after the ART is activated. The number of unit games executed until then can be increased. Also, the greater the “ART continuation rate”, the higher the probability that the ART will continue, so the number of unit games that are executed after the ART is activated until the ART is terminated may also increase.

  Specifically, based on the above assumption, the ART winning probability (low ART winning probability) when the ART mode (i) is selected is the ART winning probability (medium) when the ART mode (iv) is selected. Lower than the ART winning probability). On the other hand, when comparing the ART mode (i) and the ART mode (iv), the “ART continuation rate” is larger in the ART mode (iv), but the “ART end number counter initial value” and “ART addition” The “game number” is larger in the ART mode (i). As a result, when the ART mode (i) is selected, the unit game executed before the ART is ended after the ART is operated, compared to the case where the ART mode (iv) is selected. The number of times can increase.

  Similarly, the ART winning probability (low ART winning probability) when the ART mode (i) is selected is lower than the ART winning probability (medium ART winning probability) when the ART mode (v) is selected. . On the other hand, comparing the ART mode (i) and the ART mode (v), the “initial value of the ART end number counter” is the same, and the “ART continuation rate” is larger in the ART mode (v). The “ART added game number” is larger in the ART mode (i). As a result, when the ART mode (i) is selected, the unit game executed before the ART is ended after the ART is operated, compared to the case where the ART mode (v) is selected. The number of times can increase.

  Similarly, the ART winning probability (low ART winning probability) when the ART mode (i) is selected is lower than the ART winning probability (medium ART winning probability) when the ART mode (vi) is selected. . On the other hand, when the ART mode (i) and the ART mode (vi) are compared, the “initial value of the ART end number counter” and the “ART continuation rate” are the same, but the “ART added game number” is the ART mode. (I) is larger. As a result, when the ART mode (i) is selected, the unit game executed before the ART is ended after the ART is operated, compared to the case where the ART mode (vi) is selected. The number of times can increase.

  Similarly, the ART winning probability (low ART winning probability) when the ART mode (ii) is selected is lower than the ART winning probability (medium ART winning probability) when the ART mode (iv) is selected. . On the other hand, when the ART mode (ii) and the ART mode (iv) are compared, the “ART added game number” is the same, and the “ART continuation rate” is larger in the ART mode (iv), but “ART The “initial value of the end number counter” is larger in the ART mode (ii). As a result, when the ART mode (ii) is selected, the unit game that is executed after the ART is activated until the ART is terminated, as compared with the case where the ART mode (iv) is selected. The number of times can increase.

  Similarly, the ART winning probability (low ART winning probability) when the ART mode (ii) is selected is lower than the ART winning probability (medium ART winning probability) when the ART mode (v) is selected. . On the other hand, comparing the ART mode (ii) and the ART mode (v), the “ART continuation rate” is larger in the ART mode (v), but the “ART end number counter initial value” and “ART addition” The “game number” is larger in the ART mode (ii). As a result, when the ART mode (ii) is selected, the unit game executed before the ART is terminated after the ART is operated, compared to the case where the ART mode (v) is selected. The number of times can increase.

  Similarly, the ART winning probability (low ART winning probability) when the ART mode (ii) is selected is lower than the ART winning probability (medium ART winning probability) when the ART mode (vi) is selected. . On the other hand, when the ART mode (ii) and the ART mode (vi) are compared, the “ART added game number” and the “ART continuation rate” are the same, but the “ART end number counter initial value” is the ART mode. (Ii) is larger. As a result, when the ART mode (ii) is selected, the unit game that is executed after the ART is activated until the ART is terminated, as compared with the case where the ART mode (vi) is selected. The number of times can increase.

  Similarly, the ART winning probability (low ART winning probability) when the ART mode (iii) is selected is lower than the ART winning probability (medium ART winning probability) when the ART mode (iv) is selected. . On the other hand, when the ART mode (iii) and the ART mode (iv) are compared, the “ART additional game number” and the “ART continuation rate” are the same, but the “ART end number counter initial value” is the ART mode. (Iii) is larger. As a result, when the ART mode (iii) is selected, the unit game that is executed after the ART is activated until the ART is terminated, as compared with the case where the ART mode (iv) is selected. The number of times can increase.

  Similarly, the ART winning probability (low ART winning probability) when the ART mode (iii) is selected is lower than the ART winning probability (medium ART winning probability) when the ART mode (v) is selected. . On the other hand, when the ART mode (iii) and the ART mode (v) are compared, the “initial value of the ART end number counter” and the “ART continuation rate” are the same, but the “ART added game number” is the ART mode. (Iii) is larger. Thereby, when the ART mode (iii) is selected, the unit game that is executed after the ART is activated until the ART is ended, compared to the case where the ART mode (v) is selected. The number of times can increase.

  Similarly, the ART winning probability (low ART winning probability) when the ART mode (iii) is selected is lower than the ART winning probability (medium ART winning probability) when the ART mode (vi) is selected. . On the other hand, when the ART mode (iii) and the ART mode (vi) are compared, the “initial value of the ART end number counter” and the “ART additional game number” are the same, but the “ART continuation rate” is the ART mode. (Iii) is larger. As a result, when the ART mode (iii) is selected, the unit game that is executed after the ART is activated until the ART is terminated, as compared with the case where the ART mode (vi) is selected. The number of times can increase.

  Similarly, the ART winning probability (medium ART winning probability) when the ART mode (iv) is selected is lower than the ART winning probability (high ART winning probability) when the ART mode (vii) is selected. . On the other hand, when the ART mode (iv) and the ART mode (vii) are compared, the “initial value of the ART end number counter” and the “ART continuation rate” are the same, but the “ART added game number” is the ART mode. (Iv) is larger. As a result, when the ART mode (iv) is selected, the unit game that is executed after the ART is activated until the ART is ended, as compared with the case where the ART mode (vii) is selected. The number of times can increase.

  Similarly, the ART winning probability (medium ART winning probability) when the ART mode (iv) is selected is lower than the ART winning probability (high ART winning probability) when the ART mode (viii) is selected. . On the other hand, when comparing the ART mode (iv) and the ART mode (viii), the “initial value of the ART end number counter” is larger in the ART mode (viii), but the “art addition number of games” and “ART The “continuation rate” is larger in the ART mode (iv). As a result, when the ART mode (iv) is selected, the unit game that is executed after the ART is activated until the ART is ended, as compared with the case where the ART mode (viii) is selected. The number of times can increase.

  Similarly, the ART winning probability (medium ART winning probability) when the ART mode (iv) is selected is lower than the ART winning probability (high ART winning probability) when the ART mode (ix) is selected. . On the other hand, when the ART mode (iv) and the ART mode (ix) are compared, the “initial value of the ART end number counter” and the “ART additional game number” are the same, but the “ART continuation rate” is the ART mode. (Iv) is larger. As a result, when the ART mode (iv) is selected, the unit game that is executed after the ART is activated until the ART is ended, as compared with the case where the ART mode (ix) is selected. The number of times can increase.

  Similarly, the ART winning probability (medium ART winning probability) when the ART mode (v) is selected is lower than the ART winning probability (high ART winning probability) when the ART mode (vii) is selected. . On the other hand, when the ART mode (v) and the ART mode (vii) are compared, the “ART added game number” and the “ART continuation rate” are the same, but the “ART end number counter initial value” is the ART mode. (V) is larger. As a result, when the ART mode (v) is selected, the unit game that is executed from when the ART is activated to when the ART is terminated is compared with the case where the ART mode (vii) is selected. The number of times can increase.

  Similarly, the ART winning probability (medium ART winning probability) when the ART mode (v) is selected is lower than the ART winning probability (high ART winning probability) when the ART mode (viii) is selected. . On the other hand, when the ART mode (v) and the ART mode (viii) are compared, the “initial value of the ART end number counter” and the “ART additional game number” are the same, but the “ART continuation rate” is the ART mode. (V) is larger. As a result, when the ART mode (v) is selected, the unit game that is executed after the ART is activated until the ART is terminated, as compared with the case where the ART mode (viii) is selected. The number of times can increase.

  Similarly, the ART winning probability (medium ART winning probability) when the ART mode (v) is selected is lower than the ART winning probability (high ART winning probability) when the ART mode (ix) is selected. . On the other hand, when comparing the ART mode (v) and the ART mode (ix), the “ART added game number” is larger in the ART mode (ix), but the “ART end number counter initial value” and “ART The “continuation rate” is larger in the ART mode (v). As a result, when the ART mode (v) is selected, the unit game that is executed from when the ART is activated to when the ART is terminated is compared with the case where the ART mode (ix) is selected. The number of times can increase.

  Similarly, the ART winning probability (medium ART winning probability) when the ART mode (vi) is selected is lower than the ART winning probability (high ART winning probability) when the ART mode (vii) is selected. . On the other hand, when comparing the ART mode (vi) and the ART mode (vii), the “ART continuation rate” is larger in the ART mode (vii), but the “ART end number counter initial value” and “ART addition” The “game number” is larger in the ART mode (vi). As a result, when the ART mode (vi) is selected, the unit game executed before the ART is finished after the ART is operated, compared to the case where the ART mode (vii) is selected. The number of times can increase.

  Similarly, the ART winning probability (medium ART winning probability) when the ART mode (vi) is selected is lower than the ART winning probability (high ART winning probability) when the ART mode (viii) is selected. . On the other hand, when comparing the ART mode (vi) and the ART mode (viii), the “initial value of the ART end number counter” and the “ART continuation rate” are the same, but the “ART added game number” is the ART mode. (Vi) is larger. As a result, when the ART mode (vi) is selected, the unit game that is executed after the ART is activated until the ART is finished, as compared with the case where the ART mode (viii) is selected. The number of times can increase.

  Similarly, the ART winning probability (medium ART winning probability) when the ART mode (vi) is selected is lower than the ART winning probability (high ART winning probability) when the ART mode (ix) is selected. . On the other hand, when the ART mode (vi) and the ART mode (ix) are compared, the “ART added game number” and the “ART continuation rate” are the same, but the “ART end number counter initial value” is the ART mode. (Vi) is larger. As a result, when the ART mode (vi) is selected, the unit game that is executed from when the ART is activated to when the ART is terminated is compared with the case where the ART mode (ix) is selected. The number of times can increase.

  As described above, the lower the ART winning probability corresponding to the ART mode, the greater the number of unit games that are executed after the ART is activated until the ART is terminated. When the ART winning probability is low, the ART is difficult to operate. Instead, since many ART games can be performed if the ART is operated, it is possible to increase the number of balls in the ART.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, in the present embodiment, one ART transition route among the first route to the fifth route can be obtained by the player operating the ART method selection button. And one of the ART modes (i) to (ix) can be selected.

<Processing when receiving a start command>
The start command reception process performed in step S756 of FIG. 58 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing a start command reception process performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes of steps S2801 to S2809. These processes are the same as the processes of steps S801 to S809 in FIG.

  After executing the process of step S2802, step S2804, step S2806, step S2808, or step S2809, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART method selection process (step S2810). The ART method selection process is a process related to the ART method selection. The ART method is a concept including an ART transition route and an ART mode. The ART method selection processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the processing of step S2810, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<ART method selection processing>
The ART method selection process performed in step S2810 of FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an ART method selection process performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the value of the ART method selection game number counter (step S3101). In this process, the sub CPU 102 causes the sub RAM 103 to store a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the ART method selection game number counter stored in the sub RAM 103 as a new value of the ART method selection game number counter. The value of the ART method selection game number counter is a value that is cumulatively counted each time a unit game is executed. As will be described below, when the value of the ART method selection game number counter reaches a specific value (100, 200, 300, or 500), the ART transition route and ART mode are given to the player. An opportunity to choose is provided.

  After executing the processing of step S3101, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the ART method selection game number counter is 100 (step S3102).

  When determining that the value of the ART method selection game number counter is 100, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART transition route 2 selection process (step S3103).

  The ART migration route 2 selection process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing ART transition route 2 selection processing performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the ART transfer route 2 selection process, first, the sub CPU 102 determines two ART transfer routes from among the first route to the fifth route (see FIG. 84) by lottery (step S3121).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 displays an ART transition route selection screen on the liquid crystal display device 11 (step S3122). In this process, the sub CPU 102 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display images corresponding to the two ART transition routes determined in step S3121. The images corresponding to the two ART transfer routes constitute an ART transfer route selection screen. For example, when the first route and the second route are determined in step S3121, the sub CPU 102 uses the image corresponding to the first route (first route selection image) and the second route as the ART transition route selection screen. An image corresponding to the route (second route selection image) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. At this time, an image corresponding to one ART transition route (for example, a first route selection image) is highlighted. The player can switch the highlighted image from the image corresponding to one ART transition route to the image corresponding to another ART transition route by rotating the dial of the ART method selection button.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines an ART transition route in accordance with the operation of the ART method selection button (step S3123). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a detection signal issued when the ART method selection button is pressed is received. If it is determined that the detection signal has been received, the sub CPU 102 specifies one ART transition route corresponding to the image highlighted at that time. For example, if the first route selection image is highlighted, the sub CPU 102 specifies the first route as one ART transition route, and if the second route selection image is highlighted, the sub CPU 102 identifies one ART transition route. To specify the second route.

  Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines a flag (first route selection flag corresponding to the first route, second flag corresponding to one ART transition route corresponding to the image highlighted when the detection signal is received). A second route selection flag corresponding to the second route, a third route selection flag corresponding to the third route, a fourth route selection flag corresponding to the fourth route, or a fifth route selection corresponding to the fifth route. Flag) on.

  Note that if the detection signal is not received within a predetermined time after the ART transition route selection screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the sub CPU 102 corresponds to the image highlighted when the predetermined time has elapsed. A flag corresponding to one ART transition route to be set is set to ON.

  By executing the process of step S3123, one of the first route to the fifth route is selected as the ART transition route, and then the normal gaming state is shifted to ART via the ART transition route. It becomes possible. In this way, the player can select one of the first to fifth routes as the ART transition route. However, the ART transition route that can be selected by the player is limited to two routes determined by lottery, and it is not possible to select any route from the first route to the fifth route. Absent.

  After executing the process of step S3123, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  As described above, the ART transition route 2 selection process performed in step S3103 in FIG. 87 has been described with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG.

  After executing the processing of step S3103, the sub CPU 102 ends the subroutine shown in FIG.

  When determining that the value of the ART method selection game number counter is not 100 in step S3102, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the ART method selection game number counter is 200 (step S3104).

  When determining that the value of the ART method selection game number counter is 200, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART transition route 3 selection process (step S3105).

  The ART migration route 3 selection process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing ART transition route 3 selection processing performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the ART transfer route 3 selection process, first, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART transfer route selection lottery (step S3131). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the winning or non-winning by performing lottery based on the random number value.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART transfer route selection lottery has been won (step S3132). If it is determined that the ART transfer route selection lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the ART transfer route selection lottery has been won, the sub CPU 102 determines three ART transfer routes from the first route to the fifth route (see FIG. 84) by lottery (step S3133). .

  Next, the sub CPU 102 displays an ART transition route selection screen on the liquid crystal display device 11 (step S3134). In this process, the sub CPU 102 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display images corresponding to the three ART transition routes determined in step S3133. The images corresponding to the three ART transfer routes constitute an ART transfer route selection screen. For example, when the first route, the second route, and the third route are determined in step S3133, the sub CPU 102 displays an image corresponding to the first route (first route selection image) as the ART transition route selection screen. ) And an image corresponding to the second route (second route selection image) and an image corresponding to the third route (third route selection image) are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. At this time, an image corresponding to one ART transition route (for example, a first route selection image) is highlighted. The player can switch the highlighted image from the image corresponding to one ART transition route to the image corresponding to another ART transition route by rotating the dial of the ART method selection button.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines an ART transition route in accordance with the operation of the ART method selection button (step S3135). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a detection signal issued when the ART method selection button is pressed is received. If it is determined that the detection signal has been received, the sub CPU 102 specifies one ART transition route corresponding to the image highlighted at that time. For example, if the first route selection image is highlighted, the sub CPU 102 specifies the first route as one ART transition route, and if the second route selection image is highlighted, the sub CPU 102 identifies one ART transition route. If the third route selection image is highlighted, the third route is specified as one ART transition route.

  Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines a flag (first route selection flag corresponding to the first route, second flag corresponding to one ART transition route corresponding to the image highlighted when the detection signal is received). A second route selection flag corresponding to the second route, a third route selection flag corresponding to the third route, a fourth route selection flag corresponding to the fourth route, or a fifth route selection corresponding to the fifth route. Flag) on.

  Note that if the detection signal is not received within a predetermined time after the ART transition route selection screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the sub CPU 102 corresponds to the image highlighted when the predetermined time has elapsed. A flag corresponding to one ART transition route to be set is set to ON.

  By executing the process of step S3135, any one of the first route to the fifth route is selected as the ART transition route, and then transitions from the normal gaming state to the ART via the ART transition route. It becomes possible. In this way, the player can select one of the first to fifth routes as the ART transition route. However, the ART transition route that can be selected by the player is limited to the three routes determined by lottery, and it is not possible to select any route from the first route to the fifth route. Absent.

  However, in FIG. 89 (ART method selection game number counter value: 200), the number of ART transition routes that can be selected by the player (three) is shown in FIG. 88 (ART method selection game number counter value: 100). The number of ART transition routes that can be selected by the player is increased (two).

  After executing the process of step S3135, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  As described above, the ART transition route 3 selection process performed in step S3105 in FIG. 87 has been described with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG.

  After executing the process of step S3105, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART mode 8 selection process (step S3106).

  The ART mode 8 selection process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an ART mode 8 selection process performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the ART mode 8 selection process, first, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART mode selection lottery (step S3141). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the winning or non-winning by performing lottery based on the random number value.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART mode selection lottery has been won (step S3142). When determining that the ART mode selection lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the ART mode selection lottery has been won, the sub CPU 102 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display an ART mode selection screen corresponding to the ART modes (ii) to (ix) (see FIG. 85) (step S3143). ). In this process, the sub CPU 102 selects, as the ART mode selection screen, an image corresponding to the ART mode (ii) (ART mode (ii) selection image) and an image corresponding to the ART mode (iii) (ART mode (iii) selection). Image), an image corresponding to the ART mode (iv) (ART mode (iv) selected image), an image corresponding to the ART mode (v) (ART mode (v) selected image), and an ART mode (vi) Corresponding image (ART mode (vi) selection image), image corresponding to ART mode (vii) (ART mode (vii) selection image), and image corresponding to ART mode (viii) (ART mode (viii) selection) Image) and an image corresponding to the ART mode (ix) (ART mode (ix) selection image) are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. At this time, an image (for example, ART mode (ii)) corresponding to one ART mode is highlighted. The player can switch the image to be highlighted from an image corresponding to one ART mode to an image corresponding to another ART mode by rotating the dial of the ART method selection button.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines the ART mode in accordance with the operation of the ART method selection button (step S3144). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a detection signal issued when the ART method selection button is pressed is received. When determining that the detection signal has been received, the sub CPU 102 specifies one ART mode corresponding to the image highlighted at that time.

  Specifically, in this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines a flag corresponding to one ART mode corresponding to the image highlighted at the time of receiving the detection signal (ART mode selection flag corresponding to the ART mode (ii)). (Ii), ART mode selection flag (iii) corresponding to ART mode (iii), ART mode selection flag (iv) corresponding to ART mode (iv), ART mode selection flag (v) corresponding to ART mode (v) ), An ART mode selection flag (vi) corresponding to the ART mode (vi), an ART mode selection flag (vii) corresponding to the ART mode (vii), an ART mode selection flag (viii) corresponding to the ART mode (viii), Alternatively, the ART mode selection flag (ix) corresponding to the ART mode (ix) is set to ON.

  If the detection signal is not received within a predetermined time after the ART mode selection screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the sub CPU 102 corresponds to the image highlighted when the predetermined time has elapsed. A flag corresponding to one ART mode is set to ON.

  By executing the processing of step S3144, any one of the ART modes (ii) to (ix) is selected, and when the ART is activated thereafter, the ART is controlled based on the selected ART mode. Will be. In addition, when the conditions (see (I) to (IV) in FIG. 84) that trigger the ART lottery are satisfied, based on the ART winning probability (see FIG. 85) corresponding to the selected ART mode, ART lottery will be performed. In this way, the player can select one of the ART modes (ii) to (ix), but cannot select the ART mode (i).

  After executing the process of step S3144, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  The ART mode 8 selection process performed in step S3106 in FIG. 87 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG.

  After executing the processing of step S3106, the sub CPU 102 ends the subroutine shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S3104 that the value of the ART method selection game number counter is not 200, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the ART method selection game number counter is 300 (step S3107).

  If it is determined that the value of the ART method selection game number counter is 300, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART transition route 5 selection process (step S3108).

  The ART transition route 5 selection process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an ART transition route 5-selection process performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the ART transfer route 5 selection process, first, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART transfer route selection lottery (step S3151). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the winning or non-winning by performing lottery based on the random number value.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART transfer route selection lottery has been won (step S3152). If it is determined that the ART transfer route selection lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the ART transfer route selection lottery has been won, the sub CPU 102 displays the ART transfer route selection screen on the liquid crystal display device 11 (step S3153). In this process, the sub CPU 102 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display images corresponding to five ART transition routes (first route to fifth route). Images corresponding to the five ART transfer routes constitute an ART transfer route selection screen. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 102 uses the ART transition route selection screen as an image corresponding to the first route (first route selection image) and an image corresponding to the second route (second route selection image). And an image corresponding to the third route (third route selection image), an image corresponding to the fourth route (fourth route selection image), and an image corresponding to the fifth route (fifth route selection image). The image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. At this time, an image corresponding to one ART transition route (for example, a first route selection image) is highlighted. The player can switch the highlighted image from the image corresponding to one ART transition route to the image corresponding to another ART transition route by rotating the dial of the ART method selection button.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines an ART transition route in accordance with the operation of the ART method selection button (step S3154). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a detection signal issued when the ART method selection button is pressed is received. If it is determined that the detection signal has been received, the sub CPU 102 specifies one ART transition route corresponding to the image highlighted at that time.

  Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 102 selects a flag (first route selection corresponding to the first route) corresponding to one ART transition route corresponding to the image highlighted when the detection signal is received. A flag, a second route selection flag corresponding to the second route, a third route selection flag corresponding to the third route, a fourth route selection flag corresponding to the fourth route, or a fifth route (5th route selection flag) is set to ON.

  Note that if the detection signal is not received within a predetermined time after the ART transition route selection screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the sub CPU 102 corresponds to the image highlighted when the predetermined time has elapsed. A flag corresponding to one ART transition route to be set is set to ON.

  By executing the process of step S3154, any one of the first route to the fifth route is selected as the ART transition route, and then the normal gaming state is shifted to ART via the ART transition route. It becomes possible.

  In this way, in FIG. 91 (value of ART method selection game number counter: 300), the player moves the game from FIG. 88 (ART method selection game number counter value: 100) and FIG. 89 (ART method selection game number of games). Unlike the case of the counter value: 200), any route from the first route to the fifth route can be selected as the ART transition route.

  After executing the processing of step S3154, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART transition route has been changed (step S3155). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the set flag has been changed before and after the process of step S3154 is executed.

  When determining that the ART transition route has been changed, the sub CPU 102 clears the ART method selection game number counter (step S3156). That is, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” in the ART method selection game number counter.

  If it is determined in step S3155 that the ART transition route has not been changed, or after executing the processing of step S3156, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  As described above, the ART transition route 5 selection process performed in step S3108 in FIG. 87 has been described with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG.

  After executing the processing of step S3108, the sub CPU 102 ends the subroutine shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S3107 that the value of the ART method selection game number counter is not 300, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the ART method selection game number counter is 500 (step S3109).

  When determining that the value of the ART method selection game number counter is not 500, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the value of the ART method selection game number counter is 500, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART mode 9 selection process (step S3110).

  The ART mode 9 selection process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an ART mode 9 selection process performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the ART mode 9 selection process, first, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART mode selection lottery (step S3161). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the winning or non-winning by performing lottery based on the random number value.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART mode selection lottery has been won (step S3162).

  If it is determined that the ART mode selection lottery has been won, the sub CPU 102 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display an ART mode selection screen corresponding to the ART modes (i) to (ix) (see FIG. 85) (step S3163). In this process, the sub CPU 102 selects, as the ART mode selection screen, an image corresponding to the ART mode (i) (ART mode (i) selection image) and an image corresponding to the ART mode (ii) (ART mode (ii) selection). Image), an image corresponding to the ART mode (iii) (ART mode (iii) selected image), an image corresponding to the ART mode (iv) (ART mode (iv) selected image), and an ART mode (v) Corresponding image (ART mode (v) selection image), image corresponding to ART mode (vi) (ART mode (vi) selection image), and image corresponding to ART mode (vii) (ART mode (vii) selection) Image), an image corresponding to the ART mode (viii) (ART mode (viii) selection image), and an image corresponding to the ART mode (ix) (ART mode (ix) selection image). It is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. At this time, an image (for example, ART mode (ii)) corresponding to one ART mode is highlighted. The player can switch the image to be highlighted from an image corresponding to one ART mode to an image corresponding to another ART mode by rotating the dial of the ART method selection button.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines the ART mode according to the operation of the ART method selection button (step S3164). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a detection signal issued when the ART method selection button is pressed is received. When determining that the detection signal has been received, the sub CPU 102 specifies one ART mode corresponding to the image highlighted at that time.

  Specifically, in this processing, the sub CPU 102 determines a flag corresponding to one ART mode corresponding to the image highlighted at the time of receiving the detection signal (ART mode selection flag corresponding to the ART mode (i)). (I) ART mode selection flag (ii) corresponding to ART mode (ii), ART mode selection flag (iii) corresponding to ART mode (iii), ART mode selection flag (iv) corresponding to ART mode (iv) ), An ART mode selection flag (v) corresponding to the ART mode (v), an ART mode selection flag (vi) corresponding to the ART mode (vi), an ART mode selection flag (vii) corresponding to the ART mode (vii), ART mode selection flag (viii) corresponding to ART mode (viii), or ART mode selection flag (i) corresponding to ART mode (ix) )) Is set to turn on.

  If the detection signal is not received within a predetermined time after the ART mode selection screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the sub CPU 102 corresponds to the image highlighted when the predetermined time has elapsed. A flag corresponding to one ART mode is set to ON.

  By executing the processing of step S3164, any one of the ART modes (i) to (ix) is selected, and when the ART is activated thereafter, the ART is controlled based on the selected ART mode. Will be. In addition, when the conditions (see (I) to (IV) in FIG. 84) that trigger the ART lottery are satisfied, based on the ART winning probability (see FIG. 85) corresponding to the selected ART mode, ART lottery will be performed. In this way, the player can select one of the ART modes (i) to (ix).

  Here, as described with reference to FIG. 90, when the value of the ART method selection game number counter is 200, the player cannot select the ART mode (i), but the ART method selection game. When the value of the number counter reaches 500, the player can select any ART mode including the ART mode (i). On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 91, when the value of the ART method selection game number counter is 300 and the ART transition route is changed, the ART method selection game number counter is cleared and ART The count of the number of method selection games is restarted from 0 (see step S3156).

  Therefore, in order to select the ART mode (i), when the value of the ART method selection game number counter is 300, it is necessary not to change the ART transition route. By adopting such a configuration, “when the value of the ART method selection game number counter is 300, the ART transition route is changed” and “the value of the ART method selection game number counter reaches 500”. It is possible to make the player struggle with “selecting the ART mode (i) after waiting for the game” and to improve the interest of the game.

  If it is determined in step S3162 that the ART mode selection lottery has not been won, or after executing the processing of step S3164, the sub CPU 102 clears the ART method selection game number counter (step S3165). That is, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” in the ART method selection game number counter. Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

  The ART mode 9 selection process performed in step S3110 of FIG. 87 has been described above using FIG. Returning to FIG.

  After executing the processing of step S3110, the sub CPU 102 ends the subroutine shown in FIG.

<Normal processing>
The normal process performed in step S2809 in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing normal processing performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the normal process shown in FIG. 93, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes of steps S2821 to S2834. Of these processes, the ART lottery process from the precursor (step S2822) and the ART lottery process from the MB challenge The processes other than (Step S2831) are the same processes as the processes other than Step S822 and Step S831 in the processes shown in FIG. 60 (Steps S821 to S834), and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

<ART lottery processing from precursors>
The ART lottery process from the precursor performed in step S2822 of FIG. 93 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an ART lottery process from a precursor performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current mode is a high probability mode (step S3201). Since information indicating the current mode is stored in the sub RAM 103, the sub CPU 102 can recognize the current mode by referring to the sub RAM 103.

  When determining that the current mode is not the high probability mode, the sub CPU 102 executes a mode transition lottery (step S3202). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the winning or non-winning by performing lottery based on the random number value.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the mode transition lottery has been won (step S3203).

  When determining that the mode transition lottery has been won, the sub CPU 102 shifts the mode from the normal mode to the high probability mode (step S3204). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 stores information indicating the high probability mode in the sub RAM 103 as information indicating the current mode.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “50” in the high probability mode game number counter (step S3205). The value of the high probability mode game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games executed in the high probability mode, and is stored in the sub RAM 103.

  If it is determined in step S3201 that the current mode is the high probability mode, if it is determined in step S3203 that the mode transition lottery has not been won, or after executing the process of step S3205, the sub CPU 102 It is determined whether or not the mode is a high probability mode (step S3206).

  When determining that the current mode is not the high probability mode, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the first route selection flag is set to ON (step S3207). The first route selection flag is a flag indicating that the first route (see (I) in FIG. 84) is selected as the ART transition route (step S3123 in FIG. 88, step S3135 in FIG. 89, and (See step S3154 in FIG. 91).

  When determining that the first route selection flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the first route selection flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 executes ART lottery based on the normal mode ART lottery table (step S3208). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the winning or non-winning by performing lottery based on the random number value.

  As the normal mode ART lottery table, a normal mode ART lottery table (a), a normal mode ART lottery table (b), and a normal mode ART lottery table (c) are provided. Although not shown, the lottery value is defined in the normal mode ART lottery table (a) so that the ART winning probability is lower than that in the normal mode ART lottery table (b). In the normal mode ART lottery table (c), lottery values are defined so that the ART winning probability is higher than that in the normal mode ART lottery table (b).

  The normal mode ART lottery table (a) corresponds to the ART modes (i) to (iii) (see FIG. 85A). The normal mode ART lottery table (b) corresponds to ART modes (iv) to (vi) (see FIG. 85B). The normal mode ART lottery table (c) corresponds to the ART modes (vii) to (ix) (see FIG. 85 (c)).

  In step S3208, when any of the ART modes (i) to (iii) is selected, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery based on the normal mode ART lottery table (a). Further, when any of the ART modes (iv) to (vi) is selected, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery based on the normal mode ART lottery table (b). Further, when any of the ART modes (vii) to (ix) is selected, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery based on the normal mode ART lottery table (c). The sub CPU 102 determines the ART mode (i) to (i) depending on which flag of the ART mode selection flags (i) to (ix) (see step S3144 in FIG. 90 and step S3164 in FIG. 92) is set on. It is possible to recognize which ART mode of (ix) is selected.

  In FIG. 94, when the first route (see (I) of FIG. 84) is selected as the ART transition route, the normal mode ART lottery table is provided on condition that the current mode is the normal mode. However, even if the current mode is the high probability mode, the ART lottery may be executed based on the normal mode ART lottery table.

  After executing the process of step S3208, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S3206 that the current mode is the high probability mode, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the fourth route selection flag is set on (step S3209). The fourth route selection flag is a flag indicating that the fourth route (see (IV) in FIG. 84) is selected as the ART transition route (step S3123 in FIG. 88, step S3135 in FIG. 89, and (See step S3154 in FIG. 91).

  When determining that the fourth route selection flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the fourth route selection flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery based on the high probability mode ART lottery table (step S3210). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the winning or non-winning by performing lottery based on the random number value.

  As the high probability mode ART lottery table, a high probability mode ART lottery table (a), a high probability mode ART lottery table (b), and a high probability mode ART lottery table (c) are provided. Although not shown, in the high probability mode ART lottery table (a), lottery values are defined so that the ART winning probability is lower than that in the high probability mode ART lottery table (b). In the high probability mode ART lottery table (c), lottery values are defined so that the ART winning probability is higher than that in the high probability mode ART lottery table (b).

  The high probability mode ART lottery table (a) corresponds to ART modes (i) to (iii) (see FIG. 85A). In the high probability mode ART lottery table (a), lottery values are defined such that the ART winning probability is higher than that in the normal mode ART lottery table (a).

  The high probability mode ART lottery table (b) corresponds to the ART modes (iv) to (vi) (see FIG. 85B). In the high probability mode ART lottery table (b), lottery values are defined so that the ART winning probability is higher than that in the normal mode ART lottery table (b).

  The high probability mode ART lottery table (c) corresponds to the ART modes (vii) to (ix) (see FIG. 85C). In the high probability mode ART lottery table (c), lottery values are defined so that the ART winning probability is higher than that in the normal mode ART lottery table (c).

  In step S3210, when any of the ART modes (i) to (iii) is selected, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery based on the high probability mode ART lottery table (a). Further, when any of the ART modes (iv) to (vi) is selected, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery based on the high probability mode ART lottery table (b). Further, when any of the ART modes (vii) to (ix) is selected, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery based on the high probability mode ART lottery table (c). The sub CPU 102 determines the ART mode (i) to (i) depending on which flag of the ART mode selection flags (i) to (ix) (see step S3144 in FIG. 90 and step S3164 in FIG. 92) is set on. It is possible to recognize which ART mode of (ix) is selected.

  After executing the process of step S3210, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<ART lottery processing from mid-MB challenge>
The ART lottery process from the mid-MB challenge performed in step S2831 in FIG. 93 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing ART lottery processing from an MB challenge performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the second route selection flag is set to ON (step S3221). The second route selection flag is a flag indicating that the second route (see (II) in FIG. 84) is selected as the ART transition route (step S3123 in FIG. 88, step S3135 in FIG. 89, and (See step S3154 in FIG. 91).

  When determining that the second route selection flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the second route selection flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery based on the normal mode ART lottery table (step S3222). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the winning or non-winning by performing lottery based on the random number value.

  The configuration of the normal mode ART lottery table referred to in this processing is the same as the configuration of the normal mode ART lottery table referred to in step S3208 of FIG. 94, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  Similarly to step S3208 in FIG. 94, when any of the ART modes (i) to (iii) is selected, the sub CPU 102 performs the ART lottery based on the normal mode ART lottery table (a). Run. Further, when any of the ART modes (iv) to (vi) is selected, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery based on the normal mode ART lottery table (b). Further, when any of the ART modes (vii) to (ix) is selected, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery based on the normal mode ART lottery table (c).

  In step S3222, the ART lottery may be executed based on the normal mode ART lottery table not only when the current mode is the normal mode but also when the current mode is the high probability mode. Good.

  After executing the process of step S3222, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<Precursor effect processing>
The precursor effect process performed in step S2808 of FIG. 86 will be described using FIG. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a precursor effect process performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the precursor effect process shown in FIG. 96, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes in steps S2841 to S2848. Of these processes, processes other than the ART end number counter set process (step S2846) are shown in FIG. Since the process (steps S841 to S848) is the same as the process other than step S846, description thereof is omitted here.

<ART end number counter setting process>
With reference to FIG. 97, the ART end number counter setting process performed in step S2846 in FIG. 96 will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the ART end number counter setting process performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether any one of the ART mode selection flag (iv), the ART mode selection flag (vii), and the ART mode selection flag (ix) is set to ON (step) S3241). The ART mode selection flag (iv) is a flag indicating that the ART mode (iv) (see FIG. 85B) is selected, and the ART mode selection flag (vii) is the ART mode (vii) (see FIG. 85 (c)) is selected, and the ART mode selection flag (ix) is a flag indicating that the ART mode (ix) (see FIG. 85 (c)) is selected. Yes (see step S3144 in FIG. 90 and step S3164 in FIG. 92).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that any one of the ART mode selection flag (iv), the ART mode selection flag (vii), and the ART mode selection flag (ix) is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines the ART end number counter. Is set to "100" (step S3242). As a result, when any one of the ART mode (iv), the ART mode (vii), and the ART mode (ix) is selected, the “initial value of the ART end number counter” is set to 100 (relative (Refer to FIG. 85). As described above, every time a medal is paid out in ART, the value of the ART end number counter is subtracted by the payout number. The value of the ART end number counter is stored in the sub RAM 103.

  After executing the process of step S3242, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S3241 that none of the ART mode selection flag (iv), the ART mode selection flag (vii), and the ART mode selection flag (ix) is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines the ART mode. It is determined whether the selection flag (ii) is set on (step S3243). The ART mode selection flag (ii) is a flag indicating that the ART mode (ii) (see FIG. 85A) is selected (see step S3144 in FIG. 90 and step S3164 in FIG. 92).

  When determining that the ART mode selection flag (ii) is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 sets “500” to the ART end number counter (step S3244). Thereby, when the ART mode (ii) is selected, the “initial value of the ART end number counter” becomes 500 (relatively large value) (see FIG. 85).

  After executing the process of step S3244, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S3243 that the ART mode selection flag (ii) is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 sets “300” in the ART end number counter (step S3245). Thus, when any one of the ART mode (i), the ART mode (iii), the ART mode (v), the ART mode (vi), and the ART mode (viii) is selected, “ART The “initial value of the end sheet counter” is 300 (medium value) (see FIG. 85).

  After executing the processing of step S3245, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<Processing during ART>
The processing during ART performed in step S2806 of FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the ART processing performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the ART process shown in FIG. 98, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes of steps S2881 to S2891. These processes are steps S883 to S885 of the processes shown in FIG. 63 (steps S881 to S894). Since the processing is the same as the processing other than the above, description thereof is omitted here.

<Processing upon receipt of lock production determination command>
With reference to FIG. 99, the lock effect determination command reception process performed in step S758 of FIG. 58 will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a lock effect determination command reception process performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes of steps S2941 and S2942, but these processes are the same as the processes of steps S941 and S942 in FIG.

  After executing the process of step S2942, the sub CPU 102 executes a first final added game number determination process (step S2943). The first final added game number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S2943, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S2941 that the rotation effect number determined in step S153 of FIG. 41 is not the rotation effect number 1, the sub CPU 102 executes a second final added game number determination process (step S2944). The second final added game number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the processing of step S2944, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<First final added game number determination process>
The first final added game number determination process performed in step S2943 in FIG. 99 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing a first final added game number determination process performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether any of the ART mode selection flag (v), the ART mode selection flag (vii), and the ART mode selection flag (viii) is set to ON (step) S3261). The ART mode selection flag (v) is a flag indicating that the ART mode (v) (see FIG. 85B) is selected, and the ART mode selection flag (vii) is the ART mode (vii) (see FIG. 85). 85 (c)) is selected, and the ART mode selection flag (viii) is a flag indicating that the ART mode (viii) (see FIG. 85 (c)) is selected. Yes (see step S3144 in FIG. 90 and step S3164 in FIG. 92).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that any one of the ART mode selection flag (v), the ART mode selection flag (vii), and the ART mode selection flag (viii) is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of added games Is determined by lottery from 50 games, 100 games, and 150 games (step S3262). The final added game number is the number of ART games added to the final game in the added special zone (MB gaming state) (see step S1003 in FIG. 69). When any of the ART mode (v), the ART mode (vii), and the ART mode (viii) is selected by executing the process of step S3262, the “number of added ART games” Becomes a relatively small value (see FIG. 85).

  After executing the processing of step S3262, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S3261 that none of the ART mode selection flag (v), the ART mode selection flag (vii), and the ART mode selection flag (viii) is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines the ART mode. It is determined whether or not the selection flag (i) is set on (step S3263). The ART mode selection flag (i) is a flag indicating that the ART mode (i) (see FIG. 85A) is selected (see step S3144 in FIG. 90 and step S3164 in FIG. 92).

  When determining that the ART mode selection flag (i) is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines the final added game number by lottery from 200 games, 300 games, and 500 games (step S3264). ). By executing the process of step S3264, when the ART mode (i) is selected, the “ART added game number” becomes a relatively large value (see FIG. 85).

  After executing the process of step S3264, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S3263 that the ART mode selection flag (i) is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines the final added game number by lottery from among 100 games, 200 games, and 300 games. (Step S3265). By executing the process of step S3265, one of the ART mode (ii), the ART mode (iii), the ART mode (iv), the ART mode (vi), and the ART mode (ix) is selected. If it is, the “art number of added games” becomes a medium value (see FIG. 85).

  After executing the process of step S3265, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<Second final added game number determination process>
The second final added game number determination process performed in step S2944 in FIG. 99 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a second final added game number determination process performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether any of the ART mode selection flag (v), the ART mode selection flag (vii), and the ART mode selection flag (viii) is set to ON (step) S3281).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that any one of the ART mode selection flag (v), the ART mode selection flag (vii), and the ART mode selection flag (viii) is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of added games Is determined by lottery from 0 games, 10 games, and 20 games (step S3282). If any of the ART mode (v), the ART mode (vii), and the ART mode (viii) is selected by executing the process of step S3282, the “number of added ART games” Becomes a relatively small value (see FIG. 85).

  After executing the process of step S 3282, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S3281 that none of the ART mode selection flag (v), the ART mode selection flag (vii), and the ART mode selection flag (viii) is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines the ART mode. It is determined whether or not the selection flag (i) is set to ON (step S 3283).

  If it is determined that the ART mode selection flag (i) is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines the final added game number by lottery from 50 games, 100 games, and 150 games (step S3284). ). By executing the process of step S3284, when the ART mode (i) is selected, the “ART added game number” becomes a relatively large value (see FIG. 85).

  After executing the process of step S3284, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  When it is determined in step S 3283 that the ART mode selection flag (i) is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines the final added game number from 0 games, 50 games, and 100 games by lottery. (Step S3285). By executing the process of step S3285, one of the ART mode (ii), the ART mode (iii), the ART mode (iv), the ART mode (vi), and the ART mode (ix) is selected. If it is, the “art number of added games” becomes a medium value (see FIG. 85).

  After executing the process of step S3285, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<Display command reception processing>
The display command reception process performed in step S766 of FIG. 58 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing display command reception processing performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  Of the processes shown in FIG. 102, the processes in steps S2961 to S2969 are the same as the processes in steps S961 to S969 in FIG. 67, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  If it is determined in step S2966 that none of MBs 1 to 3 has won, the sub CPU 102 executes cherry stock counter addition processing (step S2970). The cherry stock counter addition process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the processing of step S2970, the sub CPU 102 executes the processing of step S2971 to step S2973, which are the same as the processing of step S975 to step S977 in FIG. Description of is omitted.

  If it is determined in step S2965 that the special ART flag is not set to ON, or after executing the process of step S2969 or step S2973, the sub CPU 102 executes the high probability mode process (step S2974). The high probability mode process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes ART lottery processing from winning (step S2975). The ART lottery process from winning will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes ceiling processing (step S2976). The ceiling processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART end check process (step S2977). The ART end check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After executing the processing of step S2777, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<Cherry stock counter addition process>
The cherry stock counter addition process performed in step S2970 in FIG. 102 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing cherry stock counter addition processing performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether any of the ART mode selection flag (v), the ART mode selection flag (vii), and the ART mode selection flag (viii) is set to ON (step) S3301). The ART mode selection flag (v) is a flag indicating that the ART mode (v) (see FIG. 85B) is selected, and the ART mode selection flag (vii) is the ART mode (vii) (see FIG. 85). 85 (c)) is selected, and the ART mode selection flag (viii) is a flag indicating that the ART mode (viii) (see FIG. 85 (c)) is selected. Yes (see step S3144 in FIG. 90 and step S3164 in FIG. 92).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that any one of the ART mode selection flag (v), the ART mode selection flag (vii), and the ART mode selection flag (viii) is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine. To do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the ART mode selection flag (v), the ART mode selection flag (vii), and the ART mode selection flag (viii) are set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines the ART mode selection flag. It is determined whether (i) is set to ON (step S3302). The ART mode selection flag (i) is a flag indicating that the ART mode (i) (see FIG. 85A) is selected (see step S3144 in FIG. 90 and step S3164 in FIG. 92).

  When it is determined that the ART mode selection flag (i) is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes of steps S3303 to S3305. These processes are the processes of steps S970 to S972 in FIG. Since the processing is the same as that described above, description thereof is omitted here.

  If it is determined in step S3302 that the ART mode selection flag (i) is not set on, or if it is determined in step S3303 that the red 7 flag is not set on, a weak cherry is not won in step S3304. Or after executing the process of step S3305, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes of step S3306 and step S3307, which are the same as the processes of step S973 and step S974 of FIG. Since it is a process, description here is abbreviate | omitted.

  As described in the first embodiment, in this embodiment, the number of ART games is increased by the number corresponding to the value of the strong cherry stock counter (see step S1006 in FIG. 69). Further, the number of ART games is increased by the number corresponding to the value of the weak cherry stock counter (see step S1008 in FIG. 69).

  In this regard, according to the cherry stock counter addition process shown in FIG. 103, when any one of the ART mode (v), the ART mode (vii), and the ART mode (viii) is selected (step S3301: YES), strong cherry stock counter addition (see step S3307) and weak cherry stock counter addition (see step S3305) are not performed. Therefore, in this case, the “art addition game number” is a relatively small value (see FIG. 85).

  When the ART mode (i) is selected (step S3302: YES), both the strong cherry stock counter addition (see step S3307) and the weak cherry stock counter addition (see step S3305) can be performed. Accordingly, in this case, the “art addition game number” is a relatively large value (see FIG. 85).

  When any one of the ART mode (ii), the ART mode (iii), the ART mode (iv), the ART mode (vi), and the ART mode (ix) is selected (step S3301: NO, Step S3302: NO), strong cherry stock counter addition (see step S3307) can be performed, but weak cherry stock counter addition (see step S3305) is not performed. Therefore, in this case, the “art number of added games” is a medium value (see FIG. 85).

<High probability mode processing>
The high probability mode process performed in step S2974 in FIG. 102 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing a high probability mode process performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current mode is a high probability mode (step S3321). Since information indicating the current mode is stored in the sub RAM 103, the sub CPU 102 can recognize the current mode by referring to the sub RAM 103. When determining that the current mode is not the high probability mode, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the current mode is the high probability mode, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value of the high probability mode game number counter (see step S3205 in FIG. 94) (step S3322). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the high probability mode game number counter stored in the sub RAM 103 in the sub RAM 103 as a new value of the high probability mode game number counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the high probability mode game number counter is 0 (step S3323). When determining that the value of the high probability mode game number counter is not 0, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the value of the high probability mode game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 shifts the mode from the high probability mode to the normal mode (step S3324). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 stores information indicating the normal mode in the sub RAM 103 as information indicating the current mode. Thereafter, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

<ART lottery processing from winning>
With reference to FIG. 105, the ART lottery process from winning performed in step S2975 in FIG. 102 will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an ART lottery process from winning in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the third route selection flag is set to ON (step S3341). The third route selection flag is a flag indicating that the third route (see (III) in FIG. 84) is selected as the ART transition route (step S3123 in FIG. 88, step S3135 in FIG. 89, and (See step S3154 in FIG. 91).

  If it is determined that the third route selection flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the third route selection flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART preparing flag is set to ON (step S3342). The ART ready flag is a flag indicating that the ART is being prepared, and is set when triggered to move to ART (step S2845 in FIG. 96, step S3347 in FIG. 105, FIG. 106). Step S3366 and step S2986 in FIG. 109). When determining that the ART preparing flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the ART preparing flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART preparing flag is set to ON (step S3343). The ART flag is a flag indicating that ART is in progress, and is set when any of the raising replies 1 to 9 wins during ART preparation (see step S2964 in FIG. 102). If it is determined that the ART flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the ART flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the left special combination has won (step S3344). Since the display command data received in step S765 of FIG. 58 includes information indicating the display combination, the sub CPU 102 recognizes the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line by receiving the display command data. Can do. If it is determined that the left special combination has not won, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the left special combination has won, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery based on the normal mode ART lottery table (step S3345). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the winning or non-winning by performing lottery based on the random number value.

  The configuration of the normal mode ART lottery table referred to in this processing is the same as the configuration of the normal mode ART lottery table referred to in step S3208 of FIG. 94, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  Similarly to step S3208 in FIG. 94, when any of the ART modes (i) to (iii) is selected, the sub CPU 102 performs the ART lottery based on the normal mode ART lottery table (a). Run. Further, when any of the ART modes (iv) to (vi) is selected, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery based on the normal mode ART lottery table (b). Further, when any of the ART modes (vii) to (ix) is selected, the sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery based on the normal mode ART lottery table (c).

  In step S3345, not only when the current mode is the normal mode but also when the current mode is the high probability mode, the ART lottery may be executed based on the normal mode ART lottery table. Good.

  After executing the process of step S3345, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (step S3346). If it is determined that the ART lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the ART lottery has been won, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART preparing flag to ON (step S3347). Thereby, the push order for winning the winning lips 1 to 9 is notified (see step S862 in FIG. 62), and when the raising lips 1 to 9 are winning, the state shifts to ART (step in FIG. 102). (See S2964).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes ART end number counter setting processing (step S3348). The ART end number counter setting process is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 97, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. After executing the process of step S3348, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<Ceiling treatment>
The ceiling process performed in step S2976 in FIG. 102 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing ceiling processing performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the fifth route selection flag is set to ON (step S3361). The fifth route selection flag is a flag indicating that the fifth route (see (V) in FIG. 84) is selected as the ART transition route (step S3123 in FIG. 88, step S3135 in FIG. 89, and (See step S3154 in FIG. 91).

  When determining that the fifth route selection flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the fifth route selection flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART preparing flag is set to ON (step S3362). The ART ready flag is a flag indicating that the ART is being prepared, and is set when triggered to move to ART (step S2845 in FIG. 96, step S3347 in FIG. 105, FIG. 106). Step S3366 and step S2986 in FIG. 109). When determining that the ART preparing flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the ART preparing flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART preparing flag is set to ON (step S3363). The ART flag is a flag indicating that ART is in progress, and is set when any of the raising replies 1 to 9 wins during ART preparation (see step S2964 in FIG. 102). If it is determined that the ART flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the ART flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the value of the ceiling counter (step S3364). In this process, the sub CPU 102 causes the sub RAM 103 to store a value obtained by adding 1 to the ceiling counter value stored in the sub RAM 103 as a new ceiling counter value.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the ceiling counter is 1000 (step S3365). When determining that the value of the ceiling counter is not 1000, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the value of the ceiling counter is 1000, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART preparing flag to ON (step S3366). Thereby, the push order for winning the winning lips 1 to 9 is notified (see step S862 in FIG. 62), and when the raising lips 1 to 9 are winning, the state shifts to ART (step in FIG. 102). (See S2964).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 executes ART end number counter setting processing (step S3367). The ART end number counter setting process is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 97, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 clears the ceiling counter (step S3368). That is, the sub CPU 102 sets “0” to the ceiling counter.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when it transfers during ART preparation, a ceiling counter is cleared. Although not shown, in FIGS. 96, 105, and 109, as in FIG. 106, after execution of the ART end number counter setting process (see steps S2848, S3348, and S2987), the ceiling counter Is cleared.

  After executing the processing of step S3368, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<ART end check process>
The ART end check process performed in step S2777 in FIG. 102 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an ART end check process performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART flag is set to ON (step S3381). When determining that the ART flag is not set to ON, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the ART flag is set to ON, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the ART end number counter (see FIG. 97) is 0 (step S3382).

  When determining that the value of the ART end number counter is not 0, the sub CPU 102 updates the value of the ART end number counter (step S3383). In this process, the sub CPU 102 uses a value obtained by subtracting the number of medals paid out in the unit game from the value of the ART end number counter stored in the sub RAM 103 as a new ART end number counter value. It is stored in the RAM 103. Since the display command data received in step S765 of FIG. 58 includes information indicating the number of medals to be paid out, the sub CPU 102 recognizes the number of medals paid out in the unit game by receiving the display command data. can do. When the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals paid out in the unit game from the value of the ART end number counter stored in the sub RAM 103 is smaller than 0, the sub CPU 102 determines the ART end number counter. Update the value to 0.

  After executing the process of step S3383, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S3382 that the value of the ART end number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 subtracts 1 from the value of the ART game number counter (see step S1003, step S1006, and step S1008 in FIG. 69) (step S1002). S3384). In this process, the sub CPU 102 stores a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the ART game number counter stored in the sub RAM 103 in the sub RAM 103 as a new value of the ART game number counter. Although not shown, if the value of the ART game number counter is 0 before the execution of the process of step S3384, the sub CPU 102 does not execute the process of step S3384, but continues the ART continuous lottery process (step The process proceeds to S3386).

  After executing the processing of step S3384, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is 0 (step S3385). When determining that the value of the ART game number counter is not 0, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the value of the ART game number counter is 0, the sub CPU 102 executes an ART continuous lottery process (step S3386). The ART continuous lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the ART continuation lottery has been won (step S3387).

  If it is determined that the ART continuation lottery has been won, the sub CPU 102 executes ART end number counter setting processing (step S3388). Thereby, ART continues. The ART end number counter setting process is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 97, and thus the description thereof is omitted here. After executing the processing of step S3388, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the ART continuous lottery has not been won, the sub CPU 102 sets the ART flag to OFF (step S3389). This terminates ART. After executing the process of step S3389, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<ART continuous lottery processing>
The ART continuous lottery process performed in step S3386 in FIG. 107 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing ART continuous lottery processing performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 sets one of the ART mode selection flag (iii), the ART mode selection flag (iv), the ART mode selection flag (v), and the ART mode selection flag (vii) to ON. It is determined whether or not there is (step S3401). The ART mode selection flag (iii) is a flag indicating that the ART mode (iii) (see FIG. 85A) is selected, and the ART mode selection flag (iv) is the ART mode (iv) (FIG. 85 (b)) is selected, and the ART mode selection flag (v) is a flag indicating that the ART mode (v) (see FIG. 85 (b)) is selected. Yes, the ART mode selection flag (vii) is a flag indicating that the ART mode (vii) (see FIG. 85C) is selected (see step S3144 in FIG. 90 and step S3164 in FIG. 92).

  When it is determined that one of the ART mode selection flag (iii), the ART mode selection flag (iv), the ART mode selection flag (v), and the ART mode selection flag (vii) is set to ON, The sub CPU 102 executes the ART lottery based on the medium continuation rate ART continuation lottery table (step S3402). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the winning or non-winning by performing lottery based on the random number value. In the medium continuation rate ART continuous lottery table, lottery values are defined so that the winning probability is 50%.

  As a result, when any one of the ART mode (iii), the ART mode (iv), the ART mode (v), and the ART mode (vii) is selected, the “ART continuation rate” is medium. (See FIG. 85).

  After executing the process of step S3402, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  In step S3401, it is determined that none of the ART mode selection flag (iii), the ART mode selection flag (iv), the ART mode selection flag (v), and the ART mode selection flag (vii) is set to ON. In this case, the sub CPU 102 executes ART lottery based on the low continuation rate ART continuation lottery table (step S3403). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the winning or non-winning by performing lottery based on the random number value. In the low continuation rate ART continuous lottery table, lottery values are defined so that the winning probability is 25%.

  Accordingly, when any one of the ART mode (i), the ART mode (ii), the ART mode (vi), the ART mode (viii), and the ART mode (ix) is selected, “ART The “continuation rate” is a relatively small value (25%) (see FIG. 85).

  After executing the process of step S3403, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<MB processing>
With reference to FIG. 109, the MB medium process performed in step S2804 in FIG. 86 will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing MB processing performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  109, the sub CPU executes the processes of steps S2981 to S2988. Of these processes, processes other than the ART end number counter setting process (step S2987) are shown in FIG. Since the process (steps S981 to S988) is the same as the process other than step S987, description thereof is omitted here. Further, the ART end number counter setting process is also as described with reference to FIG. 97, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  The pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment has been described as an embodiment of the present invention.

  As a conventional gaming machine, it is an assist time (AT) for notifying a stop operation for winning a combination (small combination) related to paying out medals, and a winning combination (replay) that triggers the re-game operation Those having an ART state with a high probability are known. For example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-248441, an ART state and a special ART state having a higher replay win probability than the ART state are provided. In the ART state, one set (100 games) is played. On the condition that a replay such as a special replay is won in the special ART state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to add the number of ART sets. When the lottery is won, the number of ART sets is added.

  The present inventor can create new entertainment characteristics by elaborating on the conditions for operating the AT gaming state in the process of earnestly examining the gaming machine having the AT gaming state as described above. I came up with the idea that I could do it.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object thereof is to create new entertainment characteristics in gaming machines having an AT gaming state.

  In this regard, the pachislo 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(III-1) Symbol display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and reel display window 4) capable of performing symbol variation display and stop display;
Start command means (start lever 23 and start switch 79) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (main CPU 93 executing the process of FIG. 40),
In response to the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, a fluctuation control means for performing symbol display on the symbol display means (the process in step S196 in FIG. 43 and the process in step S465 in FIG. 49). Main CPU 93) for executing
Stop command means (stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R and stop switch) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
When a predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a predetermined stop operation, it corresponds to the predetermined internal winning combination In a display mode, stop control means (main CPU 93 for executing the process of FIG. 45 and the process of step S465 of FIG. 49) for stopping and displaying the symbols on which the variable display is performed by the fluctuation control means;
Informing means for informing stop operation information necessary for performing the predetermined stop operation (sub CPU 102 for executing push order navigation effect in ART);
Triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, AT operating means for operating an AT gaming state in which notification is given by the notification means (sub CPU 102 that executes the process of step S2964 in FIG. 102);
Management target variables (ART end number counter value and ART game number counter value) managed in the AT gaming state are relatively large as initial values when the AT gaming state is activated by the AT operating means. A high initial value (for example, the initial value “high” of the ART end number counter corresponding to the ART mode (ii) shown in FIG. 85A) and a relatively low initial value (for example, shown in FIG. 85C). Initial value setting means for setting one initial value selected from a plurality of initial values including the initial value “low” of the ART end number counter corresponding to the ART modes (vii) and (ix) (FIG. 97) A sub CPU 102) that executes processing;
When the managed variable (the value of the ART end number counter and the value of the ART game number counter) reaches a specific value (0) from the initial value set by the initial value setting means, the AT gaming state is changed. AT end means (sub CPU 102 that executes the processing of FIG. 107) that can be ended;
AT addition means for updating the managed variable so that the difference between the managed variable and the specific value is increased when a specific condition is satisfied in the AT gaming state (steps S1003 and S1006 in FIG. 69). And sub CPU 102 that executes step S1008),
Continuous lottery means for determining whether or not to continue the AT gaming state (sub CPU 102 for executing the processing of FIG. 108);
Selection operation means (ART method selection button) that allows the player to make a selection related to the game,
Condition selection means for selecting at least one of the plurality of conditions (conditions (I) to (V) shown in FIG. 84) provided as the predetermined condition based on the operation of the selection operation means (FIG. 88, step S3123, step S3135 in FIG. 89, and sub CPU 102 that executes the processing in step S3154 in FIG. 91).
The AT operating means is
Triggering that the condition selected by the condition selection means is established, the AT gaming state is activated,
The AT addition means is
High addition mode (for example, ART addition game number “high” corresponding to ART mode (i) shown in FIG. 85 (a)) in which the management target variable to be updated can be relatively large, and the management target to be updated From among a plurality of addition modes including a low addition mode in which variables can be relatively reduced (for example, the ART addition game number “low” corresponding to the ART modes (vii) and (viii) shown in FIG. 85 (c)). Based on the selected one addition mode, the variable to be managed is updated (the processes of FIGS. 100, 101, and 103 are executed)
The continuous lottery means includes
A high continuation rate with a relatively high probability of being determined to continue the AT gaming state (for example, an ART continuation rate “medium” corresponding to the ART mode (iii) shown in FIG. 85A) and the probability are relative One continuation selected from a plurality of continuation rates including a low continuation rate that is low (for example, the ART continuation rate “low” corresponding to the ART modes (viii) and (ix) shown in FIG. 85 (c)) Based on the rate, determine whether to continue the AT gaming state,
The plurality of conditions include predetermined AT lottery conditions (conditions (I) to (IV) shown in FIG. 84),
The gaming machine further includes:
AT lottery means (step S3208 in FIG. 94, step S3210, step S3222 in FIG. 95, and step in FIG. 105) for determining whether or not to activate the AT gaming state when the predetermined AT lottery condition is satisfied. A sub CPU 102) that executes the process of S3345;
Based on the operation of the selection operation means, AT mode selection means for selecting at least one of the selection of the one initial value, the selection of the one addition mode, and the selection of the one continuation rate (see FIG. 90, step S3144 and step S3164 in FIG.
The AT lottery means
Decide whether to activate the AT gaming state with a probability according to the selection by the AT mode selection means,
The AT operating means is
Activating the AT gaming state when it is determined by the AT lottery means to activate the AT gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In a conventional gaming machine, a condition set by a gaming machine maker as a condition for operating an AT gaming state (for example, a condition that a lottery of a game performed when a game number is canceled or a small role is won) These conditions were fixed uniformly for each model.

  On the other hand, according to the pachi-slot 1 according to the third embodiment, the selection operation means (ART method selection button) that allows the player to make a selection relating to the game is provided. Then, based on the operation of the selection operation means (ART method selection button), at least one of a plurality of conditions (conditions (I) to (V) shown in FIG. 84) is selected, and the selected condition is The ART is activated when it is established. Further, based on the operation of the selection operation means (ART method selection button), the selection of one initial value (the initial value of the ART end number counter), the selection of one addition mode (the number of ART addition games), and one At least one of the selection of the continuation rate (ART continuation rate) (selection of any of ART modes (i) to (ix) shown in FIG. 85) is performed, and the selected initial value (ART end) The ART is controlled based on the initial value of the number counter), the addition mode (art addition game number), the continuation rate (ART continuation rate), and the like. Since the initial value (the initial value of the ART end number counter), the addition mode (the number of ART addition games), and the continuation rate (ART continuation rate) are parameters related to the number of unit games executed in the ART, the player Depending on the selection, a difference is made in the number of unit games executed in the ART.

  As described above, according to the pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the player is provided with an opportunity to select the type of conditions that trigger the ART and the number of unit games executed in the ART. Through such selection, the player can be involved in the flow of the game related to the operation of the ART and the manner of the ART. Thus, the player's interest in ART can be increased, and the player can enjoy the contents of the game created by himself / herself through selection.

(III-2) The gaming machine of (III-1),
The AT lottery means
When the difference between the initial value and the specific value is relatively small as a result of the selection of the one initial value by the AT mode selection means (for example, the ART mode (vii) shown in FIG. 85 (c)) Or (ix) is selected), and the difference is relatively large (for example, when the ART mode (ii) shown in FIG. 85 (a) is selected), the probability is high. Decide to activate the AT gaming state,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachi-slot 1 according to the third embodiment, when the difference between the initial value of the management target variable (the value of the ART end number counter) and the specific value (0) is relatively small, the difference is relative. The number of unit games that are executed from when the ART is activated to when the ART is terminated may be reduced as compared with the case where the number is larger. On the other hand, according to the pachislot 1 according to the third embodiment, as a result of selecting one initial value, the difference between the initial value of the managed variable (the value of the ART end number counter) and the specific value (0) is When the difference is relatively small, the probability that the ART is determined to be activated (ART winning probability) is higher than when the difference is relatively large.

  In other words, if the difference between the initial value of the management target variable (the value of the ART end number counter) and the specific value (0) is relatively small, the number of unit games that can be executed in ART can be reduced. , ART winning probability is high and ART is easy to operate. As a result, when the player selects a low initial value (for example, the initial value “low” of the ART end number counter corresponding to the ART mode (vii) and (ix) shown in FIG. 85 (c)) and the high initial value. For example, fairness can be achieved with the case where the initial value “high” of the ART end number counter corresponding to the ART mode (ii) shown in FIG. 85A is selected. The gameability of “ART is easy to operate but the number of unit games executed in ART is small” and the gameability of “ART is difficult to operate but the number of unit games executed in ART is large” are Among them, the player can enjoy the game after selecting the gameability desired by the player.

(III-3) The gaming machine of (III-1),
The AT lottery means
When the AT mode selection unit selects the low addition mode (for example, the ART mode (vii) and (viii) ART addition game number “low” corresponding to FIG. 85 (c)), the high addition mode is selected. (For example, it is determined that the AT gaming state is to be activated with a high probability compared to the case where the number of ART added games corresponding to the ART mode (i) shown in FIG. 85 (a) is “high”).
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachi-slot 1 according to the third embodiment, when the low extra mode (for example, the number of ART extra games corresponding to the ART modes (vii) and (viii) shown in FIG. 85 (c) is “low”) is selected. Compared with the case where the high addition mode (for example, “high” ART addition game number corresponding to the ART mode (i) shown in FIG. 85A) is selected, the ART is activated after the ART is activated. The number of unit games that are executed before the game ends may be reduced. On the other hand, according to the pachi-slot 1 according to the third embodiment, the low addition mode (for example, the ART mode (vii) and (viii) shown in FIG. 85 (c), the number of additional games on the ART is “low”) is selected. If it is determined that the high addition mode (for example, “high” ART addition game number “high” corresponding to the ART mode (i) shown in FIG. 85A) is selected), the ART is determined to be operated. Probability (ART winning probability) is high.

  That is, when the low addition mode (for example, the ART addition game number “low” corresponding to the ART modes (vii) and (viii) shown in FIG. 85 (c)) is selected, a unit game that can be executed in ART. Instead of reducing the number of times, the ART winning probability is high and the ART is easy to operate. Thereby, when the player selects the low addition mode (for example, the ART addition game number “low” corresponding to the ART mode (vii) and (viii) shown in FIG. 85 (c)) and the high addition mode (for example, It is possible to achieve fairness with the case where the ART addition game number “high” corresponding to the ART mode (i) shown in FIG. The gameability of “ART is easy to operate but the number of unit games executed in ART is small” and the gameability of “ART is difficult to operate but the number of unit games executed in ART is large” are Among them, the player can enjoy the game after selecting the gameability desired by the player.

(III-4) The gaming machine of (III-1),
The AT lottery means
When the low continuation rate (for example, the ART continuation rate “low” corresponding to the ART mode (viii) and (ix) shown in FIG. 85 (c)) is selected by the AT mode selection unit, the high continuation rate ( For example, it is determined that the AT gaming state is activated with a higher probability than when the ART continuation rate “medium” corresponding to the ART mode (iii) shown in FIG. 85A is selected.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachislot 1 according to the third embodiment, when the low continuation rate (for example, the ART continuation rate “low” corresponding to the ART modes (viii) and (ix) shown in FIG. 85C) is selected). Compared with the case where a high continuation rate (for example, an ART continuation rate “medium” corresponding to the ART mode (iii) shown in FIG. 85A) is selected, the ART is terminated after the ART is activated. The number of unit games executed until then can be reduced. On the other hand, according to the pachislot 1 according to the third embodiment, the low continuation rate (for example, the ART continuation rate “low” corresponding to the ART modes (viii) and (ix) shown in FIG. 85C) is selected). If the high continuation rate (for example, the ART continuation rate “medium” corresponding to the ART mode (iii) shown in FIG. 85 (a)) is selected, the probability that the ART is determined to operate is determined. (ART winning probability) is high.

  That is, when a low continuation rate (for example, an ART continuation rate “low” corresponding to the ART modes (viii) and (ix) shown in FIG. 85 (c)) is selected, the unit game that can be executed in ART is selected. Instead of reducing the number of times, the ART winning probability is high and the ART is easy to operate. As a result, when the player selects a low continuation rate (for example, an ART continuation rate “low” corresponding to the ART mode (viii) and (ix) shown in FIG. 85 (c)) and a high continuation rate (for example, FIG. Fairness can be achieved with the case where the ART continuation rate “medium” corresponding to the ART mode (iii) shown in FIG. 85 (a) is selected. The gameability of “ART is easy to operate but the number of unit games executed in ART is small” and the gameability of “ART is difficult to operate but the number of unit games executed in ART is large” are Among them, the player can enjoy the game after selecting the gameability desired by the player.

(III-A) Symbol display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R and reel display window 4) capable of performing symbol variation display and stop display;
Start command means (start lever 23 and start switch 79) for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (main CPU 93 executing the process of FIG. 40),
In response to the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, a fluctuation control means for performing symbol display on the symbol display means (the process in step S196 in FIG. 43 and the process in step S465 in FIG. 49). Main CPU 93) for executing
Stop command means (stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R and stop switch) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
When a predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a predetermined stop operation, it corresponds to the predetermined internal winning combination In a display mode, stop control means (main CPU 93 for executing the process of FIG. 45 and the process of step S465 of FIG. 49) for stopping and displaying the symbols on which the variable display is performed by the fluctuation control means;
Informing means for informing stop operation information necessary for performing the predetermined stop operation (sub CPU 102 for executing push order navigation effect in ART);
Triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition, AT operating means for operating an AT gaming state in which notification is given by the notification means (sub CPU 102 that executes the process of step S2964 in FIG. 102);
Selection operation means (ART method selection button) that allows the player to make a selection related to the game,
Condition selection means for selecting at least one of the plurality of conditions (conditions (I) to (V) shown in FIG. 84) provided as the predetermined condition based on the operation of the selection operation means (FIG. 88, step S3123, step S3135 in FIG. 89, and sub CPU 102 that executes the processing in step S3154 in FIG. 91).
The AT operating means is
Triggering that the condition selected by the condition selection means is established, the AT gaming state is activated,
The plurality of conditions include predetermined AT lottery conditions (conditions (I) to (IV) shown in FIG. 84),
The gaming machine further includes:
AT lottery means (step S3208 in FIG. 94, step S3210, step S3222 in FIG. 95, and step in FIG. 105) for determining whether or not to activate the AT gaming state when the predetermined AT lottery condition is satisfied. A sub CPU 102) that executes the process of S3345;
Based on the operation of the selection operation means, a plurality of AT lottery probabilities (low ART winning probabilities corresponding to the ART modes (i) to (iii) shown in FIG. 85 (a), the ART mode shown in FIG. 85 (b) ( iv) to (vi) medium ART winning probability and the ART mode (vii) to (ix) high ART winning probability corresponding to the ART mode (vii) to (ix) shown in FIG. 85 (c) are selected. Probability selection means (sub CPU 102 that executes the processing of step S3144 in FIG. 90 and step S3164 in FIG. 92),
The AT lottery means
Determining whether to activate the AT gaming state based on one AT lottery probability selected by the probability selecting means;
The AT operating means is
Activating the AT gaming state when it is determined by the AT lottery means to activate the AT gaming state;
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In a conventional gaming machine, a condition set by a gaming machine maker as a condition for operating an AT gaming state (for example, a condition that a lottery of a game performed when a game number is canceled or a small role is won) These conditions were fixed uniformly for each model.

  On the other hand, according to the pachi-slot 1 according to the third embodiment, the selection operation means (ART method selection button) that allows the player to make a selection relating to the game is provided. Then, based on the operation of the selection operation means (ART method selection button), one of a plurality of conditions (conditions (I) to (V) shown in FIG. 84) is selected, and the selected condition is satisfied. As a result, ART is activated. Further, based on the operation of the selection operation means (ART method selection button), a plurality of ART winning probabilities (low ART winning probabilities corresponding to the ART modes (i) to (iii) shown in FIG. 85A), FIG. b) medium ART winning probability corresponding to ART modes (iv) to (vi) shown in FIG. 85 and high ART winning probability corresponding to ART modes (vii) to (ix) shown in FIG. 85 (c) An ART winning probability is selected, and it is determined whether to activate the ART based on the selected one ART winning probability, and the ART is activated when it is determined to activate the ART.

  As described above, according to the pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the player can determine the type of condition that triggers the ART and the winning probability (ART winning probability) of the ART lottery performed when the condition is satisfied. Offers you the opportunity to choose. Through such selection, the player can be involved in the game flow related to the operation of the ART. This can increase the player's interest in the conditions that trigger the ART, and allows the player to enjoy the flow of the game created by himself / herself through selection.

  In the third embodiment, conditions (I) to (V) shown in FIG. 84 are provided as conditions (predetermined conditions) that trigger the ART to operate. Among these conditions, conditions (I) to (V) are provided. (IV) was described as being a condition for performing ART lottery. That is, when any one of the conditions (I) to (IV) is selected, the ART does not operate only when the selected condition is satisfied. It is necessary to win. On the other hand, when the condition (V) is selected, it is determined that the ART is activated when the condition (V) is satisfied. As described above, the predetermined condition in the present invention (the condition that triggers the activation of the AT gaming state) may be one in which the operation of the AT gaming state is confirmed when the condition is satisfied, or the AT gaming state May not be determined (conditions for performing AT lottery).

  In the third embodiment, only one route among the first route to the fifth route (five routes corresponding to the conditions (I) to (V) shown in FIG. 84) is used as the ART transition route. It has been selected and described as being able to move to ART only via the one route. However, in the present invention, it is configured and selected so that two or more conditions can be selected from a plurality of conditions provided as predetermined conditions (conditions that trigger the AT gaming state). The AT gaming state may be activated when any one of the two or more conditions is satisfied.

  In the third embodiment, when the value of the ART method selection game number counter reaches a specific value (100, 200, 300, or 500), the ART transition route selection screen or the ART mode selection screen is displayed. As described above, the player is provided with an opportunity to select an ART transition route or an ART mode. Although not shown, in the third embodiment, the ART transition route selection screen and the ART mode selection screen are displayed even at a predetermined time (game store opening time), and the player can display the ART transition route and the ART mode. Can be selected. In the present invention, a condition for displaying a screen (ART transition route selection screen) for selecting an ART transition route (condition that triggers an AT gaming state) and an ART mode (AT lottery probability) are selected. The condition for displaying the screen for displaying (ART mode selection screen) may be the same or different. In the present invention, the conditions for displaying these screens are not limited to the above example, and the player can select an ART transition route and an ART mode at an arbitrary timing. Can do. For example, when a rare combination with a low probability of being determined as an internal winning combination is won internally, or when the rare combination wins, an ART transition route selection screen or an ART mode selection screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. Also good. Further, when the number of bonus operations reaches a predetermined number, the ART transition route selection screen or the ART mode selection screen may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, or when the power is turned on, the ART transition route selection screen or the ART mode selection is displayed. The screen may be displayed on a liquid crystal display device. Further, the two-dimensional code obtained by encoding the server address information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device in such a manner that the two-dimensional code can be picked up using a camera included in the portable terminal owned by the player, and the two-dimensional code is picked up Based on the communication between the portable terminal and the server, the player may be able to select an ART transition route or an ART mode.

  In the third embodiment, the ART transition route and the ART mode can be selected using the ART method selection button. The ART method selection button corresponds to the selection operation means in the present invention. The selection operation means in the present invention is not particularly limited, and a conventionally known input device (for example, a touch panel) can be appropriately employed. Also, the input device for selecting the ART transition route (conditions that trigger the AT gaming state) and the input device for selecting the ART mode (AT lottery probability) are different devices (buttons). May be. That is, the selection operation means in the present invention may be composed of two or more input devices.

(III-B) The gaming machine of (III-A),
The plurality of AT lottery probabilities include a high AT lottery probability with a relatively high probability determined to activate the AT gaming state, and a low AT lottery probability with a relatively low probability,
The gaming machine further includes:
When the low AT lottery probability (for example, the low ART winning probability corresponding to the ART modes (i) to (iii) shown in FIG. 85A) is selected by the probability selecting means, the probability selecting means Compared with a case where a high AT lottery probability (for example, a high ART winning probability corresponding to the ART modes (vii) to (ix) shown in FIG. 85 (c)) is selected, the AT game means performs the AT game. AT game execution means for controlling the AT gaming state (FIGS. 97, 100, 101, 101) so that the number of unit games to be executed from when the state is activated to when the AT gaming state is terminated can be increased. 103 and sub-CPU 102 that executes the processing of FIG.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachi-slot 1 according to the third embodiment, the plurality of ART winning probabilities are high ART winning probabilities (ART mode (vii) shown in FIG. 85 (c)) that have a relatively high probability of being determined when the ART is operated. ART winning probability corresponding to (ix)) and low ART winning probability with relatively low probability (ART winning probability corresponding to ART modes (i) to (iii) shown in FIG. 85 (a)), Is included. When a high ART winning probability (ART winning probability corresponding to the ART modes (vii) to (ix) shown in FIG. 85 (c)) is selected, the ART lottery winning probability is high and the ART is likely to operate. On the other hand, when the low ART winning probability (the ART winning probability corresponding to the ART modes (i) to (iii) shown in FIG. 85A) is selected, the winning probability of the ART lottery is low, ART does not work easily.

  On the other hand, according to the pachislot 1 according to the third embodiment, when the low ART winning probability (the ART winning probability corresponding to the ART modes (i) to (iii) shown in FIG. 85A) is selected. Compared with the case where a high ART winning probability (ART winning probabilities corresponding to the ART modes (vii) to (ix) shown in FIG. 85 (c)) is selected, the ART ends after the ART is activated. The ART is controlled so that the number of unit games executed before the game can be increased. That is, when the low ART winning probability (the ART winning probability corresponding to the ART modes (i) to (iii) shown in FIG. 85 (a)) is selected, the high ART winning probability (FIG. 85 (c)) is selected. Compared to the case where the ART winning (ART win probability corresponding to the ART modes (vii) to (ix)) is selected, instead of the ART being difficult to operate, more unit games can be executed in the ART. It is configured. Thus, when the player selects a high ART winning probability (ART winning probability corresponding to the ART modes (vii) to (ix) shown in FIG. 85 (c)) and a low ART winning probability (FIG. 85 (a)). The fairness can be achieved with the case where the ART winning probability corresponding to the ART modes (i) to (iii) shown in FIG. The gameability of “ART is difficult to operate but the number of unit games executed in ART is large” and “Game that is easy to operate ART but the number of unit games executed in ART is small” Among them, the player can enjoy the game after selecting the gameability desired by the player.

  From the viewpoint of fairness, when the player selects a low ART winning probability (ART winning probability corresponding to the ART modes (i) to (iii) shown in FIG. 85 (a)) and the medium ART winning probability (Art winning probability corresponding to ART modes (iv) to (vi) shown in FIG. 85 (b)) and high ART winning probability (ART modes (vii) to (ix shown in FIG. 85 (c)) It is desirable that the payout rate (expected value of the number of medals (balance) expected value) throughout the game is theoretically the same when the ART winning probability corresponding to) is selected.

(III-C) The gaming machine of (III-B),
The AT game execution means includes:
When the managed variable (the value of the ART end number counter) managed in the AT gaming state reaches a specific value (0) from the initial value when the AT gaming state is activated by the AT operating means, AT end means capable of ending the AT gaming state (sub CPU 102 for executing the process of FIG. 107),
The initial value (for example, 500) when the low AT lottery probability (for example, the low ART winning probability corresponding to the ART mode (ii) shown in FIG. 85A) is selected by the probability selecting means and the As for the difference from the specific value, the high AT lottery probability (for example, the high ART winning probability corresponding to the ART modes (vii) and (ix) shown in FIG. 85C) is selected by the probability selecting means. Greater than the difference between the initial value in the case (e.g., 100) and the specific value,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachi-slot 1 according to the third embodiment, when the managed variable (the value of the ART end number counter) managed in the ART reaches a specific value (0) from the initial value at the time when the ART is activated. , ART can be terminated. An initial value (for example, 500) and a specific value (0) when a low ART winning probability (for example, an ART winning probability corresponding to the ART mode (ii) shown in FIG. 85A) is selected. The difference between the initial value (for example, 100) when the high ART winning probability (for example, the ART winning probability corresponding to the ART modes (vii) and (ix) shown in FIG. 85 (c)) is selected is specified. It is larger than the difference from the value (0).

  Accordingly, when a low ART winning probability (for example, an ART winning probability corresponding to the ART mode (ii) shown in FIG. 85A) is selected, a high ART winning probability (for example, FIG. 85C) is selected. Compared to the case where the ART winning (ART corresponding to (vii) and (ix)) shown in (2) is selected, the managed variable (the value of the ART end number counter) reaches a specific value (0). The number of unit games to be executed can be increased. In this way, when a low ART winning probability (for example, an ART winning probability corresponding to the ART mode (ii) shown in FIG. 85A) is selected, a high ART winning probability (for example, FIG. 85 ( As compared with the case where the ART mode (vii) and (ART winning probability corresponding to (ix)) shown in c) are selected, it is possible to configure so that more unit games can be executed in ART. .

  In the third embodiment, it has been described that the “initial value” is set in the ART end number counter when it is determined that the ART operates. However, in the present invention, when it is determined that the ART is activated, an “initial value” may be set in the ART game number counter as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment. That is, the management target variable in the present invention may be an ART game number counter value or an ART end number counter value.

  In the third embodiment, the value of the ART end number counter is decremented by the number of payouts each time a medal is paid out in ART. In the present invention, the processing related to the update of the ART end number counter is not limited to this example. For example, when medals are paid out in ART, the value of the ART end number counter may be subtracted by a value obtained by subtracting the number of inserted medals from the number of paid out medals (the number of increased medals in the unit game).

  In the third embodiment, the value of the ART game number counter is managed separately from the value of the ART end number counter, and the number of ART games is determined when it is determined to increase (add) the number of ART games. Subtraction of the value of the ART game number counter is started on the condition that the value of the counter is added by the number of games added and the value of the ART end number counter reaches 0, and the value of the ART game number counter is set to 0. In this case, it is determined that whether or not to continue the ART is determined by the ART continuous lottery, and the ART is ended when the ART continuous lottery is not won. However, in the present invention, a form in which the number of ART games is not added may be adopted, and when the value of the ART end number counter (management target variable) reaches 0, the ART continuous lottery is won. The ART may be continued on the condition that it is present, and if the ART continuation lottery is not won, the ART may be terminated. Further, in the present invention, a form in which ART continuous lottery is not performed may be employed, and when the value of the ART end number counter (management target variable) reaches 0, ART may be immediately ended. .

(III-D) The gaming machine of (III-B),
The AT game execution means includes:
An AT that can end the AT gaming state when the number of times of management (the value of the ART game number counter), which is the number of unit games managed in the AT gaming state, reaches a specific value (0). An ending unit (sub CPU 102 that executes the process of step S3389 in FIG. 107);
Each time a unit game is executed in the AT gaming state, a management target number counting means for updating the management target number so that a difference between the management target number and the specific value is decreased by one (see FIG. A sub CPU 102) that executes the process of step S3384 of 107;
When the specific condition is satisfied in the AT gaming state, the AT count increasing means for updating the management target count so that the difference between the management target count and the specific value is increased (step S1003 in FIG. 69, step S1003). S1006 and sub CPU102) that executes step S1008,
When the low AT lottery probability (for example, the low ART winning probability corresponding to the ART mode (i) shown in FIG. 85A) is selected by the probability selecting means, the high AT lottery probability is selected by the probability selecting means. (For example, compared with the case where the high ART winning probability corresponding to the ART modes (vii) and (viii) shown in FIG. 85 (c)) is selected, the management target updated by the AT number increasing means The AT gaming state is controlled so that the number of times can be increased (the processes of FIGS. 100, 101, and 103 are executed)
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachi-slot 1 according to the third embodiment, when the number of times of management (the value of the ART game number counter) that is the number of unit games managed in the ART reaches a specific value (0), the ART is terminated. Can do. The number of times of management (the value of the ART game number counter) is such that every time a unit game is executed in ART, the difference between the number of times of management (the value of the ART game number counter) and a specific value (0) is one. On the other hand, when a specific condition (a condition for adding the number of ART games) is satisfied in ART, the number of times of management (the value of the ART game number counter) and a specific value (0) are updated. It is updated so as to increase the difference (the number of ART games increases). When a low ART winning probability (for example, an ART winning probability corresponding to the ART mode (i) shown in FIG. 85A) is selected, a high ART winning probability (for example, FIG. 85C) is selected. Compared to the case where the ART mode (vii) and the ART winning probability corresponding to (viii) are selected, the difference between the number of times of management (the value of the ART game number counter) and the specific value (0) is The number of management targets that are updated so as to increase (the value of the ART game number counter) may increase (the value of the number of games added during the ART period may increase).

  Thus, when a low ART winning probability (for example, an ART winning probability corresponding to the ART mode (i) shown in FIG. 85A) is selected, a high ART winning probability (for example, FIG. 85C) is selected. Compared to the case where the ART mode (vii) and (ART winning probability corresponding to (viii)) shown in FIG. 5 are selected, the number of times of management (value of the ART game number counter) reaches a specific value (0). The number of unit games to be executed can be increased. In this way, when a low ART winning probability (for example, an ART winning probability corresponding to the ART mode (i) shown in FIG. 85A) is selected, a high ART winning probability (for example, FIG. 85 ( Compared to the case where the ART mode (vii) and (ART winning probability corresponding to (viii)) shown in c) are selected, it is possible to configure so that more unit games can be executed in ART. .

(III-E) The gaming machine of (III-B),
The AT game execution means includes:
Continuation lottery means for determining whether or not to continue the AT gaming state (sub CPU 102 that executes the process of step S3386 in FIG. 107);
The managed variables (ART end number counter value and ART game number counter value) managed in the AT gaming state reach a specific value (0), and the AT gaming state is not continued by the continuous lottery means. AT end means (sub CPU 102 that executes the process of step S3389 in FIG. 107) for ending the AT gaming state when it is determined,
The continuous lottery means includes
When the low AT lottery probability (for example, the low ART winning probability corresponding to the ART mode (iii) shown in FIG. 85A) is selected by the probability selecting means, the high AT lottery probability is selected by the probability selecting means. (For example, a high ART winning probability corresponding to ART modes (viii) and (ix) shown in FIG. 85 (c)) is determined as compared with the case where the AT gaming state is continued with high probability. (Execute the process of FIG. 108),
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachi-slot 1 according to the third embodiment, the management target variables (the value of the ART end number counter and the value of the ART game number counter) managed in the ART reach a specific value (0) and continue the ART. If it is decided not to do so, the ART is terminated. When a low ART winning probability (for example, an ART winning probability corresponding to the ART mode (iii) shown in FIG. 85A) is selected, a high ART winning probability (for example, FIG. 85C) is selected. It is determined that the ART is continued with a high probability as compared to the case where the ART winning modes (viii) and (ix) to be shown) are selected.

  Accordingly, when a low ART winning probability (for example, an ART winning probability corresponding to the ART mode (iii) shown in FIG. 85A) is selected, a high ART winning probability (for example, FIG. 85C) is selected. Compared with the case where the ART mode (viii) and (ix) (ART winning probability corresponding to (ix)) are selected, the number of unit games executed from when the ART is activated to when the ART is terminated is larger. Can be. In this way, when a low ART winning probability (for example, an ART winning probability corresponding to the ART mode (iii) shown in FIG. 85A) is selected, a high ART winning probability (for example, FIG. 85 ( As compared with the case where the ART mode (viii) and (ix) (ART winning probability corresponding to (ix)) shown in c) are selected, it is possible to configure so that more unit games can be executed in ART. .

  In the third embodiment, it has been described that the ART continuous lottery is performed when the managed variable (the value of the ART end number counter and the value of the ART game number counter) reaches a specific value (0). In the present invention, the timing for performing lottery (ART continuation lottery) for determining whether or not to continue the AT gaming state (ART) is not particularly limited, and lottery is performed at any timing during the AT gaming state (ART). Can be configured to do. For example, the ART continuous lottery may be performed when the value of the ART end number counter becomes 0 (before the subtraction of the value of the ART game number counter is started), or the ART continuous lottery is performed at the start of the ART. It is good also as performing.

  In the third embodiment, when the ART continuation lottery is won, the “initial value” is set again in the ART end number counter to explain that the ART is continued. However, in the present invention, the process relating to the continuation of the AT gaming state (ART) is not limited to this example, and for example, a specified value different from the “initial value” is set in the ART game number counter (managed variable). It is good as well.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The first to third embodiments have been described above. The fourth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachislot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments. In the following, the same components as those of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portions in the first embodiment to the third embodiment that are applicable in the fourth embodiment will be omitted.

  The outline of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the warning effect that is passed through when shifting to ART.

[Predictor]
As in the first embodiment, in the fourth embodiment, the first route (see FIGS. 60 and 61) is provided as a route (ART transition route) in which the gaming state (sub) transitions from the normal gaming state to ART. It has been. In the first route, when the game state (sub) shifts from the normal game state to ART, an effect (prediction effect) suggesting that the game state (sub) shifts to ART is routed.

  That is, when a predetermined winning combination (any of winning numbers 12, 47, 48, and 51) is determined as an internal winning combination in the normal gaming state, an ART lottery is executed. When the ART lottery is won, a precursor effect is performed, and after the precursor effect is finished, the state shifts to ART. On the other hand, even when the ART lottery is not won, the sign effect is performed on the condition that the sign effect transition lottery is won. In this case, even if the indication effect ends, the ART does not shift. The precursor effect produced when the ART lottery is won is the present precursor effect, and the precursor effect performed when the ART lottery is not won is the gasse precursor effect.

  The precursor effect is an effect (continuous effect) performed over a plurality of consecutive unit games. In the first embodiment, it has been described that the sign effect is performed over seven consecutive unit games. In the first embodiment, the number of unit games (the number of warning effect games) in which the warning effect continues is fixed to seven times.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, among the normal number of precursor effect games (15 times), the number of precursor effect games less than normal (7 times), and the number of precursor effect games more than normal (30 times). Thus, any one of the precursor effect game numbers is selected (see (I) to (III) in FIG. 110).

  Selection of the number of indication effect games is performed based on the game digest mode. As the game digestion mode, a standard digestion mode, a high-speed digestion mode, and a low-speed digestion mode are provided.

  The high-speed digest mode is a mode in which a transition is made when a state in which a start operation and a stop operation by the player are performed at a high speed (speed at which the game is digested) continues for a certain period. The low-speed digestion mode is a mode in which a transition is made when a state where the speed at which the start operation and the stop operation are performed (speed at which the game is digested) continues for a certain period of time.

  Specifically, when a start operation (start lever operation) for starting one unit game is performed, a time (elapsed time) elapsed from the start of reel rotation in the previous unit game is a specified time. If (4.1 seconds = 4100 ms) has not been reached, the system waits until the elapsed time reaches the specified time (4.1 seconds). Then, when the elapsed time reaches a specified time (4.1 seconds), the rotation of the reel is started.

  More specifically, when the rotation of the reel starts, a value corresponding to a specified time (4.1 seconds) is set in the rotation start wait timer and is subtracted as time elapses. If the value of the rotation start wait timer is not 0 at the time when the start operation (operation of the start lever) is performed, the reel starts rotating after waiting until the value of the rotation start wait timer becomes 0 ( (See FIG. 112).

  In this embodiment, when a start operation (start lever operation) is performed, the value of the rotation start wait timer at that time is acquired as the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer (see FIG. 117). The remaining value of the rotation start wait timer corresponds to the waiting time until the reel starts to rotate, and corresponds to the elapsed time from the start of the reel rotation in the previous unit game.

  The large remaining value of the rotation start wait timer means that the speed of the stop operation (stop button operation) in the previous unit game and the start operation (start lever operation) in the current unit game was fast. ing. In this embodiment, when the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer is 1000 ms or more, it is considered that the speed of the stop operation and the start operation is high, and a value of 1000 ms or more is acquired as the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer. When the played unit game continues for 10 games, the mode is shifted to the high-speed digest mode.

  On the other hand, the small value of the rotation start wait timer means that the speed at which the stop operation (stop button operation) in the previous unit game and the start operation (start lever operation) in the current unit game were performed was slow. I mean. In this embodiment, when the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer is 100 ms or less, it is considered that the speed of the stop operation and the start operation is slow, and a value of 100 ms or less is acquired as the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer. When the played unit game continues for 10 games, the mode is shifted to the low-speed digestion mode.

  In the high-speed digest mode, the probability that a small value (7) is determined as the number of precursor effect games is high. In the low-speed digestion mode, the probability that a large value (30) is determined as the number of precursor effect games is high. In the standard digest mode (standard mode), the probability that a medium value (15) is determined as the number of indication effect games is high. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the speed at which the start operation and the stop operation are performed is reflected in the number of precursor effect games (see (I) to (III) in FIG. 110 and FIG. 122).

  The outline of the fourth embodiment has been described above with reference to FIG. Details will be described below.

<Main control processing>
FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a main control process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the main CPU 93 executes the processes of steps S4011 to S4018. Since these processes are the same as the processes of steps S11 to S18 of FIG. 37, the description thereof is omitted here.

  After executing the process of step S4018, the main CPU 93 executes a wait process (step S4019). The weight process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes the processes of steps S4020 to S4026. Since these processes are the same as the processes of steps S20 to S26 of FIG. 37, the description thereof is omitted here.

  After executing the processing of step S4026, the main CPU 93 sets the demo transition timer to on (step S4027). That is, the main CPU 93 starts measuring the time elapsed from this point. The value of the demo transition timer is incremented by one each time the timer update process (see step S463 in FIG. 49) in the interrupt process is performed. When the value of the demo transition timer reaches a predetermined value, processing related to transition to the game digest mode (see FIG. 118) is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 93 executes the processes of steps S4028 to S4030. Since these processes are the same as the processes of steps S27 to S29 of FIG. 37, the description thereof is omitted here.

<Wait processing>
The wait process performed in step S4019 of FIG. 111 will be described using FIG. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing wait processing performed in the pachislot main control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the rotation start wait timer is 0 (step S5101). The value of the rotation start wait timer is set to a prescribed value in the process of step S5102, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer update process in the interrupt process (see step S463 in FIG. 49) is performed.

  When determining that the value of the rotation start wait timer is not 0, the main CPU 93 executes the process of step S5101 again. That is, the main CPU 93 waits until the value of the rotation start wait timer becomes 0 and digests the time.

  When determining that the value of the rotation start wait timer is 0, the main CPU 93 sets a specified value (a value corresponding to 4.1 seconds) in the rotation start wait timer (step S5102). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends this subroutine.

<Medal reception / start check processing>
The medal acceptance / start check process performed in step S4013 in FIG. 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing a medal acceptance / start check process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the process shown in FIG. 113, the main CPU 93 executes the processes in steps S4081 to S4090. These processes are the same as the processes in steps S81 to S90 in FIG. Is omitted. The medal insertion check process (step S4087) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in step S4090 that the start switch 79 is ON, that is, if it is determined that a start command signal issued when the start lever 23 is operated is received, the main CPU 93 sets the rotation start wait timer. A residual value is acquired (step S4091). In this process, the main CPU 93 stores the current value of the rotation start wait timer in the main RAM 95.

  Next, the main CPU 93 generates game start command data, and stores the generated game start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S4092). The game start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 in the command data transmission process (see step S464 in FIG. 49). The game start command data includes information indicating the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer acquired in step S4091. When the game start command data is received (see step S4756 in FIG. 115), the sub control circuit 101 performs processing (see FIG. 117) related to the transition to the game digest mode.

  After executing the process of step S4092, the main CPU 93 executes the process of step S4093 and ends this subroutine. The processing in step S4093 is as described in step S91 in FIG.

<Medal insertion check process>
The medal insertion check process performed in step S4087 of FIG. 113 will be described using FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing a medal insertion check process performed in the main control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a medal passage is detected by the medal sensor (step S5201).

  When determining that the passage of medals has been detected, the main CPU 93 turns off the demo transition timer (step S5202). That is, the main CPU 93 finishes measuring the elapsed time started in the process of step S4027 in FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the inserted number counter (number of inserted medals) is the maximum value of the inserted number (see step S4085 in FIG. 113) (step S5203).

  When determining that the value of the inserted number counter is the maximum value of the inserted number, the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the value of the credit counter (credit number) (step S5204). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends this subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the value of the inserted number counter is not the maximum value of the inserted number, the main CPU 93 adds 1 to the value of the inserted number counter (step S5205).

  If it is determined in step S5201 that the passage of medals has not been detected, or after executing the process of step S5205, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the BET switch 77 is on (step S5206). In this process, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a detection signal issued when the BET button 22 is pressed is received.

  When determining that the BET switch 77 is on, the main CPU 93 turns off the demo transition timer (step S5207). That is, the main CPU 93 finishes measuring the elapsed time started in the process of step S4027 in FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 93 adds the inserted number corresponding to the type of the BET button 22 (1-BET button or maximum BET button) to the inserted number counter (step S5208). Then, a value corresponding to the inserted number is subtracted from the credit counter (step S5209). Thereafter, the main CPU 93 ends this subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S5206 that the BET switch 77 is not on, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the demo transition timer is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 10 seconds) (step S5210). ). The value of the demo transition timer indicates an elapsed time since the process of step S4027 in FIG.

  When determining that the value of the demo transfer timer is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the main CPU 93 generates demo transfer command data, and stores the generated demo transfer command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 95 (step S5211). . The demo transfer command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 in the command data transmission process (see step S464 in FIG. 49).

  If it is determined in step S5210 that the value of the demo transition timer is less than the predetermined value, or after executing the processing of step S5211, the main CPU 93 ends the present subroutine.

<Production content determination process>
The effect content determination process performed in step S711 in FIG. 56 will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116 are flowcharts showing effect content determination processing performed in the pachislot sub-control circuit according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes of steps S4751 to S4754. These processes are the same as the processes of steps S751 to S754 of FIG.

  If it is determined in step S4753 that the medal insertion command data has not been received, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not game start command data (see step S4092 in FIG. 113) has been received (step S4755).

  If it is determined that game start command data has been received, the sub CPU 102 executes a game start command reception process (step S4756). The game start command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S4756, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game start command data has not been received, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes of steps S4757 to S4772, which are the same as the processes of steps S755 to S770 of FIG. Since it is a process, description here is abbreviate | omitted.

  If it is determined in step S4771 that bonus end command data has not been received, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not demo transfer command data (see step S5211 in FIG. 114) has been received (step S4773).

  If it is determined that the demo transfer command data has been received, the sub CPU 102 executes a demo transfer command reception process (step S4774). The demo transition command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in step S4773 that the demo transfer command data has not been received, or after executing the process of step S4774, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<Processing when a game start command is received>
With reference to FIG. 117, the game start command reception process performed in step S4756 of FIG. 115 will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a game start command reception process performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 acquires the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer for the latest 10 games (step S5301). 115. Since the game start command data received in step S4755 in FIG. 115 includes information indicating the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer acquired in the unit game (see step S4091 in FIG. 113), the game start command data is received. As a result, the sub CPU 102 can recognize the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer acquired in the unit game. In each unit game, every time the game start command data is received, the sub CPU 102 stores the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer in the sub RAM 103 based on the information included in the game start command data. That is, each time a unit game is played, one value is stored in the sub-RAM 103 as the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer. There is a one-to-one correspondence between the unit game and the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer. The remaining value of the rotation start wait timer in one unit game is held in the sub RAM 103 while the unit game is played ten times. When the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer in the current unit game is stored in the sub RAM 103, the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer in the unit game 10 times before is erased from the sub RAM 103. As a result, the sub RAM 103 stores the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer acquired in the last 10 unit games.

  After executing the processing of step S5301, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game digest mode is the standard digest mode (step S5302). Since information indicating the current game digestion mode is stored in the sub RAM 103, the sub CPU 102 can recognize the current game digest mode by referring to the sub RAM 103.

  When determining that the current game digestion mode is the standard digestion mode, the sub CPU 102 determines that all remaining values of the rotation start wait timer for the latest 10 games (see step S5301) correspond to the first predetermined value (1000 milliseconds). Value) or more (step S5303).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that all of the remaining values of the rotation start wait timer for the last 10 games are equal to or greater than the first predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1000 milliseconds), the sub CPU 102 switches from the standard digest mode to the fast digest mode. The mode is changed (step S5304). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 stores information indicating the high-speed digest mode in the sub RAM 103 as information indicating the current game digest mode.

  After executing the processing of step S5304, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S5303 that at least one of the remaining rotation start wait timer values for the last 10 games is less than a first predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1000 milliseconds), the sub CPU 102 It is determined whether or not all remaining values of the rotation start wait timer for the game are equal to or less than a second predetermined value (a value corresponding to 100 milliseconds) (step S5305).

  When determining that at least one of the remaining values of the rotation start wait timer for the last 10 games is greater than the second predetermined value (a value corresponding to 100 milliseconds), the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that all the remaining values of the rotation start wait timer for the last 10 games are equal to or less than the second predetermined value (a value corresponding to 100 milliseconds), the sub CPU 102 shifts from the standard digest mode to the low speed digest mode. The game digest mode is shifted (step S5306). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 stores information indicating the low speed digestion mode in the sub RAM 103 as information indicating the current game digestion mode.

  After executing the processing of step S5306, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S5302 that the current game digest mode is not the standard digest mode, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game digest mode is the high speed digest mode (step S5307).

  When determining that the current game digest mode is the fast digest mode, the sub CPU 102 determines the latest remaining value of the rotation start wait timer among the remaining values of the rotation start wait timer for the latest 10 games (see step S5301). It is determined whether (the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer in the current unit game) is equal to or greater than a first predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1000 milliseconds) (step S5308).

  When the sub CPU 102 determines that the latest remaining value of the rotation start wait timer (the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer in the current unit game) is equal to or greater than the first predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1000 milliseconds), Exit the subroutine.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 102 determines that the latest remaining value of the rotation start wait timer (the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer in the current unit game) is less than a first predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1000 milliseconds), The game digest mode is shifted from the high speed digest mode to the standard digest mode (step S5309). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 stores information indicating the standard digest mode in the sub RAM 103 as information indicating the current game digest mode.

  After executing the process of step S5309, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S5307 that the current game digest mode is not the fast digest mode, the sub CPU 102 determines the latest rotation start wait timer among the remaining values of the rotation start wait timer for the last 10 games (see step S5301). It is determined whether or not the remaining value (the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer in the current unit game) is equal to or less than the second predetermined value (a value corresponding to 100 milliseconds) (step S5310).

  If the sub CPU 102 determines that the latest remaining value of the rotation start wait timer (the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer in the current unit game) is less than or equal to the second predetermined value (a value corresponding to 100 milliseconds), Exit the subroutine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the latest remaining value of the rotation start wait timer (the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer in the current unit game) is greater than the second predetermined value (a value corresponding to 100 milliseconds), the sub CPU 102 Then, the game digest mode is shifted from the low speed digest mode to the standard digest mode (step S5311). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 stores information indicating the standard digest mode in the sub RAM 103 as information indicating the current game digest mode.

  After executing the processing of step S5311, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<Demo transition command reception processing>
Referring to FIG. 118, the demo transition command reception process performed in step S4774 of FIG. 116 will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing processing upon reception of a demo transition command performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to one embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game digest mode is the high speed digest mode (step S5401). Since information indicating the current game digestion mode is stored in the sub RAM 103, the sub CPU 102 can recognize the current game digest mode by referring to the sub RAM 103.

  When determining that the current game digestion mode is the fast digestion mode, the sub CPU 102 shifts the game digestion mode from the fast digestion mode to the standard digestion mode (step S5402). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 stores information indicating the standard digest mode in the sub RAM 103 as information indicating the current game digest mode.

  After executing the process of step S5402, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  When determining in step S5401 that the current game digestion mode is not the high-speed digestion mode, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the current game digestion mode is the low-speed digestion mode (step S5403).

  When determining that the current game digestion mode is not the low-speed digestion mode, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  On the other hand, when determining that the current game digest mode is the low speed digest mode, the sub CPU 102 shifts the game digest mode from the low speed digest mode to the standard digest mode (step S5405). In this processing, the sub CPU 102 stores information indicating the standard digest mode in the sub RAM 103 as information indicating the current game digest mode.

  After executing the processing of step S5405, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

<Normal processing>
The normal processing performed in step S809 in FIG. 59 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing normal processing performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  First, the sub CPU 102 executes the processes in steps S4821 to S4825. Since these processes are the same as the processes in steps S821 to S825 in FIG. 60, the description thereof is omitted here.

  If it is determined in step S4825 that it has been determined to shift to the gasse sign effect, that is, if it is determined that the sign effect transition lottery executed in step S4824 has been won, the sub CPU 102 executes a gasse sign effect data set process. (Step S4826).

  With reference to FIG. 120, the gaze precursor effect data set process will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a gasset sign effect data set process performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the gasse precursor effect data set process, first, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of precursor effect games based on the current game digest mode (step S5501). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the sub RAM 103 to obtain information indicating the current game digestion mode, and also stores it in the indication effect game number determination table (see FIG. 122) stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. Based on the lottery, the number of precursor effect games is determined.

  FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a precursor effect game number determination table. In the sign effect game number determination table, the number of sign effect games less than normal (7 times), the number of normal sign effect games (15 times), and the number of sign effect games more than normal (30 times) On the other hand, lottery values are defined for each game digestion mode (standard mode, high-speed digestion mode, and low-speed digestion mode).

  As for the standard digest mode (standard mode), the number of sign production games less than usual (7 times), the number of normal sign production games (15 times), and the number of sign production games more than usual (30 times) The largest lottery value is defined for the normal number of predecessor effect games (15 times). Thereby, when the current game digestion mode is the standard digestion mode, it is easy to select the normal number of predecessor effect games (15 times).

  About the high-speed digestion mode, the number of sign production games less than usual (7 times), the number of normal sign production games (15 times), and the number of sign production games more than usual (30 times) are higher than usual. The largest lottery value is defined for a small number of precursor effect games (seven times). Thereby, when the current game digestion mode is the high-speed digestion mode, it is easy to select the number of precursor effect games (seven times) less than usual.

  Regarding the low-speed digestion mode, among the number of precursor effect games less than normal (7 times), the number of normal predictor effect games (15 times), and the number of precursor effect games more than normal (30 times), it is higher than normal. The largest lottery value is defined for a large number of precursor effect games (30). Thereby, when the current game digestion mode is the low-speed digestion mode, it is easy to select a greater number of precursor effect games (30 times) than usual.

  And, due to the lottery value as described above, the expected value of the number of precursor effect games determined when the current game digestion mode is the high-speed digestion mode, the current game digestion mode is the standard digestion mode It is smaller than the expected value of the number of predecessor effect games decided on. In addition, the expected value of the number of precursor effect games determined when the current game digest mode is the low speed digest mode is the expected value of the number of predictor effect games determined when the current game digest mode is the standard digest mode. Is bigger than.

  Thus, when the current game digestion mode is the high-speed digestion mode, a relatively small value is determined as the number of predecessor effect games compared to the case where the current game digestion mode is the standard digestion mode. It has become easier. In addition, when the current game digestion mode is the low-speed digestion mode, a relatively large value is likely to be determined as the number of indication effect games compared to the case where the current game digestion mode is the standard digestion mode. ing.

  Returning to FIG. 120, after executing the processing of step S5501, the sub CPU 102 sets the gasse omen effect data corresponding to the number of omen effects games (step S5502). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the gasse sign effect data used for the current gasse sign effect data from the plurality of gasse sign effect data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. In the ROM cartridge substrate 86, as a plurality of gaze indication effects data, according to the effect data corresponding to the gaze indication effect that is performed over 7 unit games and the gasse indication effect that is performed over 15 unit games Production data and production data corresponding to the gasse sign production performed over 30 unit games are stored.

  In the process of step S5502, if the number of precursor effect games determined in step S5501 is 7, the sub CPU 102 generates effect data corresponding to the gasse precursor effect performed over the seven unit games, The production data used for production is determined. Further, when the number of warning effect games determined in step S5501 is 15, the sub CPU 102 uses the effect data corresponding to the gasse warning effect performed over 15 unit games as the current gasse warning effect. Decide on production data. Further, when the number of warning effect games determined in step S5501 is 30, the sub CPU 102 uses the effect data corresponding to the gasse warning effect performed over 30 unit games for the current gasse warning effect. Decide on production data.

  After executing the processing of step S5502, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  As described above, the gasse precursor effect data set process performed in step S4826 in FIG. 119 has been described with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG.

  If it is determined in step S4823 that the ART lottery has been won, the sub CPU 102 executes a present sign effect data set process (step S4827).

  The precursor effect data set process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the present sign effect data set processing performed in the sub-control circuit of the pachislot according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  In the sign effect data set process, first, the sub CPU 102 determines the number of sign effect games based on the current game digest mode (step S5601). In this process, the sub CPU 102 refers to the sub RAM 103 to obtain information indicating the current game digestion mode, and also stores it in the indication effect game number determination table (see FIG. 122) stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. Based on the lottery, the number of precursor effect games is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the present sign effect data corresponding to the number of sign effect games (step S5602). In this process, the sub CPU 102 determines the present sign effect data used for the present sign effect from the plural present sign effects data stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 86. On the ROM cartridge substrate 86, as a plurality of pre-announcement effect data, according to the pre-announcement effect performed over seven unit games and the pre-announcement effect performed over 15 unit games. Effect data and effect data corresponding to the present sign effect performed over 30 unit games are stored.

  In the process of step S5602, if the number of precursor effect games determined in step S5601 is 7, the sub CPU 102 obtains the effect data corresponding to the foresign effect performed over the seven unit games for the present precursor. The production data used for production is determined. Further, when the number of precursor effect games determined in step S5601 is 15, the sub CPU 102 uses the effect data corresponding to the present precursor effect performed over 15 unit games for the present precursor effect. Decide on production data. Further, when the number of precursor effect games determined in step S5601 is 30, the sub CPU 102 uses the effect data corresponding to the present precursor effect performed over 30 unit games for the present precursor effect. Decide on production data.

  After executing the process of step S5602, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  As described above, the precursor effect data set process performed in step S4827 in FIG. 119 has been described with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG.

  After executing the processing of step S4826 or step S4827, the sub CPU 102 sets the indication effect flag to ON (step S4828). As a result, from the next unit game, the present sign effect or the gasse sign effect is executed (see step S842 in FIG. 61).

  Next, the sub CPU 102 sets “7”, “15”, or “30” in the precursor effect game number counter (step S4829). In this process, when the number of precursor effect games determined in step S5501 of FIG. 120 or step S5601 of FIG. 121 is 7, the sub CPU 102 sets “7” in the precursor effect game number counter. Also, if the number of precursor effect games determined in step S5501 of FIG. 120 or step S5601 of FIG. 121 is 15, the sub CPU 102 sets “15” in the precursor effect game number counter. Also, if the number of precursor effect games determined in step S5501 of FIG. 120 or step S5601 of FIG. 121 is 30, the sub CPU 102 sets “30” in the precursor effect game number counter. The value of the precursor effect game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games for which the precursor effect is executed, and is stored in the sub RAM 103.

  After executing the processing of step S4829, the sub CPU 102 ends the present subroutine.

  If it is determined in step S4821 that the winning number is not any of 12, 47, 48, and 51, or if it is determined in step S4825 that it is not determined to shift to the gasse sign effect, the sub CPU 102 determines in step S4830. Although the processing of to step S4834 is executed, these processing are the same as the processing of step S830 to step S834 of FIG. 60, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  The pachislot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has been described as an embodiment of the present invention.

  Conventional gaming machines are generally equipped with a liquid crystal display device, and the display of various images on the liquid crystal display device according to the state of the game can be performed to boost the progress of the game, It improves the player's expectation for development.

  As a gaming machine that performs such an effect, an effect image in which a series of stories is developed is displayed, and whether or not an internal winning combination related to the occurrence of the bonus game is determined based on the content or ending of the story. Have been proposed (see, for example, JP-A-2001-286600).

  The present inventor said that in the process of earnestly examining the effects performed on the gaming machine, it is possible to perform the effects in accordance with the player's psychological state by elaborating the method for determining the effects. I came up with an idea.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of producing an effect in accordance with a player's psychological state.

  In this regard, the pachislo 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following features.

(IV-1) Symbol display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and reel display window 4) capable of performing symbol variation display and stop display;
Start command means (start lever 23 and start switch 79) for outputting a start command signal that triggers a unit game in response to an operation by the player;
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, an internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93 executing the processing of FIG. 40) for determining an internal winning combination;
In response to the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, a fluctuation control means for performing symbol fluctuation display on the symbol display means (the process of FIG. 112, the process of step S196 of FIG. 43, and the figure). Main CPU 93) for executing the process of step S465 of 49,
Stop command means (stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R and stop switch) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Stop control for stopping and displaying the symbols on which the variation display is performed based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the stop command signal output from the stop command means Means (main CPU 93 executing the process of FIG. 45 and the process of step S465 of FIG. 49);
Effect data deciding means (sub CPU 102 for executing the process of FIG. 117, the process of FIG. 118, the process of FIG. 120, and the process of FIG. 121) for determining the effect data used for the effect;
On the basis of the effect data determined by the effect data determining means, effect execution means for executing a specific effect (a precursor effect) during the period in which a plurality of consecutive unit games are performed (the process of step S842 in FIG. 61). A sub CPU 102) to be executed;
A value corresponding to an elapsed time from the start of one unit game to the detection of a start command signal that triggers the start of the next unit game, when the effect data is determined by the effect data determining means Reference value acquisition means (sub CPU102 that executes the process of step S4091 in FIG. 113) for acquiring a reference value (remaining value of the rotation start wait timer) referred to in FIG.
The effect data determining means includes:
When the unit game is repeatedly executed, the continuous number determining means for determining the number of the plurality of consecutive unit games based on the plurality of reference values acquired by the reference value acquiring means (the process of FIG. 117). 118, the sub CPU 102) that executes the process of step S5501 of FIG. 120 and the process of step S5601 of FIG. 121.
The production execution means
When the number of unit games determined by the continuous number determining means is expressed as N, the specific effect is executed in a period in which N consecutive unit games are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachislot 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the unit game is repeatedly executed, the reference value (remaining value of the rotation start wait timer) is repeatedly acquired as the game is executed. The reference value (remaining value of the rotation start wait timer) is a start command that triggers the start of the next unit game after the start of one unit game (after the symbol change display is started in one unit game) It is a value corresponding to the elapsed time until the signal is detected. In the pachi-slot 1 according to the fourth embodiment, from the start of one unit game (from the start of the change display of symbols in one unit game) until the start command signal is detected in the next unit game. An operation (stop operation) for stopping the change display of symbols in one unit game and an operation (start operation) for starting the next unit game are performed. Accordingly, the reference value (remaining value of the rotation start wait timer) indicates how quickly (how fast) the stop operation (stop button operation) and the start operation (start lever operation) are performed. It can be said that it is a value.

  As a result, a plurality of reference values (remaining values of the rotation start wait timer) acquired as the unit game is repeatedly executed in a certain period are set to start operations (starts performed by the player in the period). Lever operation) and stop operation (stop button operation) speed (speed at which the game is consumed) will be reflected. The speed depends on the player's psychological state (for example, “I want to play games while watching the production carefully”, “I want to play games carefully because I am a beginner and unfamiliar with games”, “ `` I want to play games with a lot of room, '' `` I only need to check the results of the game, I am not interested in the production '', "I want to play games as soon as possible because the closing time is approaching, but I'm in an AT"). According to the pachi-slot 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the effect data is determined based on the plurality of reference values (remaining values of the rotation start weight timer as an index indicating the player's psychological state) thus acquired. The Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect in accordance with the psychological state of the player who is playing the game under various situations placed during the game. Thereby, since a player's satisfaction can be obtained, the popularity of the player can be gained and the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

  Moreover, according to the pachislot 1 according to the fourth embodiment, a plurality of consecutive times based on a plurality of reference values (remaining values of the rotation start wait timer) acquired as the unit game is repeatedly executed. The number of unit games (number of consecutive times) is determined. Then, based on the determined number of consecutive times (N), a specific effect (a precursor effect) is executed in a period in which N consecutive unit games are performed. As described above, according to the pachislot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the number of unit games (number of consecutive times) constituting a period in which a specific performance (precursor performance) is executed has a plurality of reference values (player's psychology). Therefore, the number of consecutive times can be set to a value in accordance with the player's psychological state.

  The reference value (remaining value of the rotation start wait timer) is a value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start of one unit game until the detection of a start command signal that triggers the start of the next unit game. The start time of one unit game may be the time when the rotation of the reel starts, the time when the operation of the start lever is detected, or the time when the operation of the BET button is detected. May be.

  In the fourth embodiment, it has been described that the precursor effect is an effect (continuous effect) performed over a plurality of consecutive unit games. The specific performance (precursor performance) in the present invention is not limited to one that is always executed in a period in which a plurality of consecutive unit games are performed, and may be executed in at least a part of the period. That's fine. For example, a unit game in which a specific effect (a precursor effect) is not performed may be included in a plurality of consecutive unit games.

  In the fourth embodiment, the number of unit games (number of consecutive times) in which the prelude effect (continuous effect) continues can be different depending on the game digest mode (standard digest mode, high speed digest mode, or low speed digest mode). As described, it is determined. In the present invention, the number of continuous times in the standard digestion mode, the number of continuous times in the high-speed digestion mode, and the number of continuous times in the low-speed digestion mode may be different or the same.

  If the number of unit games (continuous number of times) that the continuous production continues is constant regardless of the game digestion mode (standard digestion mode, high-speed digestion mode, or low-speed digestion mode), depending on the game digestion mode, The scenario (rough story) for continuous production may be different. For example, it is conceivable that a short story scenario is selected in the high-speed digestion mode on the premise that an effect having a story is performed as a continuous effect. In fast digestion mode, the time required for one unit game is short, so the number of unit games required to complete a story tends to increase. However, by selecting a short story scenario, it is relatively small. The story can be completed by the number of games. Similarly, it may be configured to select a long story scenario in the slow digestion mode. In slow digestion mode, it takes a long time to play one unit game, so there is a possibility that the story will be completed with a small number of unit games, but the story is completed by selecting a scenario with a long story. It becomes possible to extend the number of games until.

  In the fourth embodiment, it is described that the effect data used for the sign effect (continuous effect) is determined before the start of the sign effect (continuous effect) (step S5502 in FIG. 120 and step S5602 in FIG. 121). However, in the present invention, after the precursor effect (continuous effect) is started, effect data is determined in each unit game (every game) during the period in which the predictor effect (continuous effect) is performed. It is good. For example, as described above, when performing an effect having a story as a continuous effect, only the rough content (scenario) of the story is determined before the start of the precursor effect (continuous effect). As the game progresses, each game may be determined at any time.

  Further, in the present invention, the movements of objects and characters appearing in the production video may be made different according to the game digest mode (standard digest mode, high speed digest mode, or low speed digest mode). For example, the presentation data corresponding to the game digestion mode may be determined so that the movement of the character is fast in the high-speed digestion mode and the character movement is slow in the low-speed digestion mode.

(IV-1 ′) The gaming machine of (IV-1),
The continuous number determination means (the sub CPU 102 that executes the processing in FIG. 117, the processing in FIG. 118, the processing in step S5501 in FIG. 120, and the processing in step S5601 in FIG. 121)
When the unit game is repeatedly executed, the number of the plurality of consecutive unit games is determined according to the length of the elapsed time.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachi-slot 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the unit game is repeatedly executed, the elapsed time (from the start of the change display of the symbol in one unit game to the start operation of the player in the next unit game) The number of unit games (number of consecutive times) in which the continuous performance (precursor performance) continues is determined according to the length of the time.

  The elapsed time is a time obtained by subtracting the time corresponding to the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer from 4100 milliseconds. For example, when the time corresponding to the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer is 1000 milliseconds, the elapsed time is 4100−1000 = 3100 milliseconds. When the time corresponding to the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer is 100 milliseconds, the elapsed time is 4100-100 = 4000 milliseconds.

  If the time is long, the player may want to play the game slowly. If the time is short, the player may want to play the game in a hurry. According to the pachislot 1 according to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to determine the number of unit games (number of consecutive times) in which the continuous performance (precursor performance) continues in a form that matches the psychological state of such a player.

  In the fourth embodiment, in the high-speed digestion mode (when the speed at which the game is digested is high), the number of unit games (the number of consecutive effects) in which the prelude effect (continuous effect) continues is reduced, and in the low-speed digestion mode (game) It is explained that the number of unit games (number of consecutive times) in which the predation effect (continuous effect) continues increases when the speed of digestion is slow. In the present invention, in the high-speed digestion mode (when the speed at which the game is digested is high), the number of unit games (number of consecutive times) in which the prelude effect (continuous effect) continues increases, When the digested speed is low), the number of unit games (number of consecutive times) in which the precursor effect (continuous effect) continues may be reduced. As described above, in the fast digestion mode, the time required for one unit game is short, so the number of unit games required to complete the story tends to increase, but the continuation effect (continuous effect) continues. By increasing the number of unit games to be played (number of consecutive times), the story can be completed without difficulty. In addition, since the time required for one unit game is long in the low-speed digestion mode, the more the number of unit games (continuous number of times) in which the precursor effect (continuous effect) continues, the longer the story becomes, and the effect corresponding to that. Although data is required, it is possible to prevent an increase in the amount of data related to the effect by reducing the number of unit games (the number of consecutive times) in which the precursor effect (continuous effect) continues.

(IV-2) The gaming machine of (IV-1),
The continuous number determination means (the sub CPU 102 that executes the processing in FIG. 117, the processing in FIG. 118, the processing in step S5501 in FIG. 120, and the processing in step S5601 in FIG. 121)
When a plurality of reference values are continuously acquired by the reference value acquisition means, all the elapsed times corresponding to the plurality of reference values (remaining values of the rotation start wait timer for the latest 10 games) are all When the time is equal to or shorter than one predetermined time (4100−1000 = 3100 milliseconds), the elapsed time corresponding to at least one reference value among the plurality of reference values is longer than the case where the elapsed time is longer than the first predetermined time. It is possible to determine a small number as the number of consecutive unit games of the plurality of times.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachi-slot 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when a plurality of reference values (remaining values of the rotation start wait timer) are continuously acquired, the plurality of reference values (the rotation start wait timer for the latest 10 games). (Remaining value of each)) (elapsed time) (from the start of symbol variation display in one unit game to the start operation of the player in the next unit game), that is, from the above-mentioned "4100 milliseconds" When all the times obtained by subtracting the time corresponding to the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer are all equal to or shorter than the first predetermined time (4100−1000 = 3100 milliseconds) (that is, the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer for the latest 10 games) Unit time that constitutes a period during which a specific performance (a prelude effect) is executed, compared to a case where the time corresponding to is all 1000 milliseconds or more) As the number (the number of continuous), it is possible to determine the small number.

  Elapsed time corresponding to each of a plurality of reference values (remaining values of the rotation start wait timer for the last 10 games) (from the start of symbol variation display in one unit game to the start operation of the player in the next unit game) (Ie, the time obtained by subtracting the time corresponding to the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer from 4100 milliseconds) is less than or equal to the first predetermined time (4100−1000 = 3100 milliseconds) (ie, When the time corresponding to the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer for the last 10 games is all 1000 milliseconds or more), compared to the case where it is not, the change display of the symbol in one unit game is started. The time interval until the player's starting operation in the next unit game is shortened. That is, in this case, the speed of the start operation (start lever operation) and stop operation (stop button operation) is high, and the player thinks that he wants to play the game quickly. It is done. A plurality of reference values (remaining values of the rotation start wait timer for the last 10 games) include such a player's psychological state (for example, “it is only necessary to confirm the result of the game and is not interested in performance”, “ There is a possibility that “I want to advance the game smoothly because I am an expert and familiar with the game” and “I want to play the game as soon as possible because the closing time is approaching during AT”). According to the pachi-slot 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when such a value is acquired as a plurality of reference values (remaining values of the rotation start wait timer for the latest 10 games), a specific effect (a sign effect) is executed. It is possible to determine a small number as the number of unit games (continuous number of times) constituting the period to be played. That is, in this case, it is possible to reduce the number of unit games (number of consecutive times) constituting a period during which a specific performance (precursor effect) is executed, and thereby a specific performance (precursor effect) is performed. Shorten the time and respond to the player's psychological state of "I want to play a game quickly".

  In the fourth embodiment, the case has been described in which when the remaining values of the rotation start wait timers for the latest 10 games are all equal to or greater than the first predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1000 milliseconds), the mode is shifted to the fast digestion mode. In the present invention, the conditions for shifting to the high-speed digestion mode are not limited to this example. For example, among the remaining values of the rotation start wait timer for the most recent predetermined number of games (for example, 10 unit games), a predetermined ratio (for example, 80%) or more corresponds to the first predetermined value (for example, 1000 milliseconds) If the value is equal to or greater than the value, the mode may be shifted to the fast digestion mode. In addition, when the average of the remaining values of the rotation start wait timer for the most recent predetermined number of games (for example, 10 unit games) is equal to or greater than the first predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 1000 milliseconds), the high speed It is good also as making it transfer to digestion mode.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the remaining value of the latest rotation start wait timer is less than the first predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1000 milliseconds) in the high-speed digestion mode, the mode is immediately shifted to the standard digestion mode. explained. However, even if the remaining value of the latest rotation start wait timer is less than the first predetermined value (a value corresponding to 1000 milliseconds) in the high-speed digest mode, a predetermined game is required until the standard digest mode is entered. When a value less than a first predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 1000 milliseconds) is continuously acquired as the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer in the high-speed digest mode, It is good also as making it transfer to standard digestion mode.

(IV-3) The gaming machine of (IV-1) or (IV-2),
The continuous number determination means (the sub CPU 102 that executes the processing in FIG. 117, the processing in FIG. 118, the processing in step S5501 in FIG. 120, and the processing in step S5601 in FIG. 121)
When a plurality of reference values are continuously acquired by the reference value acquisition means, all the elapsed times corresponding to the plurality of reference values (remaining values of the rotation start wait timer for the latest 10 games) are all 2 When the predetermined time (4100−100 = 4000 milliseconds) or longer is compared with the case where the elapsed time corresponding to at least one reference value of the plurality of reference values is shorter than the second predetermined time. , It is possible to determine a large number as the number of consecutive unit games of a plurality of times,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachi-slot 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when a plurality of reference values (remaining values of the rotation start wait timer) are continuously acquired, the plurality of reference values (the rotation start wait timer for the latest 10 games). (Remaining value of each)) (elapsed time) (from the start of symbol variation display in one unit game to the start operation of the player in the next unit game), that is, from the above-mentioned "4100 milliseconds" When the time obtained by subtracting the time corresponding to the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer is all equal to or longer than the second predetermined time (4100-100 = 4000 milliseconds) (that is, the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer for the latest 10 games) The number of unit games that constitute a period during which a specific performance (precursor performance) is executed as compared to the case where the time corresponding to is all 100 milliseconds or less) A continuous number of times), it is possible to determine a large number.

  Elapsed time corresponding to each of a plurality of reference values (remaining values of the rotation start wait timer for the last 10 games) (from the start of symbol variation display in one unit game to the start operation of the player in the next unit game) (Ie, the time obtained by subtracting the time corresponding to the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer from 4100 milliseconds) is equal to or longer than the second predetermined time (4100-100 = 4000 milliseconds) (ie, In the case where the time corresponding to the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer for the last 10 games is 100 milliseconds or less), compared to the case where this is not the case, from the start of the variable display of symbols in one unit game The time interval until the player's starting operation in the next unit game is long. That is, in this case, the speed of the start operation (start lever operation) and stop operation (stop button operation) is slow, and the player thinks that he wants to play the game slowly. It is done. A plurality of reference values (remaining values of the rotation start wait timer for the last 10 games) include such a player's psychological state (for example, “I want to play a game while watching the production carefully”, “ "I want to play games carefully because I am unfamiliar," or "I want to play games with plenty of time because there is time before closing."). According to the pachi-slot 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when such a value is acquired as a plurality of reference values (remaining values of the rotation start wait timer for the latest 10 games), a specific effect (a sign effect) is executed. It is possible to determine a large number as the number of unit games (number of consecutive times) constituting the period to be played. That is, in this case, it is possible to increase the number of unit games (number of consecutive times) constituting a period during which a specific performance (precursor effect) is executed, and thereby a specific performance (precursor effect) is performed. The player can respond to the psychological state of the player who wants to play slowly by extending the time.

  In the fourth embodiment, the case where the remaining values of the rotation start wait timers for the last 10 games are all equal to or less than the second predetermined value (a value corresponding to 100 milliseconds) has been described as shifting to the low-speed digestion mode. In the present invention, the conditions for shifting to the low-speed digestion mode are not limited to this example. For example, among the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer for the most recent predetermined number of games (for example, 10 unit games), a predetermined ratio (for example, 80%) or more corresponds to the second predetermined value (for example, 100 milliseconds) It is good also as making it transfer to low-speed digestion mode, when it is below. In addition, when the average of the remaining values of the rotation start wait timer for the most recent predetermined number of games (for example, 10 unit games) is equal to or less than the second predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 100 milliseconds), the speed is low. It is good also as making it transfer to digestion mode.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the remaining value of the latest rotation start wait timer becomes larger than the second predetermined value (a value corresponding to 100 milliseconds) in the low-speed digestion mode, the mode immediately shifts to the standard digestion mode. Explained as letting. However, even if the remaining value of the latest rotation start wait timer is larger than the second predetermined value (a value corresponding to 100 milliseconds) in the low-speed digestion mode, the transition to the standard digestion mode is required. In the low-speed digest mode, a value greater than a second predetermined value (for example, a value corresponding to 100 milliseconds) is continuously acquired for a predetermined number of games. In this case, it is possible to shift to the standard digestion mode.

(IV-4) Symbol display means (reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and reel display window 4) capable of performing symbol variation display and stop display;
Start command means (start lever 23 and start switch 79) for outputting a start command signal that triggers a unit game in response to an operation by the player;
Triggered by the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, an internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 93 executing the processing of FIG. 40) for determining an internal winning combination;
In response to the detection of the start command signal output from the start command means, the fluctuation control means for displaying the symbol fluctuation on the symbol display means (the process in step S196 in FIG. 43 and the process in step S465 in FIG. 49). A main CPU 93) that executes processing;
Stop command means (stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R and stop switch) for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Stop control for stopping and displaying the symbols on which the variation display is performed based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means and the stop command signal output from the stop command means Means (main CPU 93 executing the process of FIG. 45 and the process of step S465 of FIG. 49);
Effect data deciding means (sub CPU 102 for executing the process of FIG. 117, the process of FIG. 118, the process of FIG. 120, and the process of FIG. 121) for determining the effect data used for the effect;
Based on the effect data determined by the effect data determination means, effect execution means for executing a specific effect during a period in which a plurality of consecutive unit games are performed (the sub CPU 102 executing the process of step S842 in FIG. 61). )When,
At the time when a start command signal that triggers the start of one unit game is detected, the time that has elapsed since the change display of the symbol is started by the change control means in the unit game before the one unit game is a specified time. (4100 milliseconds) is not reached, a gaming machine comprising standby means (main CPU 93 that executes the processing of FIG. 112) waiting until the time reaches the specified time,
The fluctuation control means includes
After waiting until the time reaches the specified time by the waiting means, the symbol display means to start the symbol variation display,
The gaming machine further includes:
Reference value acquisition means for acquiring a value corresponding to the waiting time by the waiting means (remaining value of the rotation start wait timer) as a reference value that is referred to when the effect data is determined by the effect data determining means,
The effect data determining means includes:
When the unit game is repeatedly executed, the continuous number determining means for determining the number of the plurality of consecutive unit games based on the plurality of reference values acquired by the reference value acquiring means (the process of FIG. 117). 118, the sub CPU 102) that executes the process of step S5501 of FIG. 120 and the process of step S5601 of FIG. 121.
The production execution means
When the number of unit games determined by the continuous number determining means is expressed as N, the specific effect is executed in a period in which N consecutive unit games are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the pachislot 1 according to the fourth embodiment, when the unit game is repeatedly executed, the reference value (remaining value of the rotation start wait timer) is repeatedly acquired as the game is executed. The reference value (remaining value of the rotation start wait timer) is the waiting time from when the start command signal is detected until the symbol variation display is started (when the start command signal that triggers the start of one unit game is detected) In the unit game before the one unit game, when the time elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display has not reached the specified time, the time until the symbol variation display is started) Is the value to be In the pachi-slot 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the start command signal is displayed in the next unit game (one unit game) after the symbol variation display is started in one unit game (unit game before one unit game). Until the detection of, the operation to stop the change display of symbols in one unit game (unit game before one unit game) (stop operation) and the next unit game (one unit game) are started. An operation (start operation) is performed. Therefore, the longer the waiting time (the time corresponding to the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer) is, the faster the stop operation (stop button operation) and the start operation (start lever operation) are performed. . That is, the reference value (remaining value of the rotation start wait timer) indicates how quickly (how fast) the stop operation (stop button operation) and the start operation (start lever operation) are performed. It can be said that it is a value.

  As a result, a plurality of reference values (remaining values of the rotation start wait timer) acquired as the unit game is repeatedly executed in a certain period are set to start operations (starts performed by the player in the period). Lever operation) and stop operation (stop button operation) speed (speed at which the game is consumed) will be reflected. The speed depends on the player's psychological state (for example, “I want to play games while watching the production carefully”, “I want to play games carefully because I am a beginner and unfamiliar with games”, “ `` I want to play games with a lot of room, '' `` I only need to check the results of the game, I am not interested in the production '', "I want to play games as soon as possible because the closing time is approaching, but I'm in an AT"). According to the pachi-slot 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the effect data is determined based on the plurality of reference values (remaining values of the rotation start weight timer as an index indicating the player's psychological state) thus acquired. The Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect in accordance with the psychological state of the player who is playing the game under various situations placed during the game. Thereby, since a player's satisfaction can be obtained, the popularity of the player can be gained and the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

  Moreover, according to the pachislot 1 according to the fourth embodiment, a plurality of consecutive times based on a plurality of reference values (remaining values of the rotation start wait timer) acquired as the unit game is repeatedly executed. The number of unit games (number of consecutive times) is determined. Then, based on the determined number of consecutive times (N), a specific effect (a precursor effect) is executed in a period in which N consecutive unit games are performed. As described above, according to the pachislot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the number of unit games (number of consecutive times) constituting a period in which a specific performance (precursor performance) is executed has a plurality of reference values (player's psychology). Therefore, the number of consecutive times can be set to a value in accordance with the player's psychological state.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the rotation of the reel starts, a value corresponding to a specified time (4100 milliseconds) is set in the rotation start wait timer, and then subtracted with the passage of time to start operation (start lever In the case where the value of the rotation start wait timer is not 0 at the time when the operation is performed, it is described that the reel starts rotating after waiting until the value of the rotation start wait timer becomes 0. And assuming that, when a start operation (operation of the start lever) is performed, the value of the rotation start wait timer at that time is acquired as the remaining value (reference value) of the rotation start wait timer did. Thus, in the fourth embodiment, the case where the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer is employed as the reference value in the present invention has been described.

  The reference value in the present invention is not limited to the rotation start wait timer.In the present invention, the elapsed time from the start of the symbol variation display in the previous unit game to the start operation in the current unit game is used as the reference value. It may be adopted. In this case, the elapsed time as the reference value can be calculated by subtracting the time corresponding to the remaining value of the rotation start wait timer from 4100 milliseconds. In addition, at the time when the change display of the symbol in the previous unit game starts, the timer value is added with the passage of time after the timer is turned on, and the timer value at the time when the start operation is performed If acquired, the value of the acquired timer becomes a value corresponding to the elapsed time.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the value of the demo transition timer becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined value, that is, when a predetermined time (10 seconds) elapses without a bet after a medal is paid out, It explained as making it transfer to digestion mode. In the present invention, it is desirable to shift to the standard digest mode when the demo transition condition (condition for displaying the demo screen) is satisfied. If the demo transition condition is established, there is a possibility that the player who has been playing until now may have stopped the game. In such a case, if the fast digestion mode or the slow digestion mode is to be continued, This is because there is a possibility that an effect that does not match the psychological state of the player who is about to start a new game will be performed.

  The demo transition condition is not limited to the example of the fourth embodiment, and a conventionally known condition can be appropriately adopted as the transition condition to the demo screen. Normally, the demonstration screen is shifted to a case where it is determined that no game is being performed (waiting for a customer). For example, in addition to the example of the fourth embodiment, a start lever after automatic insertion by re-game Demonstration of the condition that a predetermined time elapses without being operated, the C / P button is operated and all credited medals are paid out, and the power is turned on (until BET is made). It can be mentioned as a transition condition to the screen.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but only specific examples are illustrated, and the present invention is not particularly limited. The specific configuration of each unit and the like can be appropriately changed. The effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are only the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. is not.

1 Pachislot 3L, 3C, 3R Reel 4 Reel display window 11 Liquid crystal display device 19L, 19C, 19R Stop button 23 Start lever 58, 64, 65L, 65R Speaker 79 Start switch 80 Stop switch board 85 LED
86 ROM cartridge substrate 91 Main control circuit 92 Microcomputer 93 Main CPU
94 Main ROM
95 Main RAM
101 Sub control circuit 102 Sub CPU
103 Sub RAM

Claims (4)

A symbol display means capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols;
Start command means for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Triggered by detecting the start command signal output from the start command means, an internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination;
Triggered by detecting the start command signal output from the start command means, a fluctuation control means for displaying a fluctuation of symbols in the symbol display means,
Stop command means for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
When a predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a predetermined stop operation, it corresponds to the predetermined internal winning combination In a display mode, stop control means for stopping and displaying a symbol on which variation display is performed by the variation control means,
Informing means for informing stop operation information necessary for performing the predetermined stop operation;
AT operation means for operating an AT gaming state in which notification by the notification means is performed when a predetermined condition is established;
When the number of management targets, which is the number of unit games managed in the AT gaming state, reaches a specific value from the initial value at the time when the AT gaming state is activated by the AT operating means, the AT gaming state is changed. AT termination means for terminating;
A management target number counting means for updating the management target number so that a difference between the management target number and the specific value is decreased by one each time a unit game is executed once in the AT gaming state;
When a specific condition is satisfied in the AT gaming state, the management target is set such that a difference between the management target count and the specific value is reduced separately from the management target count update by the management target count counting means. Management target number special update means for updating the number of times,
A gaming machine comprising: The stop control means includes
When a specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, when the stop command signal is output from the stop command means at a specific timing, the symbols constituting a specific symbol combination are While the symbol display means stops displaying, when the stop command signal is output from the stop command means at a timing other than the specific timing, symbols other than the symbols constituting the specific symbol combination are displayed in the symbol display. Stop display on the means,
The management object number special update means is:
When the specific internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means in the AT gaming state, when the stop command signal is output from the stop command means at a timing other than the specific timing, Separately from the update of the management target number by the management target number counting means, the management target number is updated so that a difference between the management target number and the specific value is reduced.
The gaming machine according to claim 1. The management object number special update means is:
When the specific condition is satisfied after the predetermined management target number of times special update condition is satisfied in the AT gaming state, the management target number is updated so that a difference between the management target number and the specific value is reduced. On the other hand, when the specific condition is not satisfied, the management target number is updated so that a difference between the management target number and the specific value is increased.
The gaming machine according to claim 1. A symbol display means capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols;
Start command means for outputting a start command signal in response to an operation by the player;
Triggered by detecting the start command signal output from the start command means, an internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination;
Triggered by detecting the start command signal output from the start command means, a fluctuation control means for displaying a fluctuation of symbols in the symbol display means,
Stop command means for outputting a stop command signal in response to an operation by the player;
When a predetermined internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop command signal output from the stop command means is in response to a predetermined stop operation, it corresponds to the predetermined internal winning combination In a display mode, stop control means for stopping and displaying a symbol on which variation display is performed by the variation control means,
Informing means for informing stop operation information necessary for performing the predetermined stop operation;
AT operation means for operating an AT gaming state in which notification by the notification means is performed when a predetermined condition is established;
AT end means for ending the AT gaming state when a managed variable managed in the AT gaming state reaches a specific value from an initial value at the time when the AT gaming state is activated by the AT operating means; ,
First managed object variable updating means for updating the managed object variable so that a difference between the managed object variable and the specified value is reduced when the first specified condition is satisfied in the AT gaming state;
When the second specific condition is satisfied in the AT gaming state, the difference between the managed variable and the specific value is reduced separately from the update of the managed variable by the first managed variable updating means. A second managed object variable updating means for updating the managed object variable;
A gaming machine comprising:

Images